Home

LDOS & LS-DOS Reference Manual M-40-060 (1992 - tim

1. CL an acronym for Communication Line although any other device name could be used However throughout this section the CL device will be used for reference purposes It is also useful when receiving large files to pre allocate the file space with the CREATE library command This reduces the system overhead while running COMM COMM provides many user options It interfaces with the user by utilizing the top row of keys as Programmed Function PF keys used in concert with the lt CLEAR gt key just as the KeyStroke Multiplier KSM Filter uses the lt CLEAR gt key to provide special functions with the A Z keys Since most of the top row of keys are used in both their shifted and unshifted form a brief user menu is provided to aid in jogging your mind until you become familiar with the programmed functions This menu can be displayed by simultaneously depressing the lt CLEAR gt lt 8 gt keys In describing the functions of COMM the following conventions will be used lt CLEAR gt will represent the lt CLEAR gt key lt CTRL gt will represent the Model 4 lt CTRL gt key or the Model IH lt LEFT SHIFT gt lt U gt keys lt SH gt will represent the lt SHIFT gt key lt X gt will represent the actual key that is to be used such as lt l gt lt gt lt gt lt 6 gt lt 9 gt etc 75 COMM Communications Utility Command Some of the PF keys are used to select logical devices so as
2. toe ee Wee Eee ee Loo Lo introduction to DOS THE COMMAND any files or devices parameters FILES DEVICES Descriptions Parameter descriptions The first line s in the block will show the allowable command structure In some cases more than one command structure will be shown Throughout this manual several words may be used as prepositions separating commands and or parameters They are TO ON OVER USING The use of these prepositions is always optional the DOS command will function the same whether they are used or not They are merely a conventence to allow the user to enter a command in more conversational syntax If a preposition is not used a single space must be used between words Note that you cannot name a file with a filename the same as one of these four prepositions Throughout thts manual you will see references to filespec and devspec These are the abbreviations for file specification and device specification The Introduction to DOS described what filespecs and devspecs are Due to the device independence of DOS it is possible to interchange these two specifications in some commands For example you can copy your keyboard to your line printer or to a disk file You can even append information from a device onto the end of a disk file Each command will give detailed instructions and examples of interchanging filespecs and devspecs if applicable Certain DOS
3. Disk Space Full error may occur Once saved on disk any configuration may casily be changed by setting the desired parameters and doing another SYSTEM SYSGEN command A configuration file may be deleted with 37 L S DOS User Manual the SYSTEM SYSGEN OFF command or may be bypassed by holding down the lt CLEAR gt key when resetting or powering up the system Compatibility with other operating systems To use files created on other operating systems it will be necessary to move them onto diskettes that have been formatted by DOS The DOS utilities BACKUP REPAIR and CONV along with the COPY and COPY X commands and the COPY23B BAS program will usually provide the means to transfer your program and data files onto DOS formatted diskettes Under no circumstances should you use files on other than DOS formatted diskettes in your actual day to day operation DOS provides either direct access or utility programs to read data from Model I TRSDOS 2 1 2 2 2 3 and 2 3B single or double density DOSPLUS Model III TRSDOS 1 2 and 1 3 single density DOUBLEDOS NEWDOS and NEWDOS80 38 fie ee oe oa In Case of Difficulty In case of difficulty Your DOS operating system was designed and tested to provide you with trouble free operation If you do experience problems there is a good chance that something other than the DOS is at fault This section will discuss some of the most conimon user problems and suggest genera
4. ON This PF key is used with one of the six previously mentioned device PF keys to turn on the device For instance once you have defined a receive file to the system with the FR ID functions you must do a FR ON before any data will be written to it Before a send file will start transmitting after the FS ID the FS ON must be done lt CLEAR gt lt gt OFF This PF key performs the opposite function of the ON key It is used in conjuction with any of the device keys to tum off the keyboard video screen printer communications line file send or file receive Just remember that like the ON function the OFF function is performed in two steps If you want to stop the receive file from further receiving you FR OFF by lt CLEAR gt lt 6 gt followed by a lt CLEAR gt lt gt The program function keys also have second functions programmed for them These additional functions are accessible by depressing the lt CLEAR gt lt SH gt keys along with the specified PF key The following explains the capabilities of these second functions lt CLEAR gt lt SH gt lt gt DUPLEX This PF key is the full duplex half duplex switch In the COMM ON OFF arrangement DUPLEX ON designates half duplex operation In this mode your video display screen will display your key entries or file 80 COMM Communications Utility Command transmission as it is taking place The DUPLEX OFF mode is a full duplex operation Your
5. bee Teas eee site eS Cea res Lee ee bees eee o BACKUP Utility Command Answer this question lt Y gt to abort the backup or lt N gt to continue the backup If you use informational disk names when formatting diskettes this checking of Pack ID s should help prevent you from backing up the wrong disks If the source and destination disks have different cylinder counts the following message will appear Cylinder counts differ Atternpt mirror image backup Answer this prompt lt Y gt to attempt a mirror image backup or lt N gt to force a backup reconstruct The destination disk will have its directory on the same track as the source disk even though this may not have been the case before the backup began The information on the destination disk will be updated to reflect the true cylinder count and available free space You may also sce the following message appear at times Backup aborted Destination not mirror image This will occur if the destination disk is missing a cylinder that contains information on the source disk This may be the case if the destination disk was formatted with fewer cylinders than the source disk or if cylinders were locked out on the destination disk during formatting You can use the FREE command to check the destination disk for locked out cylinders After all cylinders are moved to the destination disk the backup utility will attempt to remove the mod flags from the source disk If
6. true only if A is true include these lines END 312 koau oe on Batch Processing Job Control Language F A if not A true only if A is false include these lines END By using NOT it is possible to see not only if a token is true but to see if itis false This provides an alternative method to select a block of lines for compiling F A B if A or B true if either is true include these lines END F A amp B if A and B true only if both are true include these lines END These exainples show how multiple tokens may be tested in a single IF Statement In the OR example the IF will test true if either A or B were true The AND example requires that both A and B be true to include the lines up to the END It is allowable to use any combination of logical operators in an IF statement When doing so it is important to know how the statement will be evaluated Evaluation of the statement will be from left to right e In the evaluation of any compound expression the expression will be FALSE if the left hand symbol of an AND is FALSE e Parentheses are not allowed and will abort the JCL compiling e All logical operators have the same precedence Following are some examples of IF statements using multiple logical operators ca F A B C if either A or B or C is true F A amp B if A is false and B is false IF A amp B C
7. After entering the filename up to six characters you will be prompted to ready the cassette The tape will then be written l At the conclusion of the disk or tape writing operation you will receive the query Module write is complete Write another Y N E C gt The E and C responses are as before A response of N will also return you to the scond query If you had selected TAPE output you would be prompted to ready the cassette and another copy would be written using the same fite name as was previously entered 73 pare Sy em ka a Si I lh i e a i i a i n a A A OU A AS TT SSS tS STL A TS RS RS ELE TS ILE a a oe rrr e en COMM Communications Utility Command COMM amp LCOMM Utilities The COMM utility LCOMM for Mode I II is a terminal program that provides communications capabilities between two computer systems between your computer and a Bulletin Board System such as Forum 80 PSBBS or other similar systems or between your computer and a large public system such as CompuServe or other main frames The syntax of the COMM command is COMM devspec parm parm devspec isa valid DOS active device usually CL SET to a serial driver NULL ON or OFF the default is ON If OFF is specified it will prevent any nulls 00 s from being received XlateS X ffft Translates character ff to tt before sending XlateR X ffl Translates received character ff to tt XOF
8. STOP 2 290 Fesa ee aa Batch Processing Job Control Language RUN LEDGER BAS STOP 1 3 RUN PAYABLES BAS STOP IHI NPUT your own choice as RUN PROGRAM STOP As you can see this examples is slightly different than the KEYIN example First of all BASIC is entered before the KEYIN command is displayed Therefore the command to enter BASIC has been removed from the three conditional blocks Now if a key other than 1 2 or 3 is pressed for the KEYIN the INPUT line will be displayed The user can then enter in a RUN PROGRAM command to start up his own program choice In fact the response to the INPUT does not even have to be a RUN PROGRAM command Any valid BASIC statement could be used As soon as BASIC acted on the line the STOP would halt JCL execution and keyboard control would return to BASIC This type of direct input to the system is equally valid at the DOS Ready level When describing the WAIT macro it was mentioned that the time for the system clock could be set by the operator in the middle of a JCL file The next example shows how this is done Example JCL for alarm program NPUT Enter the time command use the format TIME HH MM SS WAIT 02 15 00 BASIC RUN ALARMSET BAS EXIT This example JCL will prompt the operator and allow the entry of a TIME command to set the system clock The INPUT message also describes the proper format of the TIME command
9. The breaking up of a parameter line into its individual parameter values partspec An abbreviation representing PARTial fileSPEC A partspec may be used with certain commands in lieu of a filespec A partspec may be composed of any combination of the four fields defining a filespec No leading or trailing may be contained in a partspec In addition the filename and ext fields of a partspec may be abbreviated with leading information and or wildcarded Examples of partspecs are given in this manual where applicable Dalene Identical to a partspec except that it is used as exclusion criteria during certain functions PARAMETER The information that follows a library command or a utility on the command line This information is passed to the job that will be executed to tell the job how you wish execution to take place Parameters usually Follow the command and are enclosed in parentheses 329 L S DOS User Manual parm The abbreviation for parameter described above password The password associated with a filespec the use of which is optional A password if used must contain as its first character a period and may be followed by one to eight alphanumeric characters the first of which must be alphabetic PATCH A utility to make minor alterations to disk files PR A DOS system device the Line Printer RAM Random Access Memory In the TRS 80 the free user memory in t
10. This conditional block would assure that P2 was reset if P1 was entered on the command line even if P2 were also entered Now let s rewrite MENU ICL slightly assuming that PROGRAMI requires the keyboard driver and 80 character print lines and that PROGRAM2 requires no keyboard driver and 132 column print tines We will also assume that if P is not entered P2 should be the default MENU JCL revision 1 SET FF FORMS DOS 6 FILTER PR FF DOS 6 FILTER PR PR FLT DOS 5 NF PI RESET P2 300 fee EEN Batch Processing Job Control Language SET KI KI DVR TYPE JKL DOS 5 FORMS CHARS 80 ELSE SET P2 FORMS CHARS 132 END BASIC F P RUN PROGRAMI1 BAS END F P2 RUN PROGRAM2 BAS END STOP Evaluating the results of different DO command lines would show the following DO MENU P1 or DO MENU P1 P2 MENU JCL revision 1 SET FF FORMS FILTER PR FF FILTER PR PR ELT SET KI KI DVR TYPE JKL FORMS CHARS 80 BASIC RUN PROGRAM1 BAS STOP DO MENU or DO MENU P2 MENU JCL revision 1 SET FE FORMS FILTER PR FF FILTER PR PR FLT FORMS CHARS 132 BASIC RUN PROGRAM2 BAS STOP 301 e a eB E oaao RP NP yy eta A A EY PP tts Seti CREEL ES I me me as is nr ee i aa m Batch Processing Job Control Language The first IF macro tests if P1 is true If so P2 is reset false and the KJ DVR and 80 character print mod
11. Using DOS version 6 you can create an Immediate Execution Program IEP Once you create an IEP you can load and run it at the DOS Ready prompt simply by pressing lt gt lt ENTER gt DOS stores an IEP in the SYSI3 SYS file Because DOS recognizes the program as a system file DOS includes the file when creating backups and loads the program faster To implement an IEP use the following syntax COPY filespec SYS13 SYS SYSTEM6 dtive C N lt ENTER gt The filespec can be any executable CMD program file The drive Specifies the destination drive The destination drive must contain an original SYS13 SYS file COPY TED CMD 1 SYS13 SYS SYSTEM6 0 C N lt ENTER gt DOS copies TED CMD from drive 1 to SYS13 SYS in drive 0 At the DOS Ready prompt when yoi press lt gt lt ENTER gt DOS invokes the TED text editor If you type lt gt lt ENTER gt before you copy a file to the SYS13 SYS file DOS displays the error bite a No command lt gt present as SYS13 13 L S DOS User Manual Hardware related features Your Disk Operating System DOS is a user oriented device independent system DOS version 5 provides compatibility among the TRS 80 Models I and HI and the MAX 80 so your data files and most BASIC programs will be truly transportable DOS version 6 is available for TRS 80 Models 4 and II 12 16 6000 most programs designed for the Model 4 may be usable on the Model II Diskettes are compatible across Mo
12. You can override any breakable AUTO command during power up or reset by holding down lt ENTER gt during initialization This may be your only way of regaining control of the system if the dos command is not a working program If the AUTO command disables the lt BREAK gt key and the program is non functional it may seem impossible to regain control of that disk Should this occur simply boot another non AUTQed disk in drive 0 When the DOS Ready appears place the non functional disk in drive 0 type AUTO and press lt ENTER gt The runaway AUTO command will then be removed from that disk 49 Ee eS ee ee ee Ee ee ee oe ae a e a i BACKUP Utility BACKUP Utility Command The BACKUP utility is provided to duplicate data from a source disk to a destination disk The syntax is BACKUP s TO d parm parm BACKUP parispec w wcec s TO d parm parm 2 d Date Inv Mod MPW s New Oid the SOURCE and DESTINATION drivespecs Used to specify files within a range of dates Selection format is M1 D1 Y 1 M2 D2 Y 2 M1 D1 Y1 M1 D1 Y 1 and M1 D1 Y1 Designate that files invisible to the directory are to be included as well as visibte files indicates files Modified since tast backup passes the source disk s Master Password will backup only those fites not already on the destination disk wili backup only those files already existing on the destination disk parameter indica
13. time prompt 54 time prompt enabling or disabling 231 time stamp 255 time setting 245 TOF 247 270 272 token 293 330 token setting false 296 300 token setting true 296 300 303 TRACE 220 232 325 track 3 33 325 TRSDOS 89 104 TRSDOS 1 3 197 200 TRSDOS 2 3B 98 true or false condition 295 er te Loo L INDEX TXT 18 174 type ahead 119 232 257 290 328 type ahead disabling 257 U UPDATE 233 246 upper case 296 utility t y VERIFY 72 248 video clock display 245 video display 16 28 125 165 171 326 video driver 60 61 visible 43 visible files 59 121 190 W oe Cott wee 56 57 126 330 wide character mode 232 word 330 WP 226 write protect status 116 write protect tab 7 write protect software 226 write protected 53 55 131 f i et She Af X XOFF 74 79 83 85 XON 74 83 85 339 oe _ Berani ae Pe _ a a x za ma EE ES lt b ee
14. 81 149 157 175 317 line input 321 line printer 17 28 170 203 208 213 227 270 272 274 330 LINEINPUT 321 LINK 118 170 200 203 LIST 96 133 173 187 255 listing a file 173 LOAD 178 205 load module 142 186 205 load module format 328 LOG 22 114 118 179 logical BREAK character 209 252 logical device 27 97 170 202 207 logical record length changing 199 LOW 221 lower Case 296 LRL 41 91 94 176 199 LSB 329 330 LX 80 226 251 273 M macro 329 margin 158 master diskette 10 26 28 31 master password 46 57 190 master password changing 43 336 MAX 80 103 155 226 246 251 273 MemDISK 119 128 250 266 MemDISK disabling 268 MEMORY 180 memory banks 266 memory conflict 36 memory display 108 MiniDOS 23 119 149 246 256 270 298 mirror image 51 52 53 57 128 160 mod date 57 92 102 124 190 329 mod date changing 199 mod flag 8 53 55 57 190 329 Model 100 234 MODELx IlI 61 modem break 76 MODx DCT 24 Moving files 6 MSB 329 330 N nested IF macros 314 nested INCLUDE macros 316 network flag 199 NIL 30 194 200 202 329 Nomenclature 1 NOT 294 312 313 not partspec 12 56 127 NRN 82 329 O operator logical 294 OR 294 312 313 out of paper 170 overlay 18 25 71 230 at ooo ie Wor eo emir a owner password 92 97 P Pack ID
15. After the input the WAIT would pause the system until the clock matched 02 15 00 and then continue execution When using the INPUT macro some caution should be exercised to assure that the command typed in is valid at the level it will be executed 291 Batch Processing Job Control Language For example mistakenly pressing only lt ENTER gt with no other characters for an INPUT at the DOS Ready level will abort JCL execution The JCL would also abort if for instance a program name was entered incorrectly resulting in an DOS Program not found error Simple JCL compiling The previous section of JCL has shown how to create and use execute only JCL files While this type of JCL file is useful it does not allow for logical decisions substitution capabilities or combination of JCL files To do that you must use the features provided by the compile phase of JCL As the title of this section implies the basics of tle compile phase will be discussed There are certain features of the JCL compile phase that will not be discussed in this section of the documentation The purpose of this section is to describe the basic functions of the JCL compiler and to show some practical examples of JCL files The ADVANCED JCL COMPILING will contain further examples including those features not discussed here Although JCL is a compiled language you do not have to be a programmer to understand it In fact the main purpose of JCL
16. All files will be examined and all files except BOOT SYS and DIR SYS will be copied because they wilt match the single wce This command is the way to force a backup by class in situations where a mirror image would norinally have been done This miglit be to remove unwanted extents from files on the source disk by copying them onto a cleanly formatted destination drive BACKUP 0 1 Q This command will function identically to the previous example except that you will be asked before each file is moved You will also see the mod date and mod flag for each file BACKUP 2 1 INV This command will copy visible files as well as all files that are invisible in drive 2 s directory to drive 1 invoking a backup by class In other words this command will copy all files except the system files BACKUP 0 1 SYS 57 Re ae a A ee Re TT BACKUP Utility Command This command will backup all visible and system files from drive 0 to drive 1 invoking a backup by class BACKUP 0 1 MOD Q MPW SECRET This command will copy all visible files that have been modified written to from drive 0 to drive 1 It will query each file before it is copied also showing the file s mod date and flag The master password was passed with the MPW parameter and will not be asked for BACKUP CMD 0 1 BACKUP CMD 0 1 This command will force a backup by class with the file class specified as CMD All visible files w
17. Char nn Specifies that the click should be generated on each entry of nn rather than all keystrokes nn represents the character and is in the range 1 to 255 After you install the filter the sound generator produces a tone each time you press a key on your keyboard this provides an auditory feedback The sound that CLICK produces when the system is running at SLOW speed is different from that produced when the system is running at FAST speed You can change the pitch and duration of the tone by applying a patch to the values that produce the tone This patch is PATCH CLICK FLT FILTER D00 A0 ddpp F00 A0 1848 dd is a hexadecimal value specifying duration in the range 01 to FF 01 produces the shortest duration and FF produces the longest pp is a hexadecimal value specifying the pitch of the tone in the range 01 to FF 01 produces the highest pitch and FF produces the lowest pitch SET CK CLICK C 13 lt ENTER gt FILTER KI CK lt ENTER gt This command set installs the filter and associates it with the keyboard device Each time the lt ENTER gt key is pressed CLICK produces a tone 249 CLICK Filter Program When you install CLICK FLT DOS will place it in the low memory I O driver region if space is available If not DOS will place it in high memoryand then issue the following informative message Note filter installed in high memory If you want to use MemDISK while you are using CLICK FLT you should
18. Eaa Pees aoe a lL FED Utility Command lt BREAK gt Clears the command buffer Pressing lt BREAK gt will cancel any partial command and will cause the termination of any command being invoked It is also the only way to exit the ASCH and Hex modify modes Anytime there is any doubt as to the operation being performed by FED you may press lt BREAK gt and the command buffer will be Ciel lt SHIFT gt lt gt Displays the binary representation of the byte pointed to by the cursors This command may only be used when in the 128 character mode and will be ignored if issued in the 256 character mode After depressing lt SHIFT gt lt gt 8 binary digits will be displayed next to the command buffer For example if the cursors were positioned over relative byte X 27 and this byte of the edit buffer contained a X F3 the binary digits 1111 0011 would be displayed lt M gt Calculates the address in memory where the byte pointed to by the cursors will load This command works with load module format files only If the byte is contained in a load block the load address will be displayed below the record number If the byte is not in a load block e g a comment line file header etc the error message Byte not in load block will be displayed lt T gt Toggles between the regular 256 byte mode and the extended 128 byte mode By pressing lt T gt FED shifts to the other mode The
19. FREE Library Command This field shows the disk configuration cyl the number of cylinders on the disk d the disk density S single D double H hard and h the number of heads on the disk This fffff f Field shows the amount of free space in K 1024 byte blocks that remains available for use on the disk This sssss S field shows the total amount of space the disk will support in K This mmm field shows the number of directory entries that are available for use number of files that may be added This nnn field shows the total number of directory entries that the disk will support The FREE command without a drivespec is global in its nature It will search all active drives and may not be confined to a single drive The free space available on a diskette is also shown in a DIR library command ee Ne ee ee Me ee gee ne eT Me 161 FREE Library Command Using the FREE command with a drivespec will bring up a free space map as Shown below FREE 0 Drive 0 DOSS31 11 15 91 40D1 Free 87 0 190 0 Fi 97 128 The top line will display information about the diskette size and type this information is in the same format as the global FREE command DOS version 6 will display some of this following the granule mapping The inner display area contains the details of the space allocation on the disk The numbers on the left represent the cylinders The granules per cylinder will be shown across
20. PURGE BAS 1 Q N This command will first ask for the master password of the disk in drive 1 if it is not PASSWORD Once entered all visible files with the extension 191 Fa L G mmea eer PURGE Library Command BAS will be purged from the disk without asking for confirmation You will however be able to stop the purge by pressing the lt BREAK gt key PURGE EX1 0 I This command will purge all non system files whose filename has the characters EX1 as the third fourth and fifth characters of the filename The wildcard character masks the first two characters of the filename the filename may be more than five characters in length as trailing characters in the field are ignored The file extension will have no effect on this PURGE command You will be asked before any file is actually purged as Q was not specified and defaulted to Q Y Invisible and visible files will both be shown as the I switch was used PURGE 5 S 2 This command will purge all visible files on drive 2 whose file extension contains three characters and ends in the letter S This would purge files with the extension of BAS for example However it would not purge the system files as the S switch was not specified You will be prompted before each file is purged PURGE CMD 0 I This command will purge all non system files EXCEPT those whose extension is CMD You will be asked before each file is purged PURGE 1 D 02 01
21. Ready cassette and depress lt ENTER gt Model Ready casselle and depress lt H L gt Model Ill Model HI users should depress the lt H gt 1500 baud or lt L gt 500 baud key after preparing the tape for input If the 1500 baud rate is used the HEFAPE utility must have been previously invoked There is no need to enter a file name The next program found on the tape will be read The upper right screen will show flashing asterisks during the load The letters C D or BK may appear if an error is detected A checksum error during the load will display the message Tope checksum error detected reread tape Any previously read in file will not be destroyed The partial tape load will be ignored and subsequent reads will properly append any previously read in file If the file being loaded uses up your machine s memory the message Out of memory will appear Again no file or files previously read into the memory buffer will be disturbed You can proceed to save the buffer contents prior to the file that exhausted your machine s memory If you attempt to read in a file that is not a COMMAND or SYSTEM file the read operation will cease and you will receive the message Requested file is not a COMMAND or SYSTEM file 69 CMDFILE Utility Command As a disk file is read each block detected will produce the message Block loads from XXXX to XXXX At the conclusion of the file read whether from di
22. SH lt 8 gt i 9 09 HT CTL lt I gt 2 41 29 SH lt 9 gt 10 OA LF CTL lt J gt 3 42 A SH lt gt 11 0B VT CTL lt K gt z 43 2B SH lt gt f 12 0C FF CTL lt L gt 44 2c lt gt p 13 0D CR CTL lt M gt 4 45 2D lt gt 14 0E SO CTL lt N gt 46 2E lt gt a es 15 OF SI CTL lt 0 gt 47 2F lt gt i 16 10 DLE CTL lt P gt z 48 30 0 lt 0 gt 17 11 DC1 CTL lt Q gt nS 49 31 1 lt 1 gt 18 12 DC2 CTL lt R gt 14 5032 2 lt 2 gt o 19 13 DC3 CTL lt S gt 5133 3 lt 3 gt 20 14 DC4 CTL lt T gt a 52 34 4 lt 4 gt 21 15 NAK CTL lt U gt 53 35 5 lt 5 gt 22 16 SYN CTL lt V gt 54 36 6 lt 6 gt 23 17 ETB CTL lt W gt 55 37 7 lt 7 gt 24 18 CAN CTL lt X gt 5 56 38 8 lt 8 gt es 25 19 EM CTL lt Y gt 6 57 39 9 lt 9 gt oo 26 1A SUB CTL lt Z gt i 58 3A lt gt ai 27 1B ESC CTL lt gt 7 59 3B lt gt i 28 1C FS CTL lt gt 60 3C lt SH lt gt 29 1D GS CTL lt gt 9 61 3D SH lt gt 30 1E RS CTL lt gt i 62 3E gt SH lt gt 31 1F VS SH lt gt SH lt CLR gt 63 3F Set Generation DEC 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 T 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 HEX TAG ENTERED BY lt gt 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 4D 4B AC AD 4E AF 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 SA 5B SC 5D 5E SF mI gt mn NKA SCR aV oOvVoOoZZZ
23. SYSGEN will not abort if within a JCL file SYSGEN will abort with an appropriate error if the drive specified to receive the configuration file is write protected An invisible file named CONFIG SYS will be created to hold the configuration Each time the system is booted the configuration stored in this file will be loaded and set You may prevent this automatic configuration by holding down the lt CLEAR gt key while the boot is in progress Note that the system configuration will take place before any AUTO ed command is invoked In addition to the options settable by the SYSTEM command the following will be stored in the configuration file by a SYSTEM SYSGEN command 229 SYSTEM Library Command e Ail filtering linking routing and device setting that has been done This includes the serial driver and KI settings e Any active background tasks such as CLOCK DEBUG TRACE etc e Any special utility modules or user programs loaded into high memory and protected with the MEMORY command All memory from HIGH to the physical top of memory and added version 6 low memory modules will be written to the CONFIG SYS file e The present state of VERIFY either ON or OFF e Alf Device Control Blocks This will include the current lines per page and line counter stored in the printer DCB e The state of the CAPS lock for the keyboard Certain DOS features should never be SYSGENed if a disk file is involved They are any RO
24. SYSTEM Library Command represents any valid drive number in your system Only one DRIVE d parameter can be used in any system command line This command will set the default number of cylinders in the range 35 to 96 to be used with the FORMAT utility for the specified floppy drive This value will be written to the system information sector on drive 0 if the DRIVE parameter is not specified If you switch drive 0 disks be aware that this value will be taken from the new drive 0 disk when formatting This command is valid only for 3 5 and 5 25 drives The DELAY is the time allowed between drive motor start up and the first attempted read or write of the diskette in that drive The ON parameter sets the delay to 1 0 second This is the normal DELAY time for all 5 25 drives The OFF parameter sets this delay to 0 5 seconds This command will remove the specified drive number from the Drive Code table Once disabled any attempt to access that drive will cause the message Illegal Drive Number to appear The drive can be re enabled with the ENABLE parameter This command will enable the specified drive number and place its configuration information in the Drive Code table If you enable a drive that has not been previously enabled or set up with the SYSTEM DRIVE DRIVER command totally unpredictable results may follow This parameter will set the stepping rate for the specified drive number where n isa number 0
25. Se eg ee a ee a a a eee ee Ee eS he aE ee Pa ee ee eR LR pe emmy eR ge Ee gS a Pe ee T ee ee te re Oke ee Ew Pa oe he ee e Lo Ea Table of Contents CMDFILE Utility oo cscscceccssccsssssssssssssssesssssssssscsesssssesssesees Invoking CMDFILE Cominand Structure COMM amp LCOMM Uthttes wccssissescssedssssacsssdascaxcuicocseessesanes Using the PF keys lt CLEAR gt lt 7 gt DTD lt CLEAR gt lt 8 gt Menu lt CLEAR gt lt 9 gt ID lt CLEAR gt lt 0 gt RESET lt CLEAR gt lt gt ON lt CLEAR gt lt gt OFF lt CLEAR gt lt SH gt lt gt DUPLEX lt CLEAR gt lt SH gt lt gt ECHO lt CLEAR gt lt SH gt lt gt ECHO LINEFEED lt CLEAR gt lt SH gt lt gt ACCEPT LINEFEED lt CLEAR gt lt SH gt lt gt REWIND lt CLEAR gt lt SH gt lt amp gt PEOF lt CLEAR gt lt SH gt lt gt DCC lt CLEAR gt lt SH gt lt gt CLS lt CLEAR gt lt SH gt lt gt 8 BIT lt CLEAR gt lt SHIFT gt lt 0 gt DOS Library command lt CLEAR gt lt SH gt lt gt Handshake lt CLEAR gt lt SH gt lt gt EXIT Usage Tips Communicating With Other Computers Parameters VIS INV SYS Parameters NEW OLD QUERY Examples of COPYing filespecl TO filespec2 Examples of COPYing devspec to devspec Examples of COPY ing with the X parameter DEBUG error erree ri Reon errr ern errr torn errr ne rier anne eee rr Command Memory Page Advance Command Memory Page Dec
26. This is quite useful when receiving a file from a system that supports handshaking A more detailed discussion on the use of handshaking will be presented in the Communicating With Other Computers section 76 fees thee Eee on tees Nee ea or oe COMM Communications Utility Command Using the PF keys The first six function keys reference different devices in your system The following table summarizes these references Function Key Referenced Device Devicespec lt CLEAR gt lt I gt Keyboard device KI lt CLEAR gt lt 2 gt Display DO lt CLEAR gt lt 3 gt Printer Device PR lt CLEAR gt lt 4 gt Communications Line device CL lt CLEAR gt lt 5 gt File Send device FS lt CLEAR gt lt 6 gt File Receive device FR When COMM is first entered KI is in an on state If you desire to tum it off to avoid accidentally brushing the keyboard while you are transmitting a file you can tum off the keyboard by lt CLEAR gt lt I gt followed by a lt CLEAR gt lt gt which indicates the off ee While the KI is off all PF keys are still active When COMM is first entered the DO is in an on state If you desire to turn it off when for instance the printer has been activated a simple lt CLEAR gt lt 2 gt followed by a lt CLEAR gt lt gt will perform the requested function The video display will be re activated by a SCLEAR See followed by a lt CLEAR gt lt gt When COMM fir
27. UP WR NA KI FU DOS version 6 operation would display a 4 character string 123 DIR Library Command iri This is the length of each logical record in the file mr This is the number of logical records in the file eof This is the position of the last byte in the last sector de This is the number of extents non contiguous blocks of space in which the file is stored SSSSS S This is the amount of space in K 1K 1024 bytes that the file takes up on the disk Under DOS version 5 if the file has been created with the CREATE library command the S will appear as S dd mon yy This is the date that the file was created or tast written to If you have used the SYSTEM command to disable the initial DATE prompt when powering up the system this date cannot be established or updated DOS can use dates between 01 01 80 and 12 31 2011 hh mm This is the time that the file was created or last written to The time will be in 24 hour format 00 00 23 59 For Model 4 users the time could be in 12 hour format with AM or PM indicated depending on the setting of the SYSTEM AMIPM mode Disks from earlier versions of DOS prior to x 3 will display a blank time field If you do not wish to see all of the directory allocation information you may abbreviate the display by use of the A parameter A typical display of a DOS disk done with the command DIR 0 A N may appear as follows Drive t diskname diskdate cyidh
28. any parameter dealing with an address or a quantity must be entered as a hexadecimal number The debugger will not accept the backspace key If an incorrect command has been entered it may be cancelled by pressing the lt X gt key until the command line is cleared Also debug only looks at the Jast four numbers entered in response to any address question In the following examples the first line following a command will give the syntax of the command There are three ways the debug commands can be entered The first requires the lt ENTER gt key be pressed The second requires the lt SPACE gt bar be pressed The third type is immediate and will invoke whenever the command key is pressed as the first character in the command In the following commands listed alphabetically the notation indicates a Model FIH extended debugger command while the notation indicates a Model 4 extended debugger command Command Memory Page Advance The command syntax is This command advances the memory display 64 bytes in the register mode and 256 bytes in the full screen mode Command Memory Page Decrement The command syntax is 107 rr rrr rr rr a aaa tl eee DEBUG Library Command This command decrements the memory display by 64 bytes in the register mode or by 256 bytes in the full screen mode Command A Alpha Mode or ASCII Modify The command syntax is A This command will set the display to the a
29. buffer should be dumped to disk by turning on DTD with lt CLEAR gt lt 7 gt followed by lt CLEAR gt lt gt The sending end should do a lt CLEAR gt lt 5 gt followed by a lt CLEAR gt lt gt then a lt CLEAR gt lt 5 gt followed by a lt CLEAR gt lt 0 gt When the receiving end file is finished writing to the disk close the file by resetting the FR device with a lt CLEAR gt lt 6 gt followed by lt CLEAR gt lt 0 gt This will do a FR OFF a DID OFF followed by a close of the file just received Method B Dynamic Dump to Disk The sending end should do a lt CLEAR gt lt 5 gt followed by a lt CLEAR gt lt 9 gt and enter in the filespec to be sent The receiving end should do a lt CLEAR gt lt 6 gt followed by a lt CLEAR gt lt 9 gt and enter in the filespec to be received The dump to disk DTD must be tumed on by entering a lt CLEAR gt lt 7 gt 87 a TE TE To TT TT TT ST NT a a TE TE A Sm e re marr rae aa 88 COMM Communications Utility Command followed by a lt CLEAR gt lt gt It may already be ON Its state can be ascertained by obtaining a menu and noting if an asterisk is positioned beneath its key in the menu display When both ends are ready the receiving end should do a lt CLEAR gt lt 6 gt followed by lt CLEAR gt lt gt and the sending end should then do a lt CLEAR gt lt 5 gt followed by lt CLEAR gt lt gt This will turn on the receive and send files After th
30. configuration parameter are moved from the source to the destination disk The destination will have the following set equal to the source disk regardless of how the destination disk was previously configured e The state of the SYSGEN on or off of the destination disk will be changed to match that of the source disk e The initial date and time prompts on or off on power up will be set to match those of the source disk e The default drive configurations will match those of the source disk It is possible to backup from a disk with a capacity greater than that of the destination disk such as from a hard drive to a 5 25 floppy To do this format as many destination disks as will be needed to hold all of the information to be moved As the backup progresses and the first destination disk is filled you will be prompted with the flashing message Disk is full Enter new formatted destination disk lt ENIER gt At this point remove the full destination disk and insert a new formatted disk in the drive Pressing lt ENTER gt will cause the backup to continue You may perform this disk swap as many times as necessary to complcte the backup 54 ee ieee Toes bee eee ee oa BACKUP Utility Command Backup will not allow a single file to be split across destination disks If you have a file that is larger than the capacity of the destination disk you will not be able to copy it with the BACKUP command Both backup by cl
31. ee Keyboard Driver Program it again with additional parameters without first doing a RESET KI command For example if you had initially SET KI TO KI DVR and later wish to initialize the type ahead feature you must first RESET KI and then SET KI TO KI DVR TYPE The only additional memory used will be the amount needed for the type ahead option The original memory used for the KI DVR will be reused for the original KI DVR functions Specifying the TYPE parameter enables the type ahead feature This will provide a 128 character buffer and will allow typing ahead even when the system is performing other functions such as disk I O If you make a mistake while typing ahead pressing the lt SHIFT gt lt gt will erase the current line Pressing lt CLEAR gt lt gt will empty the entire type ahead buffer To temporarily disable the type ahead function use the command SYSTEM TYPE OFF It may be re enabled with a SYSTEM TYPE ON command The screen print option will send the contents of the video screen to PR usually a line printer whenever the lt LEFT SHIFT gt lt l gt lt gt keys are pressed on a Model I or Ill or lt CTRL gt lt gt on a Model 4 Characters outside the ASCII range are normally translated to periods However the GRAPHIC parameter of the SYSTEM command will allow graphics characters to be sent to the line printer during a screen print The DELAY and RATE parameters deal with
32. lt gt used as necessary for masking characters Date Used to specify files within a range of dates Selection format is M1 D1 Y 1 M2 D2 Y2 M1 D1 Y1 M1 D1 Y 1 and M1 D1 Y 1 Specifies Invisible files The disk master password ON or OFF The default is ON Specifies System files The PURGE command allows the user to delete multiple disk files without the need to specify the individual filespecs You will be prompted for the disk s master password if it is a password other than PASSWORD and not provided with the MPW parameter The PURGE command allows several parameters to be set providing for a specific group or groups of files to be purged If the Q parameter is not specified or if Q is specified without a switch Q Y is automatically assumed and you will be asked before each file is purged The responses are lt Y gt to purge the file or lt N gt to skip it Pressing lt ENTER gt will also skip the file The mod flag and date will be shown for each file PURGE defaults to visible files only To include invisible and system files the J and S switches must be specified The Date parameter allows you to see only those files that fall within a specified range of dates Files without dates will never be shown if the parameter was specified The Date parameter accepts four formats to 190 Las Wes L aa mran i L PURGE Library Command provide for selecting specific ranges of dates
33. may appear on each physical line Each logical line is terminated with a OD in the entered string and each physical line terminated by pressing lt ENTER gt The lt ENTER gt does not terminate the logical line EXAMPLE F50DF 1IODFAQD lt ENTER gt 63 k r r n g a p p p a gg p gp e pg p i i ame ay dH EU CS Pe yy RT CT SF A TT ST eae Te BUILD Library Command This would represent three logical lines in a KSM type file Notice the three 0D s in the string Important The HEX parameter will not cause the file to be stored in load module format it will remain a normal ASCII image type file even though some of the characters may be well out of the pure ASCII range When building files other than KSM or HEX the line input length should be limited to 63 79 characters for clarity The build will be terminated when the lt BREAK gt key is entered as the first character in a line Following are some examples of the BUILD command BUILD THISFILE 2 This will check drive 2 for a file named THISFILE JCL If it exists a Tile already exists error will occur Otherwise the file will be opened on drive 2 Note that the default extension JCL was used as no extension was specified in the command line A JCL file will not allow more than 63 79 characters per line to be entered BUILD MYKEYS KSM This command will search all available drives for a file named MYKEYS KSM If the file exists a File already
34. s extension was not specified and will default to TXT 136 je bese Les bes bee Po FED FED Utility Command FED is a DOS version 5 sector oriented file editor Its wide range of capabilities make it excellent for the advanced user but its simplicity makes it easy to use for the novice The editor supports both Model I and HI upper and lower case and all drive types and sizes supported by DOS FED is a file editor not a file copier text editor or word processor It is for displaying printing and modifying existing files Fed works on a file level not a track and sector level FED was not designed to repair damaged disks or recover lost files but it could be used to do so by the experienced DOS user You cannot create or extend files vh FED only modify existing ones The following is a brief description of FED s capabilities Complete editing capabilities are supported including Hexadeci mal and ASCII modifying Direct disk patching is a simple matter small changes in files can be made instantly FED allows for record advancing backspacing and positioning You may page through a file quickly either forward or backward ASCII and Hex string searching can be performed FED allows searching for upper or lower case ASCII strings and Hex strings You can locate a Hex load address in a load module format file and calculate the load position of a specified byte FED can also calculate where in m
35. the DIR command used to view a disk s directory has a parameter called SORT The default of this parameter is ON so the directory display will automatically be in sorted alphabetic order A permissible abbreviation for each parameter is identified by the capital letter sub string listed for the parameter this may be a single letter For instance the sOrt parameter of the DIR command can be entered either as sort or the single letter O as identified by its appearance in upper case Note that ON YES and Y are completely interchangeable in most commands in the DOS system OFF NO and N are similarly interchangeable in most commands Special command specifications e Drivespecs must always be preceded by a colon whether used as part of a filespec or as a stand afone parameter except in the DIR 12 Lea Meee introduction to DOS library command e The closing parenthesis may be omitted from any DOS command if it would have been the last character entered on the command line e It ts totally acceptable to enter any filespec command or parameter in either upper or lower case e Numeric values for any parameter may be entered in either decimal or hexadecimal Decimal numbers are entered in normal notation such as parm 32768 Hexadecimal numbers are entered as X value such as X FOQO X OD etc Using parm X 8000 would produce the same value as the previous example of parm 32768 Immediate Execution Program
36. the auto X OFF character selected will be shown in hex Also any FS or FR file that has been ID d will have its filespec displayed lt CLEAR gt lt 9 gt ID The ID function is used with either FS or FR to designate and open the desired file If you are going to receive a file you will perform an FR ID by depressing lt CLEAR gt lt 6 gt followed by a lt CLEAR gt lt 9 gt You will receive the prompt File name You should enter the file specification of your choice The system will then open the file for receiving and await your next command At this point the file is open and ready but is not turned ON see ON lt CLEAR gt lt gt If a reccive file is already open the system will ignore your ID request and issue the warning message 79 COMM Communications Utility Command File already open This is to guard against inadvertantly issuing another FR ID before you have closed the last file received The same protection is available to FS Only one FS file can be open at a time You should close your send file after transmitting it lt CLEAR gt lt 0 gt RESET The RESET PF key performs the function of closing either a receive file or a send file A receive file must be closed so its directory is updated Don t forget to turn off a receive file before closing it You also must close a receive file to be able to receive a subsequent file If a device is reset its buffer is cleared lt CLEAR gt lt gt
37. 0 The filespec will be TEXTFILE SPL 0 as the file extension was not specified and defaulted to SPL SPOOL PR PR TXT 0 The filespec will be PR TXT 0 Specifying the TXT extension will override the default TXT SPOOL PR 1 This conunand will look on drive 1 for a file named PR SPL If the file PR SPL 1 is not found it will be created on drive 1 with a length dctermined by the DISK parameter SPOOL PR This command will search all active drives for a file named PR SPL If this file is not found the file PR SPL will be created on the first available drive with the file size determined from the DISK parameter Parameter MEM As stated earlier the SPOOL command will always require a minimum of IK 1024 bytes for a memory buffer If more memory is required it may be allocated with this parameter For example MEM 10 will allocate 10K 10 240 bytes of memory to be used as a spool buffer This memory will be dynamically allocated by the fully integrated spool system processor to provide the most efficient operating environment depending on the particular configuration you have established for your DOS system If this parameter is not specified IK of memory will automatically be allocated for the spool buffer 215 AS TL ET CT CT ES LS LS I I I I LL LN A ek ES LY SR ye NEE iY VED yy AE Sa tn aa a i aaa aaa YP TS te SPOOL Library Command Parameter DISK This parameter sets the maximum
38. 0E00 633 SPR X OBOL X OE3C 60 SED X 0E3D X 1014 472 SMSCO X 1015 X 115B 327 this shows the number of memory banks free and the total number of memory banks installed the in use field displays for each bank from 0 to na for in use and a for not in use Banks Module is the name string of the resident module Start is the lowest memory address used by the module End is the highest memory address used by the module Length is the number of bytes used by the module MEMORY with no parameters will display HIGH highest unused memory location in the format X nnnn 181 MEMORY Library Command MEMORY HIGH X E000 This command would set HIGH to memory address X E000 as long as the existing HIGH was above this location The MEMORY command will only move HIGH lower in memory The RESET command will allow you to RESET HIGH to the top of memory MEMORY ADD X 4049 This command will display the contents of memory locations X 4049 and X 404A The display will be similar to the following format X 4049 16457 X 00E0 HIGH X E000 aaaa bbbbb cece dddd aaaa is the address specified in hex notation bbbb is the decimal equivalent of ADD cccc isthe contents of address and address 1 in LO HI format dddd is the current HIGHS address MEMORY ADD X E100 WORD X 3E0A This command will modify memory locations ADD X E100 and ADD 1 X E
39. 1 1 2 1 6 D0 gt 0E52 B728 0721 CA3F 2220 40C9 21BD 3D36 Relative 1 96 8 6 6 46 20 gt 8C23 36AC 1140 0019 36AA 10FB 3683 2836 gt 82 Byte 2 R 1 F0 gt 8321 FD3D 2220 40C9 3A0E 52B7 C021 BD3D C R we ouoztanoam Drive Index Command C R C Ri a R gt ede UU Rese Beee BD 3 erens fe U K R BD 3 6D 3 fb Aane ee a ea oes 00 61 02 40 gt 50 gt 60 gt 70 gt 80 gt 90 gt AQ gt BO gt FED CMD Prive Record 13 x 000D Relative Byte gt 82 Command R Yalues X 61 97 Entering FED To enter FED simply type FED lt ENTER gt at the DOS Ready prompt The first prompt you will see will ask you to enter a filespec Answer this prompt by giving the filespec of the file you wish to examine or modify If you wish to exit FED at this point press the lt BREAK gt key If an illegal or improper filespec is given the appropriate error message will appear and you will be allowed to re enter the filespec The filespec prompt may be bypassed by entering FED using the syntax 138 es esas Les fees Boe Wee ee He ae ees FED Utility Command FED filespec lt ENTER gt After a valid filespec has been given the FED 256 character mode will appear on the screen and the first record record 0 will be contained in the edit buffer The term edit buffer will refer to the record of the file currently in the computer s memor
40. 52 53 54 154 329 pack name 116 parameter 11 13 329 parameter strings 303 parity 209 parm 330 Partitioned Datg Set 123 partspec 11 47 56 90 126 329 PASSWORD 155 190 password 4 43 51 93 104 195 327 330 password protection 97 passwords for DOS files 25 PATCH 44 62 184 330 Percom 254 phantom device 171 port 112 227 PR 23 274 PR FLT 157 228 281 printcr time out 228 275 procedure libraries 132 protcction level 43 PRTIME 228 275 pseudo floppy drive 266 PURGE 190 193 269 280 Q QFB 128 212 R RAM 2 330 RAM Disk Driver 266 read after write verification 248 README TXT 1 real time clock 29 245 register 107 112 REMOVE 121 193 200 203 removing patches 187 Removing unwanted files 7 RENAME 195 REPAIR 22 39 98 197 Repeat last DOS command 270 repeating last DOS command 261 272 RESET 94 118 170 172 199 203 231 257 280 reset button 48 60 RESTORE 228 restrictions of JCL 280 reverse video 66 165 ROM 2 330 ROM Basic 222 ROUTE 118 170 171 202 220 230 RS 232 29 30 39 75 RS 232L 23 RS232M 251 RS232R 23 251 RS232T 23 208 251 RS232x 251 RUN 205 sae S screen print 227 256 257 SCRIPSIT 42 62 136 184 205 sector 3 330 semi colon separator 186 serial driver 29 209 214 SET 118 220 230 273 SETCOM 83 209 251 252 SETDATE 103 SETKI 2
41. 91 02 04 91 This command will purge all visible files on drive as long as their mod date is between 02 01 91 and 02 04 91 inclusive You will be asked before each file is purged PURGE SCR 2 Q N D 06 02 91 This command will purge all visible files with a SCR extension provided their mod date is 06 02 91 or earlier You will not be asked before each file is purged 192 nN bse de Wipes REMOVE amp KILL Library Commands REMOVE and KILL This library command is used to delete one or more specified files or devices from the system The syntax is REMOVE filespec devspec filespec devspec V6 KILL filespec devspec filespec devspec V5 filespec The name of the file to be deleted devspec The name of the device to be deleted The REMOVE V6 or KILL V5 command serves two purposes It removes unwanted files from a diskette thereby freeing up the space previously allocated to that file It also removes devices that are no longer needed from the device table Deleting files To delete a file type in the following command at the DOS prompt REMOVE filespec If the file is password protected you must supply the proper password or the file will not be killed To deal with deleting more than several files it is Often easier to use the PURGE library command which in effect is a controlled mass delete This may be the case if the files to be deleted contain a common filename
42. ADVANCED JCL COMPILING section LABEL A JCL label is the AT sign followed by up to eight alphanumeric characters It is used to define the start of a JCL procedure allowing many small JCL procedures to be combined into one large file Like the execution phase there are several special JCL statements or MACROS available with the compile phase As with the execution macros they are in the form of two slashes followed by the appropriate word In order of explanation they are F ASSIGN SET JELSE COMMENT RESET END QUIT INCLUDE JCL conditional decisions Certain JCL macros can be used to establish blocks within a JCL file During the compilation these blocks will be evaluated for a logical true or false condition The following shows the basic methods of evaluation e If the evaluation is true Include all the lines until the block end e If the evaluation is false Ignore all the lines until the block end An alternate to a false evaluation is also provided 294 Batch Processing Job Control Language If the evaluation is true Include these lines Or else Include these lines There are three com pilation macros provided to define a block of lines INF defines the start of a block IEND defines the end of a block HELSE defines the alternative to a false IF Translating the above three examples for use with these three JCL macros would
43. Be sure to set the KI DVR program again before applying the new KSM file 265 MemDISK RAM Driver MEMDISK DCT RAM Disk Driver MemDISK is a DOS version 6 driver which allows you to add a pseudo floppy drive to the DOS system which stores its files in the regular or extended memory of the computer rather than on a physical floppy disk The syntax for installing MemDISK is SYSTEM DRIVE d DRIV ER MEMDISK DISABLE DRIVE d Specifies the logical drive number DISABLE Required if the d slot is active With this invocation of the SYSTEM command the following menu is displayed lt A gt Bank 0 Primary Memory I lt B gt Bank 1 lt C gt Bank 2 i lt D gt Banks 1 and 2 lt E gt Disable MemDISK Which Type of Allocation lt A gt lt B gt lt C gt lt D gt or lt E gt Each bank of switchable memory contains 32K of RAM If your system has only 64K then you do not have banks 1 and 2 only bank 0 Bank 0 is the top half of user memory It is shared by programs drivers filters and MemDISK Selecting A sets up a RAM disk but uses the primary high memory area of your machine If you have a 64K computer then this is the only available installation A bank O RAM disk can seriously reduce the amount of memory available to your programs and is not recommended Because bank 0 is shared if you select A you are prompted for the number of cylinders that are to be used for the MemDISK
44. C9 B6 OF c6 30 23 C9 CB 2F CB 2F cB 08 PLAYE lt 80 gt 2F 2F 18 FO C6 30 23 C9 20 20 50 4C 41 59 45 IR gt uesesseae 90 gt 52 3C 20 3 20 20 FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF vasessoosesesess SAOS FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FE FF FF FF FF FF FF T esesesanseeseeses SBO gt FFE FF FF 80 88 B7 B7 B7 B 9D 80 AE BB BB BB eee eee INTRU lt CO gt BB 84 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 20 49 4E 54 52 55 J DERS cee eee lt DO gt 44 45 52 53 AE 9D AE 9D 88 9B A 84 88 SE AD 84 gt OxH x O HO H lt E0 gt AO 99 AG 90 30 78 48 B4 78 84 30 7C 48 30 F8 48 i POINTS20 POINTS1 lt F0 gt 50 4F 49 4E 54 53 32 30 20 50 4F 49 48 54 53 31 148 Lo t FILTER Library Command FILTER The FILTER command establishes a program to filter modify the I O path of a specified device The syntax is FILTER devspec USING filespec parm V5 FILTER devspec USING devspec2 V6 devspec any valid DOS device devspec2 the device spec of an installed DOS 6 filter module filespec the filespec of a DOS version 5 FILTER program with the default extension being FLT parm optional parameters for the filespec program The FILTER command is used to filter or modify data as it passes between the specified device and its driver program DOS is structured so that any device may be easily filtered to provide modification of standard I O paths You will find that filter programs are usually written to provide other than standard functio
45. CA CB CC CD CE CF DO D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 DA DB DC DD DE DF CLR CLR CLR CLR CLR CLR CLR CLR CLR CLR CLR CLR CLR CLR CLR CLR CLR CLR CLR CLR CLR CLR CLR CLR CLR CLR CLR lt gt lt A gt lt B gt lt C gt lt D gt lt E gt lt F gt lt G gt lt H gt lt I gt lt J gt lt K gt lt L gt lt M gt lt N gt lt 0 gt lt P gt lt Q gt lt R gt lt S gt lt T gt lt U gt lt V gt lt W gt lt X gt lt Y gt lt Z gt BY lt i 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 DEC 224 229 226 227 228 A 230 234 232 233 234 230 236 231 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 294 293 254 299 HEX TAG EO El E2 E3 E4 ES E6 E7 E8 E9 EA EB EC ED EE RE FO F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 FA FB FC FD FE FF 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 ENTERED BY CLR CLR CLR CLR CLR CLR CLR CLR CLR CLR CLR CLR CLR CLR CLR CLR CLR CLR CLR CLR CLR CLR CLR CLR CLR CLR CLR SH SH SH SH SH SH SH SH SH SH SH SH SH SH SH SH SH SH SH SH SH SH SH SH SH SH SH lt gt lt A gt lt B gt lt C gt lt D gt lt E gt lt F gt lt G gt lt H gt lt I gt lt J gt lt K gt lt L gt lt M gt lt N gt lt O gt
46. DOS 6 a can be a flag specification A Z entered as a string A S Changes the contents of ADD Will fill memory from X 5200 V5 or X 2600 V6 to HIGHS with X 00 Transfers control to the specified address This parameter is always invoked last _ Will set the specified address as HIGH addr must be less than the current HIGHS Allows for printing the memory map Changes the contents of ADD and ADD 1 In all MEMORY commands the GO parameter if used will be the last parameter to be invoked regardless of its physical position in the 180 Cage ie ee Rg a ee ee eg ge E ge ee a e ne eee Pe ee Se Oe ge ie en gs Se A a ee a oe ee MEMORY Utility Command command line Ali other parameters will be acted upon before the actual GO is done The following restrictions are placed on the WORD and BYTE parameters n WORD Cannot X 0000 or decimal value 0 BYTE Cannot X FF or decimal value 255 Refer to the following examples and descriptions All MEMORY commands will display the contents of system low memory V6 DOS only and modules ioaded into high memory if any The version 6 DOS will also display the status of all memory banks known to the DOS This display will take the following form 32K Banks avail 11 11 In use lt gt Low Memory Directory Start X O8F0 Length 2156 Module Start Address End Address Length SKI X OBFO X 0B87 664 DO X OB88 X
47. Free fffff f sssss s Fie mmm nnn KI DVR P KSM FLT P MINIDOS FLT P PATCH CMD P FDUBL CMD PR FLT P RS232R DVR P Including the S and I parameters will show all files in the directory The command DIR 0 1 S A N may produce a display such as 124 _ fos eee he ee es bas e EN bena oa Pees DIR Library Command Drive diskname diskdate cyldh Free fffff f sssss s Fiemmn nnn BACKUP CMD IP DIR SYS SIP KSM FLT P LBASIC OV2 IP MINIDOS ELT P PR FLT P SYSO SYS SIP SYS11 SYS SIP SYS4 SYS SIP SYS7 SY S SIP BOOT SYS SIP FORMAT CMD IP LBASIC CMD IP LBASIC OV3 IP PATCH CMD P RS232R DVR P SYS1 SYS SIP SYS2 SYS SIP SYSS SYS SIP SYS8 SYS SIP CMDFILE CMD IP KI DVR P LBASIC OV1 IP LCOMM CMD IP RDUBL CMD RS232T DVR P SYS10 SYS SIP SYS3 SY3 SIP SYS6 SYS SIP SYS9 SYS SIP The directory information will normally appear on the video display the DO device It will automatically pause when the display screen is full Pressing lt BREAK gt will terminate the display while pressing any other key will continue with screen The display may be made to scroll without pause if the N parameter is specified in the DIR command If the DIR command is invoked from a JCL file the N parameter will automatically be set You may use the lt SHIFT gt lt gt keys to pause the display The P parameter will send the display to the line printer PR device as well as the video The P parameter will automat
48. HIGH highest unused memory location and use the space directly below this location for its buffer HIGHS will then be decremented to protect this area ROUTE will be able to reuse a previously installed but currently unused high memory support module of a previous ROUTE of the same device If the designated filespec already exists the data routed to that file will be appended to the end of the existing file If you wish the data to be written from the beginning of the file specify the REWIND parameter which allows you to start the routed file at its beginning In some cases it will be advisable to use the CREATE command to allocate file space before doing the route A new logical device may be created with the ROUTE command To create a device simply route the desired devspec to another devspec to a filespec or to NIL The new device will then appear in the device table 202 cn RNA E ren ROUTE Library Command To examine any currently existing routing use the DEVICE command The device notations shown directly below the disk drive configurations will indicate all currently recognized devspecs and any routing among other things that has been done Once a device has been routed it may be returned to its normal power up state or removed completely from the device table with the RESET or REMOVE commands ROUTE PR DO This command will route any data sent to the line printer PR to the video display DO
49. None of the characters will be printed by the line printer but instead will be shown on the video display This command is very similar to LINK PR DO the exception being that the characters are not printed by the line printer with the route but are with the link The line printer need not be hooked to the system if PR is routed to DO To remove the routing use the command RESET PR ROUTE DU TO TEST TXT 0 This command will route a user device DU to a disk file TEST TXT on drive 0 A File Control Block and a blocking buffer will be established in high memory The device table will show the routing with an entry of DU gt IEST IXT 0 The file TEST TXT will remain open as long as the device DU is not RESET The file must be closed with the RESET DU command prior to removing the diskette from the drive ROUTE PR TO PRINTER DAT This command routes all data normalty sent to the line printer PR to a disk file PRINTER DAT The system will search all active drives and use the first file PRINTER DAT it finds Any data sent to the PR will then be appended to the end of the PRINTER DAT file If the file does not exist it will be created on the first available drive An FCB and blocking buffer will be allocated in high memory and the file PRINTER DAT will remain open until the PR is reset 203 A ST A AOD UR RT SO AT A a LR AA A ma m a A AL AL TA RS SS A TT OT ES ETS NT Oe tS OE a r a e EE A a a a a e a 1 a ee ce i a me
50. O O OAE A At RR A RA Beas e ae FORMS Library Command INDENT 6 will indent 6 spaces the remainder s of any line that exceeds 80 characters determined by the CHARS 80 parameter PAGE 51 sets the physical page size to 51 lines LINES 45 will allow for 45 lines to be printed on a page Since the page length is 51 lines determined by the PAGE 51 parameter the filter program will normally send six linefeeds after the 45th line has been printed These linefeeds are determined by the formula PAGE minus LINES If no linefeeds are required do not specify either PAGE or LINES FFHARD will cause an X OC to be sent rather than 6 linefeeds when the line count reaches 45 FORMS M 10 C 80 1 6 This example will cause all tines to start 10 spaces in from the normal left hand starting position MARGIN 10 Any line longer than 80 characters will be indented six spaces when wrapped around and will be printed starting at position 16 FORMS TAB ADDLF This example will cause expansion of all X 09 characters to their normal cight column tab position Also a line feed will be sent every time a carriage retum is sent FORMS XLATE X 2A2E This example will translate all X 2A characters asterisks to an X 2E characters periods This may be useful to change the appearance of a report format 159 FREE Library Command FREE This command will show the used and available space and files on each disk
51. RESET The first is a global reset the second is the reset of a single device The global reset will reset all active devices while the reset of a single device will affect only that device A device s default driver routine referred to in the following explanations can be seen by doing a DEVICE command before any configuration is done If the device has been filtered linked routed or set to another driver the new device address will be shown by the DEVICE command RESET of a file Under DOS version 6 if the network flag has been enabled open files are flagged in the directory A file can be left in an open state if a program does not close it prior to terminating The DIR command discloses this condition via a character in the attribute s field of the file A File aleady open error also may indicate such a condition To clear this condition issue the RESET filespec command Parameter LRL is used to alters the logical record length of the file to the value n appropriate values of n are in the range 0 255 with O implying a record length of 256 The following example changes the logical record length of MYDATA DAT file to 128 199 ne a eo nT eS a Am A a ea RESET Library Command RESET MYDATA DAT Lrl 128 The DATE parameter is used to allow the file s directory date to be altered Specifying RESET filespec DATE OFF restores the file s directory entry to the old style dating of pre x 3 release
52. RS 232 driver SET CL TO COM DVR V6 SETCOM BREAK SET CL RS232T BREAK V5 This example will restore the default values Because BREAK was specified certain system functions will recognize break pause or enter characters from the RS 232 as if they came from the keyboard SET CL COM V6 SETCOM DTR CTS BREAK SET CL RS232T DTR CTS BREAK V5 This example is identical to the previous except that the DTR line will be held in a constant TRUE state and the driver will not transmit any characters unless the external device raises the CTS line SET CL RS232T W 7 P ON EVEN This example will set the word length to 7 and set parity ON and EVEN 253 a ee FDUBL Driver Program FDUBL FDUBL is a disk driver program for use with the Model I 5 25 drives and a double density modification board such as a Percom type Aerocomp DDC or a Radio Shack board The syntax is FDUBL Tandy Percom Percom Parameter to designate a Percom type doubler Tandy Parameter to designate a Radio Shack doubler This command loads a special disk driver program which allows you to use a double density hardware modification to read write and format double or single density 5 25 disks with the Model I Before buying a double density board please check with the manufacturer or DOS Support to assure compatibility with the DOS FDUBL driver If you have a doubler installed after you give thi
53. Specifying SYSTEM AMPM ON will cause a 12 hr clock display specifying SYSTEM AMPM OFF will cause a 24 hr clock display This option is configurable and pertains only to the DIR display SYSTEM BASIC2 V5 This command will direct you to the ROM Basic in the TRS 80 computer Typing in SYSTEM BASIC2 while in the DOS Ready mode will function identically to pressing the reset button with the lt BREAK gt key held down The screen will clear and Coss Model 111 or Memory Size Model I will be displayed in the upper left corner of the display Any routing linking or driver routines set under DOS will be reset to the normal ROM Basic drivers While in ROM BASIC none of the disk functions are available for use and you cannot return directly to DOS or BASIC You must press the reset button or turn off the computer and go through power up to get back to the operating system SYSTEM BLINK aaaa This command controls the DOS cursor character The parameter aaaa can be represented as ON JOFF or as a decimal value The cursor character 222 i re pr er ge SYSTEM Library Command numbers in the following examples are the ASCII values in decimal of the TRS 80 character set This command will use high memory on the Model The BLINK module can now be removed from memory ON Tums the blinking cursor on with the cursor character being a graphics block character 176 I for version 5 or an underline character 95
54. The DO command may be entered directly from the DOS Ready prompt such as DO BAS JCL To execute a JCL file once you have entered BASIC the command format is CMD DO filename DOS 5 SYSTEM DO filename DOS 6 This command can be typed in directly or may be entered as a BASIC program line As with any DOS version 5 CMD dos command function invoked from BASIC it will be necessary to have approximately 319 Batch Processing Job Control Language 4K of free memory available or an Out of memory error will occur DOS 6 DOS BASIC can only invoke a DO file it cannot return to BASIC Any JCL file that will be called from DOS 5 BASIC should have the EXIT termination macro so control will retum to BASIC when the JCL is completed For example suppose you wished to use the JCL ALERT macro to inform you when a lengthy BASIC procedure had completed After the lines containing the BASIC procedure you could have an BASIC program line such as 1000 CMD DO ALERT JCL 0 which might execute the ALERT JCL file Your procedure is complete press lt ENTER gt to resume ALERT 1 0 7 0 EXIT When BASIC reached line 1000 the JCL fite ALERT JCL would be exe cuted This would send a series of repeating tones out the cassette port or Model 4 sound port Assuming you had a suitable amplifier hooked to the cassette cable you would be notified you that your BASIC procedure had completed Pressing lt ENTER gt would end the J
55. This gives you the ability to make sure all needed tokens are entered before any execution takes place START JCL set ff forms DOS 6 filter pr ff DOS 6 filter pr pr fit DOS 5 _forms lines 60 JNF KI set kl ki type JELSE Kl was not entered QUIT END basic 304 L oe ee Batch Processing Job Control Language run program bas STOP If this JCL file was compiled without the token KT being entered on the DO command line the screen display would show KI was not entered QUIT No actual fines would be executed from the SYSTEM JCL file as the compile phase was aborted before completion The compilation comment tells the operator why the abort took place The QUIT macro may seem very similar to the ABORT execution macro The main difference is when the actuat abort takes place Substituting ABORT for QUIT in the previous example and then doing the JCL without the token KI would produce the following screen display If KI was not entered START JICL set ff forms DOS 6 Filter pr ff DOS 6 filter pr pr flt DOS 5 forms lines 60 MESS As you can see the comment line will be displayed as the compiling is taking place However since ABORT is an execution macro the SYSTEM JCL fite will execute until it reaches the ABORT line This means that any executable lines up to that point will be executed In this casc the forms
56. When this file is compiled and executed the comment line will be tabbed over sixteen places Notice that the first is after the period in the comment If the symbol were before the period DOS would not recognize it as a comment line and the JCL would abort In the PAUSE line the PAUSE would be displayed and the remaining message line would be displayed three lines lower on the screen Using the tab and linefeed characters in this manner can sometimes help improve the readability of the messages displayed during JCL execution Although any other ASCII character may also be sent to the keyboard the system generally will not respond to any other characters less than a space X 20 Characters above this value may be used with the symbol but it is easier merely to type them in as a command line in the JCL file Interfacing with applications programs This section will describe how to use JCL to start up and even control applications programs After reading this section it should be very easy for a user to interface between an application and the JCL processor Two languages will be discussed BASIC and Z 80 assembler Interfacing with BASIC A JCL file is the perfect method to interface between the operating systein and the BASIC language JCL can be used to create procedures that require only the insertion of a diskette to start up a program Additionally 318 te eee Batch Processing Job Control Lang
57. _ for version 6 OFF Tums off the blinking cursor On the Model III the cur sor character will be a non blinking graphics character The Model I will have the normal power up cursor aoaaa can also be represented as any displayable ASCII char acter value For example if the command SYSTEM BLINK 42 were given the blinking cursor character would be an asterisk character 42 SYSTEM BLINK LARGE This cotnmand turns on a large character 143 blinking cursor SYSTEM BLINK SMALL This command turns on a small character 136 blinking cursor SYSTEM BREAK switch This command will enable or disable the lt BREAK gt key The allowable switches are ON or OFF If switch is not specified the default will be ON Once the lt BREAK gt key is disabled by typing a SYSTEM BREAK OFF command pressing it will have no effect and the system break bit will not be set It may be re enabled at any time by doing a SYSTEM BREAK ON command The BREAK ON will also enable the lt BREAK gt key if it was disabled by the AUTO library command No memory will be used with this parameter Note Specifying BREAK OFF will prevent routines such as the BUILD command froin exiting when the lt BREAK gt key is pressed 223 SYSTEM Library Command SYSTEM BSTEP n This command will establish the default bootstrap step rate used with the FORMAT utility The BSTEP value can be 0 1 2 or 3 These values correspond to the same step rate
58. a new JCL file will compile properly Use the LIST library command to examine the SYSTEM JCL file to see the resultant JCL lines that will be invoked Character The character will skip the compile phase and directly invoke your JCL file Be aware that some of the JCL features will be ignored if the compile phase is skipped Refer to the Job Control Language section of the manual for a complete list of these features and limitations Character The character will rerun the last DO command that was compiled by using the existing SYSTEM JCL file If this file does not exist nothing will be done and an error message will be generated DO DRIVE JCL This command will compile and invoke a file named DRIVE JCL The system will search the drives for a file named DRIVE JCL and compile it to a file named SYSTEM JCL After it has been compiled the resultant SYSTEM JCL file will be invoked DO DRIVE JCL This command will invoke the file DRIVE JCL without compiling it to the SYSTEM JCL file DO DRIVE This command will compile the file DRIVE JCL to the SYSTEM JCL file The file will not be invoked Note that the filespec DRIVE will use the default extension of JCL 133 rr rr a e n ree rm re rm rt ee ae re a a i te a en ne aaa DO Library Command DO MY JCL 0 THIRD This command will compile and invoke the program MY JCL All instructions in the program will be ignored up to the LABEL
59. a text file into the buffer Command confirmation or advance to next line Go to the NEXT video page PRINT the entire text buffer QUERY a directory REPLACE searched string with new string SEARCH for a string Go UP to the previous video page EXIT the text editor 236 Key Entry lt or CTRL HH or CTRL H l or CTRL J if or CTRL K SIHFT lt SHIFT SHIFT YY V6 or SENET UZ V5 SHIFT UP CTRL A CTRL B CTRL DI CTRL F CTRL G CTRL L ENTER or CTRL M CTRL N CTRL P CTRL Q CTRL R CTRL S CTRL U _ CLEAR SHIFT a nn Eas eee Ve Theesoyutig Command Invoking TED TED is invoked via the command TED filename TXT TED will display a welcome message on the bottom line of the video screen This display line will also be used for the display of status prompting and error messages TED displays three different types of messages during its operation Error messages are indicated by a terminating exclamation point I Queries which need a response are indicated by a terminating question mark Informative messages use no special character for their termination Thus Morker is an error String is a query and Block is information Text entry modes TED will accept only displayable ASCII characters in the range 20H through 7FH for text entry Any other character value will be interpreted as a cominand entry If it matc
60. an alternative course of action in case an IF evaluates false It is also allowable to have more IF END statements following the ELSE Refer to the following examples TEST JCL F A comment I ELSE F B comment 2 END ends the IF B statement END ends the IF A statement 314 en Batch Processing Job Control Language The TEST example is fairly straight forward If A evaluates true comment 1 would be written out and the ELSE would be ignored If A was false B would be tested Comment 2 would be written out only if B was true Notice the two JEND macros As stated earlier there must be one END for every IF What might not be readily apparent is which END matches which IF In this example there are comments in parentheses to show the way the ENDs correspond to the IFs It is allowable to use this type of comment identifier in real JCL files You will find that labeling END macros greatly increases the readability of the file especially when editing a file that you have created some weeks or months previously This next example and the following description again show how nested IMFs are evaluated AFA First IF Comment A F B Second IF Comment B INF C Third IF Comment C END ends Third IF END ends Second IF Comment D END ends First IF Evaluating this example produces the following results When the first IF is fa
61. and 64K machines respectively To sce the current HIGH value use the MEMORY command When DOS needs to use high memory it does so in the following manner e Find the highest unused memory address by looking at the value 35 a nn O RL A ar me a a a i L S DOS User Manual stored in the HIGH location e Install the necessary code in memory below the current HIGH value 7 e Lower the HIGHS value to protect the added program code Any code that DOS stores in high memory is written to be relocatable This means that it can load anywhere in memory and is not restricted to a specific area Since DOS always respects the HIGH value it will never attempt to overlay any programs loaded and protected by using the HIGH value in this manner Unfortunately some applications programs do not always respect the HIGH value As a result programs or BASIC USR routines that load in high memory are not always written in a relocatable manner They have a fixed load address and must be loaded there to execute properly If DOS has previously put program code in that memory arca it will be overwritten This results in what is called a memory conflict two pieces of program code that want to use the same memory area at the same time When the DOS code is something like the KI DVR program this usually results in an immediate system crash Fortunately it is possible to get around this problem by using the MEMORY command To
62. appropriate drive cable is needed The standard drive cable will not work Note that you may be able to utilize a Model I drive cable if you invert the orientation of all connectors on their respective edge card positions 34 ka e eee Lae s Lo on DOS SYSTEM DEVICES AND DISK DRIVES Standard disk formats This table reflects the format used on standard DOS data diskettes Sectors Grans Directory Size Density Tracks Sides Granule Cylinder Sectors 3 5 Double 80 2 6 32 5 Singte 35 8 Single 35 2 18 Doubice 35 l 16 Double 35 2 32 Single 40 l 8 Single 40 2 18 Double 40 l 16 Double 40 2 32 Single 80 l 8 Single 80 2 18 Double 80 l 16 Double 80 2 32 Single TI 14 Single 77 2 30 Double TI l 28 Double TI 2 32 w wo NDNDUNMAADAADUAMH DAA WM Dn wen AW AN AW AN DD WwW f amp N DA Memory usage and configuration Certain features of DOS are user selectable i e the keyboard driver KI DVR the printer filter PR FLT Model I double density drivers etc To implement these features DOS will load the necessary program into high memory DOS version 6 allows some use of low memory for drivers anc filters There is one term that is very important in the DOS operating system HIGHS This term is pronounced High dollar and refers to a location that holds the address of the highest unused memory location If DOS is using no high memory then HIGHS will contain X 7FFF X BFFF or X FFFF for 32K 48K
63. are followed and the HELP system will abort if sufficient memory is not available Another example of a HELP request from DOS version 5 BASIC might be CMD HELP BASIC LSET which will function memory permitting as described above and would return control to BASIC 2 iee a HITAPE Utility Command HITAPE The HITAPE utility is for DOS version 5 Model III only and will permit the use of high speed 1500 baud cassette I O in the BASIC and CMDFILE programs The syntax is HITAPE Due to space constraints and a desire to provide a high level of sophistication through the proper use of interrupt tasks it was necessary to disable the use of 1500 baud cassette toading in the resident DOS system To restore that 1500 baud tape capability in the system when it is needed the HITAPE CMD utility adds an additional routine to the DOS The utility is called and is invoked by simply typing HITAPE lt ENTER gt at the DOS Ready prompt You may then use 500 or 1500 baud tapes in the normal manner If HITAPE is in when a SYSTEM SYSGEN is performed it will be saved with the configuration file Both CMDFILE and BASIC allow the use of high speed cassette only if HITAPE has been invoked If HITAPE has NOT been invoked and a 1500 baud tape load is attempted the tape will not load It may be necessary to depress the lt BREAK gt key to regain control of the system 167 KILL and REMOVE KILL Library Command KILL i
64. been disabled then depress the over ride immediately after the lt ENTER gt _ following the date entry And if the date prompt has been disabled depress the over ride key immediately after the lt ENTER gt following the BOOT command entry 60 eee ree ee ee BOOT Library Command Holding down the lt CLEAR gt key will prevent any configuration file stored on the disk from being loaded The configuration would have been created and stored with the SYSTEM SYSGEN or SYSGEN commands If you hold down the lt ENTER gt key you will prevent the execution of any breakable AUTO commands from taking place Refer to the AUTO command for additional details The lt D gt key will cause the debugger non extended to be loaded and invoked No configuration file will be loaded and all memory above X 5200 for DOS version 5 or X 2400 for DOS version 6 with the exception of X 4300 X 43FF will be untouched Use of this debug function is explained under the DEBUG command On the Model HI holding down the lt gt key during booting will prevent the DOS front end to the vidco driver from being loaded The system will use the ROM video driver instead which may be necessary for certain programs Caution Using the ROM video driver will cause problems with keyboard type ahead LCOMM the SPOOLer and any other DOS function that uses interrupt processing and should not normally be done On the Model 4P certain keys are used
65. by the semi colon F gt FREE DEVICE This phrase would be read in when the lt CLEAR gt and lt F gt keys were pressed together The DOS command FREE would be executed and the command DEVICE would execute afterward Following are some examples of the KSM function in BASIC F gt FOR N gt NEXT C gt CLEAR5000 DEFINT A Z DEFSTR S U V DEFDBL D DIM 100 The keys lt F gt and lt N gt could be assigned the phrases FOR and NEXT Whenever these BASIC commands were needed they could be entered in by pressing the lt CLEAR gt and alphabetic key The lt C gt key would insert the entire line associated with it into the program It is possible to assign the most common BASIC keywords and commands to a KSM file so they may be instantly inserted while programming in BASIC 264 o KSM Filter Program Once KI is filtered with a KSM file a different KSM may be utilized as follows e If the length of the new KSM file is less than or equal to the original KSM file merely issue another filter command The new KSM file will be loaded over the existing one and will not require any additional memory e If the new KSM file is larger than the original you will not be allowed to change it The message Request exceeds available memory will appear and the FILTER operation will abort You will have to do a global RESET to remove all configuration and then reconfigure using the larger KSM file
66. character must be in the form of two hexadecimal digits This feature will allow you to send control characters to the line printer to switch printing modes etc If an invalid character is entered an asterisk will appear You will be allowed to re enter the character at this point lt gt The lt Q gt command will show the visible files on a specified drive You will see the fetter Q appear within braces Type in the drivespec of the target drive and the visible files will be displayed in four across format You may also specify a particular file extension The syntax would be d EXT where d is the drivespec and EXT is the desired extension The 271 MiniDOS Filter Program wildcard character may be used but all three characters must be specified For example to find all file extensions starting with B B must be specified lt R gt The lt R gt command will repeat the last issued DOS command regardless of the filter s position in the keyboard device chain lt T gt The lt I gt command will issue a Top Of Form to the line printer This will also clear the line counter Entering an invalid parameter for any of the above commands will display the associated DOS error message 272 FLOPPY amp MODx Driver Programs floppy DCT The MODx Model I II and FLOPPY DOS version 6 DCT programs are used to change the logical drive numbers of 3 5 5 25 and 8 floppy
67. clock speedup while still maintaining an accurate time clock Model IHI users should not specify FAST without an appropriate hardware speedup The version 5 Model I FASTISLOW parameters will switch speed up modifications addressed through port 254 The clock speed is controlled in the following manner e FAST issues an OUT Port 254 1 command e SLOW issues an OUT Port 254 0 command SYSTEM GRAPHIC This command informs the DOS system that your line printer has the capability to directly reproduce the TRS 80 graphics characters during a scrcen print version 5 screen print is enabled as a parameter of the KI DVR program version 6 screen print is a resident feature of DOS If this parameter is used any graphics characters on the screen will be sent to the line printer during a screen print command either from the DOS level 227 re rn J SYSTEM Library Command or with version 5 BASIC s CMD Do not use this parameter unless your printer is capable of directly reproducing the TRS 80 graphics characters SYSTEM HERTZ5 HERTZ6 This DOS version 6 parameter is used to adjust the software real time clock task for either 50 Hertz HERTZ5 or 60 Hertz HERTZ6 AC line frequency SYSTEM PRTIME ON OFF Ce sum This sub command can enable or disable the printer time out when fine printer output is requested and the printer is unavailable Specifying SYSTEM PRTIME ON establishes an approximate 10 second time out when th
68. disk BACKUP 0 1 X This command will backup a disk in drive 0 to a disk in drive 1 Its primary use is to backup non system disks such as data disks in a two drive system When using this backup parameter you will be prompted to insert the proper disk in drive 0 You may be prompted to re insert a system disk into drive 0 during certain backups When the backup is complete you will be prompted to insert a system disk back in drive 0 If the backup will be by class or a reconstruct SYS overlays 2 3 8 V5 and 10 must be resident in memory see the SYSTEM SYSRES command BACKUP 1 2 OLD This command will backup visible files from drive 1 to drive 2 only if they already existed on drive 2 BACKUP 1 2 NEW Q This command will backup visible files from drive 1 to drive 2 only if they do not already exist on drive 2 You will be prompted before each file is moved as the Q parameter was specified BACKUP ASM 3 2 D 05 06 91 05 10 91 This command will backup all visible files with the extension ASM as long as their mod dates fell between the two dates specified inclusive Many more examples of the power of BACKUP could be given but the best method for the user to understand the scope of BACKUP is through its usc Experiment until you are comfortable with this utility You can see exactly what files will be moved by a particular BACKUP command by doing a DIR command of the source disk
69. display Job Aborted JEXIT Stop execution display Job Done 284 Le a Batch Processing Job Control Language Be sure to use the proper termination macro for the intended job application JCL PAUSE DELAY Macros The other execution macros can be used to provide special effects if you need them in your JCL files One of the most often used is the PAUSE macro which provides a means to temporarily suspend JCL execution PAUSE optional message string When this macro is encountered in an executing JCL file it will be displayed on the screen along with any optional message The message can inform you why the pause was ordered Pressing lt ENTER gt will resume JCL execution while pressing lt BREAK gt will abort the JCL For example Program start up JCL last modified 01 01 92 SET FF FORMS DOS 6 FILTER PR PR FLT DOS 5 FORMS CHARS 80 MARGIN 10 LINES 60 BASIC PAUSE Be sure data disks are mounted in drives 1 and 2 RUN PROGRAM BAS EXIT This example will suspend the JCL as soon as BASIC executes and before the program is run and loaded You can then check that the needed disks are in your other drives and press lt ENTER gt to continue the JCL The DELAY and WAIT macros are similar to the PAUSE macro and used to give JCL execution a specific delay period DELAY duration The DELAY macro will provide for a definite timed pause JCL execution will automatic
70. drive It will do this by swapping the DCT Drive Code Table information of the drive specified with the current system drive Note that there must be a diskette containing the necessary system files in the drive specified If the designated drive does not contain the DOS and JCL is in execution the command will abort otherwise you will be prompted to enter a SYSTEM disk This command is equivalent to SYSTEM SWAP n DRIVE 0 Once this command has been invoked DOS will look for any needed system files on the new system drive Also the defaults for number of cylinders and the bootstrap step rate use by the FORMAT utility will now be taken from the new system drive If necessary use the SYSTEM parameters BSTEP and DRIVE CYL to establish these defaults on the new system disk The logical drive numbers will also be changed addressing drive 0 will now access the newly specified system drive and vice versa This procedure may be repeated and a swap of the current system drive with the drive specified will occur The logical drive numbers will also change again Be careful when repeating this command or you may lose track of which drive is currently assigned to what logical drive number Note that doing a global RESET command will reset ali drive DCTs to their default configurations Be sure to have a system disk in physical drive 0 before performing a global RESET command SYSTEM TIME switch This command will enable or
71. during a backup by class if the SOURCE is a system disk The SYS parameter also reconfigures a DATA disk into a SYSTEM disk by allocating directory entry codes for SYS files in the Hash Index Table Both Model I and Model IH DOS 5 versions of BACKUP can perform a mirror image duplication of a Model I dual density system diskette provided the destination diskette has been previously formatted with a dual density configuration There are three types of backups available with DOS They are MIRROR IMAGE BACKUP BY CLASS and BACKUP RECONSTRUCT Certain rules determine which type of backup will be done A mirror image backup will be attempted if the size 3 5 or 5 25 or 8 floppy the density and the number of sides are identical on the source and destination disks The number of cylinders need not be identical as long as the destination disk has a cylinder count greater than or equal to the source disk A backup by class will be done if the user specifies a partspec or any parameter except X or MPW in the command line eg ee a ek ee ee ee ge AS BACKUP Utility Command A backup reconstruct will be done if the size 3 5 or 5 25 8 or hard the density or the number of sides differs between the source and destination disks A backup by class and a backup reconstruct function identically doing a file by file copy The only difference is that a backup by class is initiated by the user and a backup reconstruct is initi
72. ea aa a a am o a aa RN a a aa mee FORMAT Utility Command FORMAT This command formats a diskette with cylinders tracks sectors and a directory so that it may be used by the system The syntax is FORMAT d parm parm Abs Will format the disk even if the disk is already formatted and contains data Cyl The number of cylinders tracks that are to be placed on the disk up to 96 Dir Specifies a cylinder for the directory which will be used instead of an automatic selection Mpw s The master password assigned to the disk Name s The name that will be given to the disk Query Will prompt you for density sides step and number of cylinders SDEN The density that will be used to FORMAT the disk DDEN DDEN double or SDEN single SIDES d The number of sides to be formatted either l or 2 STEP d The boot track step rate that will be put on track 0 either 0 1 2 3 SYSTEM Will add system information to a previously formatted hard disk Also used in creating Model I dual density system BOOT disks Wait Adds a delay time after track stepping 152 bee deca ee We eee bee Mees lL FORMAT Utility Command FORMAT is the program that will create the proper information on a diskette so the DOS system can read and write to that diskette A disk to be formatted may be blank or it may have already been formatted Note that if the FORMAT command is to be used in a JCL file the disk to be
73. exists error will occur Otherwise this file will be created on the first available drive Since the extension was specified as KSM the prompts A gt B gt C gt D gt etc will appear one at a time so each of the alphabetic characters may be assigned the character string s they are to represent see the KSM filter This build will terminate after the letter Z or when a lt BREAK gt is used as the first character of a line BUILD SPECIAL 0 This will build a file using the name SPECIAL with no extension Using the with no following characters is the only way to build a file without an extension overriding the default JCL extension Note that the file SPECIAL cannot already exist or an error will be generated BUILD MYJOBS JCL APPEND 64 or eee be Lo BUILD Library Command This command would search all available drives for a file named MYJOBS JCL If not found it would be created on the first available drive If the file already existed any input from the build would be appended onto the end of the file This is the way for example to extend an incomplete JCL file BUILD DISPLAY BLD HEX This command would build a file allowing the use of the packed HEX format The file must not already exist or an error will be generated Information may be entered into this file as hexadecimal bytes and will be stored as a normal ASCII format file This format will allow 127 hex byte representat
74. formats for memory load location and direct disk modify already discussed A library mode patch may not be done from the command line It is also possible to specify more than one line of patch code from the command line This is donc by placing a colon between the lines of patch code PATCH MONITOR CMD 0 X E100 C3 66 00 CD 03 40 This command would patch the file MONITOR CMD creating a load module to replace the six bytes starting at X E100 with the patch code specified in the command line Since there is no filespec used for the patch code the name CLP Command Line Patch will be assigned to the patch code You may use this name if you wish to YANK the patch at a later date However if more than one command line patch is applied only the first one can be yanked PATCH MONITOR CMD 0 O N D01 13 4C D02 3E 66 This command would patch the file MONITOR CMD in two places It uses the direct mode to apply the patches to the file s disk sector 1 relative byte 13 and disk sector 2 relative byte 3E Since the OPTION N paramcter was specified in the command string this D verb patch can be applicd without the verification provided by using the F verb 189 PURGE Library Command PURGE The PURGE command allows for controlled multiple deletes of disk files The syntax is PURGE partspee w wec d parm parm parm d is the mandatory drivespec partspec as described in the DOS glossary wec Wild Card Character
75. formatted must be blank unless the ABS parameter is specified FORMAT generates a DATA disk after formatting DATA disks reserve only two file slots out of the total number of directory slots available SYSTEM disks configured by the BACKUP utility reserve 14 additional directory slots for SYS files For DOS version 5 Model I systems the SYSTEM parameter is used for 5 25 floppy drives to designate cylinder O as single density when the diskette is specified for double density formating This creates a dual density configuration suitable for subsequent use as a booting system disk once the operating system has been moved and the SOLE utility applied The SYSTEM parameter can also be uscd with hard disks to add system directory information to a previously low level formatted hard drive Typing in the format command with no parameters will prompt you for them in the following order If the drivespec disk name or master password were specified on the command line their prompts will not appear Additionally entering any one of the remaining XDEN SIDES CYL or STEP parameters will cause format to use the defaults for the other parameters and you will not be prompted for them Which drive is to be used Diskelle name Master password Single or double density lt S D gt Enter nurnber of sides lt 1 2 gt Nurnber of cylinders Boot strap step rate lt 6 12 20 30 40 gt If you are formatting in drive 0 the following
76. gt Put the DOS Master disk back in drive 0 and press lt ENTER gt Now type in the command BACKUP 0 0 The message Insert SOURCE disk lt ENTER gt will appear on the screen Since your DOS disk is the SOURCE disk simply press lt ENTER gt The message Insert DESTINATION disk lt ENTER gt will now appear on the screen Put the disk you have just formatted into drive 0 and press lt ENTER gt You will be prompted several times to swap the SOURCE and DESTINATION disks until the BACKUP is completed At that point the message Insert SYSTEM disk lt ENTER gt will appear Place the Master in drive 0 and press lt ENTER gt The BACKUP is now complete For multiple drive owners Place a new blank diskette in drive 1 and type in the command DISKCOPY 0 1 tor DOS version 6 QFB 0 1 for DOS version 5 Follow the prompts displayed DOS will now make a duplicate copy of itself on drive 1 MODEL I Backing up the DOSXTRA disk To make a copy of the DOSXTRA disk you must again format a disk Use the same format instructions as for the Master disk except answer the Diskelle name prompt with DOSXTRA To make the backup on a single drive system type in the command BACKUP 0 0 You will now be prompted to swap the source disk the DOSXTRA and the destination to i te a it ns ne ne ec L S DOS User Manual disk the one just formatted until the backup is completed On a multiple drive system give the co
77. gt ECM lt f gt 162 A2 CLR SH lt 2 gt 131 83 CLR G lt F3 gt 163 A3 CLR SH lt 3 gt 132 84 CLR D lt F4 gt ECM lt gt gt 164 A4 CLR SH lt 4 gt 133 85 CLR E 165 AS CLR SH lt 5 gt 134 86 CLR F 166 A6 CLR SH lt 6 gt 135 87 CLR G 167 A7 CLR SH lt 7 gt 136 88 CLR H ECM lt l gt 10 168 A8 CLR SH lt 8 gt 137 89 CLR I SCM CLR lt gt gt 169 AQ CLR SH lt 9 gt 138 8A CLR J SCM CLR lt l gt 170 AA CLR SH lt gt 139 8B CLR K 171 AB 140 8C CLR L 172 AC 141 8D CLR M 173 AD CLR lt gt 142 8E CLR N 174 AE 143 8F CLR O 175 AF 144 90 CLR P 176 BO CLR lt 0 gt 145 91 CLR Q lt sF1 gt ECM lt s gt 177 B1 CLR lt 1 gt 146 92 CLR R lt sF2 gt ECM lt sfl gt 178 B2 CLR lt 2 gt 147 93 CLR S lt sF3 gt 179 B3 CLR lt 3 gt 148 94 CLR T lt sF4 gt ECM lt s gt gt gt 180 B4 CLR lt 4 gt 149 95 CLR U 181 B5 CLR lt 5 gt 150 96 CLR V 182 B6 CLR lt 6 gt 151 97 CLR W 183 B7 CLR lt 7 gt 152 98 CLR X SCM CLR SH lt gt 184 B8 CLR lt 8 gt 153 99 CLR Y SCM CLR SH lt gt 185 B9 CLR lt 9 gt 154 9A CLR Z 186 BA CLR lt gt 155 9B SCM CLR SH lt f gt 187 BB 156 9C 188 BC 157 9D 189 BD CLR SH lt gt 158 9E 190 BE 159 9F 191 BF 260 Character Set Generation DEC 192 E93 194 193 196 Lo 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 on 218 219 220 221 Zek rE E HEX TAG ENTERED CO Cl C2 G3 C4 cS C6 S C8 cy
78. if active 14 For DOS version 6 repeats the last DOS command 261 a a a lL egege ARAA Bad a A a reel ne a el RB A KSM Filter Program KSM KSM FLT allows the use of files containing phrases associated with the unshifted alphabetic keyboard keys to be used as direct keyboard inputs The syntax is SET KS TO KSM FLT Using filespec Enter n V6 FILTER KI KS FILTER KI TO KSM FLT filespec Enter nn V5 filespec Is an existing KSM type file Enter n Isan optional parameter specifying the character to be used as an embedded enter Because the KSM filter uses the lt CLEAR gt key as a special control key the DOS 5 KI DVR program must be set before the KSM filter is applied As shown in the syntax block the SET command is used to install the KSM filter for DOS version 6 the filter is attached to the keyboard device via the FILTER command The FILTER command is used establish the KSM filter for DOS version 5 The KSM program will load up to 26 phrases from the specified file filespec into memory These phrases will be taken as though they were typed in from the keyboard when the lt CLEAR gt key and the specified unshifted alphabetic key are held down together The default file extension for the filespec is KSM To create a KSM file use the BUILD command in the following manner BUILD filename KSM This BULLD command will display the alphabetic keys one at a time and allow you to input your desire
79. is booted When you wish to tum off the debugger and remove the extended debugger module from resident memory use the command 105 DEBUG Library Command DEBUG OFF Exti The debugger will be de activated the extended debugger will be removed provided the memory resident module was the most recent module installed into memory Detailed examples of interaction between the debugger and program modules will be given later in this section Once in the debugger you can return to the DOS Ready prompt with the command G402D lt ENTER gt From the extended debugger the command O lt ENTER gt may be used instead If you entered the debugger from Model VII BASIC with a CMD D a G lt ENTER gt will return you to BASIC Following is a sample display of the DOS version 5 debugger screen PAF OD 2C 1 1P 1 BC 0D 61 gt 79 98 77 23 05 20 F9 C9 71 ES DG 08 38 OF E1 DE 01 04 gt 1A 4D 45 4D 20 53 49 SA 45 00 52 2F 3 20 Ac HL 00 4 gt 01 01 5B 1B OA 00 08 18 09 19 20 20 OB 78 BI AF 00 54 2 H P 1 BC 1 BO gt 29 29 29 29 BS 6F CD BA 51 20 EF 1F CE 81 C9 DE DE 06 Ol gt 09 28 42 FE 19 28 39 FE OA CO D1 77 78 B 28 CF HL 1 00 gt 02 C7 C6 02 FF CB 02 F 10 32 27 20 32 01 C 43 IX 40 15 gt 01 9C 43 DO 9A 00 4B 49 07 C2 FE 31 38 20 44 4F IY 00 00 gt F3 AF C3 74 06 C3 00 40 C3 00 40 E1 E9 C3 OF 06 SP 41 CA gt 52 04 C3 4B DD 03 15 40 SD 45 18 43 3F 3F 4C 00 PC 00 62 gt Bi 20 FB C9
80. is possible to re enable the lt BREAK gt after the AUTO command has finished execution See the SYSTEM BREAK ON command for complete instructions Here are some examples of the use of the AUTO command AUTO BASIC Will write the command BASIC as an automatic key in on the drive 0 diskette replacing any previous auto command From that point on every time you power up or press the reset button with that diskette in drive 0 BASIC will automatically be loaded into memory and invoked An AUTO command takes the place of a keyboard input just as though the command had been typed in and lt ENTER gt had been pressed 48 ke eee ao ie Loo Sa AUTO Library Command AUTO DO INIT JCL 0 After this has been written to the drive 0 disk power up or pressing the reset button will cause the DO file INIT JCL 0 to be invoked which will allow several commands to be invoked automatically see DO command and JCL Note the asterisk immediately preceding the command This is optional when used it will disable the ability of the lt ENTER gt key to halt the auto command The lt BREAK gt key will also be disabled from this point To restore the power up sequence to the normal DOS Ready type AUTO This will eliminate any stored automatic key in by removing it from its storage p ace on the disk If a disk has an active auto command it will be carried over to the destination disk when doing a mirror image backup
81. listings only and will be ignored if the HEX parameter is specified Parameter ASCII8 This parameter will allow all 8 bits of each character to be displayed during an ASCII list Normally any character above X 7F decimal 127 will have the high bit reset The ASCHI8 parameter will be useful if you wish to see graphics characters in a file Parameter NUM NUM will number the lines of the file as they are sent to the video display or printer during an ASCH list Line numbers will start with one 1 and be in the format 00001 Lines are determined by the occurrence of a carriage return Line feed characters will not generate a new line number Parameter LINE The LINE parameter is used with ASCII files It will start the listing with the specified line of the file Lines are determined by the occurrence of a carriage retum character in the file An example of the proper syntax would be LIST TESTFILE TXT LINE 14 This would list the ASCII file TES TFILE TXT starting with the line of the file after the 13th carriage retum Important The NUM and LINE parameters will always be ignored if the HEX parameter is specified Parameter HEX The HEX parameter will cause the file to be listed in the following format 175 LIST Library Command aaaadbb cc co c CC CO CO CO ee ce ce co ce CO co oee ddddddd dddddddd aaaa represents the current logical record of the file in hex notation starting with record 0 repre
82. marker of the file to be updated to reflect these changes lt R gt nnon Positions to record X nnnn provided record X nnnn exists in the file If the record does not exist an will appear in the command buffer After entering lt R gt a box will appear below the record number display box The input for the record number to retrieve will be taken in this box Hex digits 0 F must be entered as any other characters will be ignored You may press lt BREAK gt to cancel this command The user may enter the record number without using the standard four digit X nnnn format Simply type in the record number and press lt ENTER gt For example if the desired record number is X 0021 type lt R gt lt 2 gt lt 1 gt lt ENTER gt To position to record X 0007 type lt R gt lt 7 gt lt ENTER gt The position of the relative byte cursors will remain unchanged after the new record is retrieved lt Z gt Points the cursors to the next Type byte X 01 X 02 X05 X 07 X 10 X IF of a Load Module File This feature is designed to allow the user to ZIP through machine language files quickly Place the cursors on a Type byte and press lt Z gt After this has been done the cursors will be positioned over the next Type byte Encountering a X 02 will terminate a lt Z gt ip Any string searching address locating or address calculating will disable an active lt Z gt ip FED Modifica
83. memory for the WORD specified with dddd entered in LSB MSB format The search will start at memory location aaaa lf aaaa is not specified the current memory modification address will be used If dddd is not specified the last word given in a previous W command will be used The memory display will automatically be set to show the address where dddd was located with the vertical bars one byte before the requested word Command X Cancel This command will return the display to the normal register display mode 13 aah DEBUG Library Command Disk Read Write Utility The command syntax is drive cylinder sector op address count op is the single character operation code R for Read W for Write for a Directory Write address is the starting address in memory where the information read from the disk will be placed or where information written to the disk will be taken from count specifies the number of sectors to read or write CAUTION Be sure to log in the disk to be accessed with either the LOG or DEVICE commands before using this option If the disk will not log in properly insert another disk of the same density and number of tracks and log that disk instead If the cylinder is not specified the directory track will be used If the number of sectors is not specified a full cylinder will be read If the Starting sector is not specified sector O will be the default If an error is encountere
84. not specified the LRL of this file will be 256 CREATE GOOD DAT REC 50 This will create a file named GOOD DAT on the first available drive There will be space taken for 50 records of 256 bytes each since the default LRL is 256 CREATE SMALL FIL 1 SIZE 1 100 Mis 2 ieee ice Le ods Leos comer L CREATE Library Command This command will create a file SMALL FIL on drive 1 and take 1 024 bytes of space for the file in actuality one granule will be taken as this is the smallest unit of allocation the system can deal with It is acceptable to create a file larger than it already exists This is the way that you would permanently assign additional space to a file Once a file is created any attempt to create it smaller will not be allowed For example a file named TEST DAT was created with space for 100 records and a LRL of 256 This file will take up approximately 25K of space on the disk As long as no records are written to the file trying to create the file sinaller will merely be ignored Once records have been written to the file any attempt to create the file smaller than the space used by the records will give a File exists larger error For example 50 records have been written to the fite and are using approximately 12 5K of space Trying to create the fife to a size of 10K will show the error message and the file will be untouched Trying to create the file to some size between 12 5K and 25K wi
85. on It can be any number 0 through 7 depending on the number of drives in your system These four parts comprise the complete file specification which will be referred to as a filespec DOS organization and files DOS is organized into different groups of files The first group is the SYSTEM files containing the necessary information to control the disk drives and your other devices There are special system files known as the LIBRARY They contain the programs most commonly used to manipulate your files and devices Another group is known as the UTILITY files These provide added means of handling your program 4 Cee eee keera ea i Introduction to DOS and data files Both the library commands and utility commands will be listed alphabetically in this manual for your convenience The file group containing DRIVER and FILTER files gives added flexibility to your system devices There is a LANGUAGES section containing Job Control Language which is a very powerful batch processing language Usually provided on your DOS disk is BASIC which is an extension of the BASIC language provided in the ROM Model I II or complete disk BASIC Model 4 Documentation for BASIC is not provided in this reference manual a separate reference manual for BASIC is available There are two types of disks that can be used with DOS The first type is called a SYSTEM DISK Th
86. or reset for the time This prompt may be enabled and disabled with the SYSTEM TIME library command The clock function is normally controlled by hardware circuits in the expansion interface Model I or by a signal developed from the AC power line Models HI and 4 This time is not an actual real time clock as the clock referred to is used by many different software and hardware devices Certain system operations require that the clock be turned off altogether You are advised not to depend on the clock for constantly accurate time and date information but only as a relative time of day indicator A hardware clock option us useful for keeping accurate time Issuing a TIME command with no parameters will display the current setting of the clock The clock will be reset to 00 00 00 every time you power up press the reset button or issue a BOOT library command To set the clock use the command TIME hh mm ss specifying the hours minutes and seconds desired with the seconds being optional The latest time acceptable is 23 59 59 as the clock will always run in the 24 hour mode The time lag between pressing the lt ENTER gt key and the time that will actually be set on the clock will be approximately two seconds the time needed to invoke the TIME command It is usually best to type in the command TIME and then the time plus several seconds after the correct 245 TIME Library Command time Wait for seconds 2 to come up
87. or to generate characters above X 7F the BUILD HEX command will accomplish this i It is not absolutely necessary to use the BUILD command with the KSM file extension to create the KSM files Any file in ASCII format can be used by the KSM FLT program If you wish to use the BUILD command without the KSM extension a BASIC program or a word processor to create the KSM file observe the TO OWINE format When the file is read in by the KSM program it is stored in memory ac cording to lines This means that all characters up to the first carriage re turn X OD will be assigned to the letter lt A gt all characters up to the next carriage return to the letter lt B gt etc If a key is to be skipped or left unde fincd a carriage return must be inserted for that character Remember that the character specified with the ENTER parameter default is the semi 263 _ KSM Filter Program colon will be translated into an lt ENTER gt by the KSM FLT program Following are some examples of the KSM function in the DOS command mode A gt DIR 0 This string would appear when the lt CLEAR gt and lt A gt keys were pressed together The command DIR 0 would be shown but would not be acted upon until the lt ENTER gt key was pressed A gt DIR 0 This is the same as the last example except the DIR 0 command would be executed immediately as an lt ENTER gt was the last character of the phrase represented
88. overlay is needed to dynamically allocate file space used when writing files It must be on your working SYSTEM diskettes SYS9 SYS p This overlay contains the routines necessary to service the extended debugging commands avatlable after a DEBUG EXT is performed This overlay may be purged if you will not need the extended debugging commands while running your application In addition if you purge SYSS SYS then keeping SYS9 SYS would serve no useful purpose SYS10 SYS ne This system overlay contains the procedures necessary to service the request to delete a file It should remain on your working SYSTEM diskettes SYS11 SYS iG This overlay contains all of the procedures necessary to perform the Job Control Language execution phase You may remove this overlay from your working disks if you do not intend to invoke any JCL functions If SYS6 SYS has been purged containing the DO command keeping this overlay would serve no purpose SYS12 SYS ne This overlay contains the routines to service the DODIR and RAMDIR directory vectors These routines are used by the MiniDOS filter and may also be used by other applications programs that provide a directory display a SYS1I3 SYS This DOS version 6 overlay is provided as a base for copying an Immediate Execution Program IEP 21 BACKUP CMDFILE COMM CONV DATECONV DISKCOPY DOS HLP FORMAT HELP HITAPE LOG PATCH REPAIR SOLE L S DOS User Ma
89. parameter is specified any form feed determined by the PAGE and LINES parameters will be sent as an X OC character rather than a series of linefeeds If you use this parameter be sure your printer will recognize the X 0C character INDENT This parameter sets the number of spaces a line is to be indented if the line length exceeds CHARS characters The default value for this parameter is zero 0 LINES This parameter sets the number of lines that will be 275 MARGIN PAGE PORT SLINE n TAB XLATE 276 ee er ee FORMS amp PR Filter Programs printed on each page It may not exceed the PAGE parameter and if not specified it will default to the PAGE parameter of 66 This parameter sets the width of the left margin It is especially useful for printers with fixed position tractors This parameter sets the physical page size in lines It should be set to the particular form size you are printing on 66 for normal printer paper 6 for mailing labels etc The default value is 66 lines per page On the Model I this parameter changes printer output from the normal memory mapped location to a user specified port Any port between 1 and 255 may be specified The allowable values are 0 or 1 A zero will set the page length to 66 lines per page and the initial line count to 0 matching Model I conventions A one will set the fines per page to 67 and the initial line count to 1 matching Model III conv
90. parameter will show you each file before it is backed up including the file s date and mod flag status You may tell backup to copy the file by pressing the lt Y gt key Pressing lt N gt or lt ENTER gt will bypass the file and show you the next Pressing the lt C gt key will copy the current file and shut off the query function All files from that point on will automatically be copied The use of partspecs partspecs not partspecs and the wec wildcard character will let you choose files based on their filename and extension You may use these in combination with any of the previously mentioned parameters 56 iow L bens Sees eae BACKUP Utility Command Examples of backup commands Following are some examples and descriptions of the backup command Please note that in all examples the source disk s master password will be asked for if it is other than PASSWORD and is not specified with the MPW parameter If the Q parameter is specified the file s mod date and mod flag will be shown along with the filespec BACKUP 0 1 This command will attempt a mirror image backup using drive 0 as the source drive and drive 1 as the destination drive If the drives are differently configured a backup reconstruct will be invoked Ail files will be moved from drive 0 to drive 1 with the ee a of ea and BOOT SYS if a reconstruct is invoked BACKUP 0 1 The wee in this command will cause a backup by class
91. produce the following If the evaluation is true F include these lines END If the evaluation is false I F ignore these lines END An alternative to a false statement F include these lines ELSE include these lines END As might be apparent the IF macro by itself does not determine the truth or falseness of the block There must be something that the LF can test to dctermine a true or false condition Since our definition of a token de scribed one of its uses as a true or false switch that something is a token 295 Batch Processing Job Control Language A real example of a conditional block would be F drive Display this execulion comment END The token in this example is drive The IF wilt test whether or not drive is true or false Assume that this block of lines ts contained in a file called TEST JCL Refer to the three following DO command examples 1 DO TEST drive 2 DO TEST DRIVE 3 DO TEST Examples 1 and 2 would both set the token drive to be true These two examples again emphasize an important point there is no difference between upper and lower case for any JCL macro token or label Example 3 would set the token drive to be false From these examples you can see how easy it is do set a token true or false e To seta token true simply specify it on the DO command line e To set a token false do NOT specify it on the DO command lin
92. program simply by specifying different values for the C and P1 tokens This example brings out another important point the number of characters in the replacement string can be less than equal to or greater than the length of the token name in the replacement field between the signs To reduce the number of tokens needed on the DO command line and to increase the program options at the same time the ASSIGN macro can be used as follows TEST JCL ASSIGN c 80 ASSIGN pl program JAF num2 J ASSIGN c 132 ASSIGN pl program2 END 306 fw aes ber Cee Dee oe be Batch Processing Job Control Language forms chars C basic run P 1 STOP In this example the DO command would not have to specify any tokens if the default of the 80 character printer filter and PROGRAMI were desired Otherwise specifying NUM2 would override the defaults The values of C and Pi would automatically be set with the ASSIGN tokens inside the JAF conditional block Another very practical use of the substitution field feature is for replacing drive specifications The following example shows how a FORMAT and BACKUP JCL file could be structured FB JCL FORMAT with BACKUP PAUSE insert disk to format in drive D format D name datal q n ABS backup S D mod EXIT In this example the token D could be used to represent the destination drivespec and the token S the source drivesp
93. required matching the default is to not require F verb patch lines The LIST command with the HEX parameter can be used to display a file showing the record number and the offset byte This is an easy way to find the location in the file you wish to patch Be aware that the first record in a file will be record 0 not record 1 DOS version 5 users may also use the FED utility to examine a file in hexadecimal mode display inn This format is the indicator that the patch code that follows will be to either the SYS6 SYS SYS7 SYS or SYS8 SYS V6 library command module The Lnn represents the binary coded location of the desired overlay in the SYS module The patch code that follows will be in either the X nnnn or Drr bb format YANK The patch YANK parameter will allow you to remove patches applied with the X nnnn format The following rules will be in effect e The filespec of the patch to YANK must be identical to the filespec used when the patch was applied e If YANK is used without a filespec no patch will be removed 187 i a A RR RR a aeaa aa a p ao A ana aan RRA AY SI a ve LP er ee ee re ti a eee eee PATCH Utility Command e Do not patch a file more than once using the same filespec for the patch file It will be impossible to YANK the second patch from the file Here are some examples that will show the different patch formats PATCH BACKUP CMD 0 USING SPECIAL FIX 1 P
94. return you to the DOS ready prompt For Model 4 use type lt O gt lt ENTER gt to exit the debugger Command H Hex Mode or Hexadecimal Modify 109 DEBUG Library Command This command sets the display to show hexadecimal format This is the format used in the earlier debug example display DOS version 6 hexadecimal entry is performed as noted for the M command Command I Single Step Execution The command syntax is This command causes the debugger to invoke the command at PC and single step to the next instruction This command is identical to the C command except that any CALLS encountered will not automatically be invoked in full they must be stepped through instruction by instruction Any jump or call instruction encountered must have its destination in RAM or the I command will be ignored Command J Jump Byte The command syntax is J This command will Jump over the next byte in effect incrementing PC by l Command L Locate Byte The command syntax is Laaaa dd lt ENTER gt This command will locate the first occurrence of the byte dd starting the search at address aaaa If aaaa is not specified the current memory modification address will be used If dd is not specified the last byte given in a previous L command will be used Command M Memory Modify The command syntax is Maaaa lt SPACE gt This Model VHI command will allow modification of a specified memory address aaaa If th
95. string value following it when using the ASSIGN macro such as ASSIGN ALL EVERYONE In any of the previous examples that used the SET macro the ASSIGN macro could have been substituted The character string value assigned to the token would have no effect on the JCL logic The important fact would be that ASSIGN also sets the token true as shown in the next example 303 Batch Processing Job Control Language TEST JCL TEST JCL F A F A SET P1 ASSIGN P1 PROGRAM BAS SET KI ASSIGN KI ALL SET PR ASSIGN PR 80 JEND JEND Logically speaking these two examples are identical If the token A is true the tokens Pl KI and PR will all be set to true Additionally the ASSIGN macro example will assign character string values to the tokens However these character string values will have no effect on the logical value i COMMENT QUIT So far the only method described for testing and debugging a JCL file has been to use the compile only DO command and then list the resultant SYSTEM JCL file The COMMENT and the QUIT are provided to give you run time debugging Unlike execution comments the compilation comments are not written to the SYSTEM JCL file Rather they are displayed on the screen immediately as encountered when the compiling is done Thus they can act as a visual status log of the compile The QUIT macro is used to abort the compiling if an invalid condition is detected
96. that already exist on the destination disk Unless you specify QUERY NO CONV will ask you before each file is moved onto the destination disk You should answer the prompt lt Y gt to move the file or press lt N gt or lt ENTER gt to bypass it You may specify a filespec or partspec to be used to determine which files to move Wildcard characters are also acceptable Refer to the following examples CONV 2 1 This example will allow you to move all files from drive 2 onto drive 1 You will be asked before each file is moved If the file already exists on drive 1 you will be asked again before it is copied over CONV 1 0 VIS Q N This example will move all visible files from drive 1 onto drive 0 You will not be asked before each file is moved CONV BAS 2 0 NEW This example will move only those files with the extension BAS from drive 2 to drive 0 Because the NEW parameter was specified only those files that do not already exist on drive 0 will be moved CONV DATA 1 2 OLD This example will move those files that have the characters DATA as the fourth through seventh letters in their file name You will be asked before each file is moved and only those files that already exist on drive 2 will be considered 90 Lo y COPY Library Command COPY Copies data from one file or device to another file or device The syntax is 3 COPY filespecl TO filespec2 parispec devspec Lri nnn
97. that the overall efficiency of the program may be improved by activating the DOS spooler The size of the program and the available free memory and disk space will determine the amount of spooling available for your needs Parameters PAUSE RESUME and CLEAR While a device s output is being spooled and despooled the despooling operation may be temporarily suspended by using the PAUSE parameter Regardless of the device being spooled all you need enter to suspend despooling is SPOOL P Note that the device s output continues to be spooled to memory and disk it is the despooling to the printer which is suspended Once despooling is suspended it may be resumed by entering SPOOL R If you need to clear out any spooled text remaining in the spool buffers use SPOOL C The buffered text remaining will then be lost 217 SPOOL Library Command Caution The spool file on disk will remain open as long as the spooler is active Do not delete this file or remove the diskette without first closing the file You will not be allowed to do a SYSGEN if the spooler is active The file may be closed by turning the spooled device OFF The proper syntax is SPOOL devspec OFF SPOOL devspec N Either of these two commands will turn off the spooler and close the associated disk file Additionally any other filtering linking setting or routing done to PR will be reset Please note that the disk file will not be closed by re
98. to 3 The following table lists the different stepping rates in ms milliseconds for 8 and 5 25 and 3 5 drives Do not select a step rate faster than your drive can handle If in doubt contact the drive manufacturer 229 SYSTEM Library Command n 8 floppy steprate 5 25 floppy step rate 0 3 ms 6 ms j 6 ms 12 ms 2 10 ms 20 ms 3 15 20 ms 30 40 ms The 15 20 and 30 40 are dependent on whether you are using a double single density disk controller chip Version 6 Model 4 and version 5 Model HI owners will have the 15ms and 30ms step rate while Model I interface owners will have the 20ms and 40ms step rate The fastest step rate for the Model I will be 12ms when using single density disks Using a double density board in the Model I will provide the 6ms and 30ms step rates SYSTEM DRIVE d DRIVER filespec To access the disk drives DOS will use information stored in memory in the Drive Code Table DCT No special configuration should have to be done unless drives other than 3 5 and 5 25 floppy drives are used To configure the system for other drive types it will be necessary to use this SYSTEM command The floppy DCT program supplied MOD1I DCT MOD3 DCT LX 80 MAX 80 or FLOPPY DCT will allow you to change the logical drive numbers for your floppy drives This may be desirable when running hard disk systems SYSTEM DRIVE d WP sw This command will allow you to software write protect any or all dr
99. to be used in blocks of 1K 1024 bytes IK is automatically used OFF Tums off the spooler and resets devspec Pause Allows you to temporarily suspend despooling Resume Allows you to continue despooling after a pause Model I HI Note For proper SPOOL operation the KIIDVR program must have been set before turning on the spooler 213 SPOOL Library Command When using the SPOOL command with a serial printer you must use the following steps for proper operation First SET PR to the serial driver FILTER PR with the FORMS or PR filter then turn on the spooler The SPOOL command will establish a first in first out FIFO buffer for a specified device All output sent to the device will be placed in an output buffer consisting of memory and or disk buffers and will be sent to the device whenever that device is available to accept this data The spooler will free up the memory it uses when turned off provided the spooler was the most recent module installed If the memory it used was trapped by a subsequent module s installation the spooler will re use its previous memory allocation and inhibit alteration of its previous memory and disk parameters The minimum amount of memory required by the SPOOL command is 1K 1024 bytes for the memory buffer The filespec is optional and if no disk buffers are required it is possible to spool strictly to memory If disk space is requested additional memory will be used to map the s
100. using the same partspec and or parameters you intend to use with the BACKUP 59 BOOT Library Command BOOT This command causes the disk in drive 0 to be booted into the system It has the same effect as pushing the reset button or a power up condition The syntax is BOOT lt CLEAR gt lt gt gt lt ENTER gt lt D gt Holding down the indicated key during the BOOT will result in the following actions lt CLEAR gt No sysgened configuration will take place lt ENTER gt No breakable AUTO commands will be done lt D gt The system debugger will automatically be entered Note that no sysgened configuration will be loaded For the Model III only the video driver will be the ROM driver not the normal DOS driver By typing in the BOOT command the DOS system disk in drive 0 is booted back into the system All devices will be returned to their normal power up configuration as if the system had been turned off and then turned on again Any required filtering linking routing or setting of the SYSTEM command parameters must be done again at this point unless a SYSTEM config file has been generated on drive 0 by the use of SYSTEM SYSGEN If the system has been sysgened the user configuration will be loaded and invoked at this time and any AUTO command will be done If you wish to depress a BOOT over ride key you must do so iinmediately after the lt ENTER gt following the time entry If the time prompt has
101. will protect against your inadvertant exit without explicitly saving an open receive file Usage Tips Some TRS 80 bulletin board systems permit the reception of graphics characters In order to be able to accept these graphics the RS 232 driver will have had to be initialized at 8 Bit word length and the 8 Bit mode in COMM will have to be used lt CLEAR gt lt SH gt lt gt clon by lt CLEAR gt lt gt The beginning COMM user may find it useful to make up a tape containing each key s function and place the tape directly above the keys Avery or Pres A Ply self adhesive removable labels may be used for this purpose Any other pressure sensitive label will suffice The labels can even be typed to provide a neater appearance Your keys should be labeled as follows SHIFTED Communicating With Other Computers Two examples will be given to show how COMM can be used to commu nicate with other computers The first example will describe operations when communicating with a main frame The second example will describe how COMM can be used to communicate between two TRS 80 s When communicating with a main frame computer it will not generally be necessary to change the default device or function settings when entering COMM Most main frames operate in the host mode and will provide echo functions for you You must be sure however to have 84 fee ees oe ee oon Ce L Lo lt COMM Communications Utility Com
102. with the cursor pointing at relative EDY te X FF i The lt L gt command allows the user to find load address X nnnn in a load module file The Locate command starts its search at record X 0000 rather than at the current cursor position If the address is located the record containing the byte at that load address will be displayed and the cursors will be positioned over this byte If the address is not located an error message will be displayed and you will be prompted to press lt ENTER gt to continue After lt ENTER gt is pressed the record which was in the edit buffer prior to issuing the lt L gt command will be retrieved and the position of the cursors will be unaffected If a Locate is performed on a non load module file the appropriate error message will be displayed The Go command may also be used in conjunction with the lt L gt ca to locate multiple occurrences of the same load address FED Output Commands lt D gt List the file to the printer in the same format as the Print command The lt D gt command will print all records in the file starting from the current record number all records will be read in from the disk To halt the printing prior to its completion depress the lt BREAK gt key After the printing has been completed or terminated the record which was in the 145 FED Utility Command edit buffer prior to printing will be retrieved from disk and stored in the edit b
103. you wish to send a screen display to a disk file there are some simple ways to accomplish this You can route the printer PR to a disk file and then link DO to PR This will send all screen displays including errors backspace characters etc to the printer which is routed to a file so the output will really go to the disk You could also enable the screen print function with the KI DVR program and route the printer to a disk file By pressing the lt SHIFT gt lt gt DOS version 5 or lt CTRL gt and the lt gt keys DOS version 6 the current screen display will be sent to the printer and actually be written to a disk file The DO may also be linked to a disk file using a phantom user device as noted under the LINK command PR The Line Printer The PR device is the line printer This device may be set to other drivers or routed to disk files very easily in the DOS system A printer filter program is supplied on your DOS Master diskette and is called either FORMS FLT or PR FLT This program will allow you to set page size line length line indent on wrap around and many other parameters The operation of this driver routine is detailed in the DRIVERS amp FILTERS section of the manual 28 fas ete ee fie e EE eo DOS SYSTEM DEVICES AND DISK DRIVES For serial printer owners the supplied serial driver program DOS version 5 RS232 DVR COM DVR DOS version 6 should enable you to inte
104. your DOS disk for this purpose Please note that the L COMM CMD communications program examples also use CL as its RS 232 link see the L COMM utility program Whenever I O is needed via the RS 232 interface the CL will provide it The RS 232 driver program allows CL to interface between the DOS system and external devices such as a serial line printer an acoustic cou pler commonly called a modem a hard wired telephone data set a paper tape reader etc Please refer to the DEVICE DRIVER section for a com plete description of the allowable configurations of the RS 232 hardware DOS even provides a method to put your computer into a host mode for access by a remote terminal To do this set CL to the serial driver pro gram It may be necessary to use SETCOM to specify the RS 232 word parameter as WORD 8 and the parity parameter as PARITY OFP depending on the terminal you are using Then issue the following commands 30 e 8 mo cm cee au R ae i odee S Se Ree Ubi ee Cee Deze DOS SYSTEM DEVICES AND DISK DRIVES LINK KI CL LINK DO CL This will logically connect the display and keyboard to the serial interface and allow inputs to be taken from and output to be sent to a remote station via the serial hardware DOS disk drive access Your DOS master diskette comes configured to access 3 5 or 5 25 floppy disk drives The initial default drive configuration comes on the master
105. 101 changing them to the value of WORD The following would be displayed after this command X El00 57600 X 0000 gt X 3E0A High X E000 All of the display is identical to the last example except the contents of the WORD changed will be shown represented in the display as XXXX MEMORY ADD X E100 BYTE X 0D 182 i KEM MEMORY Utility Command This command will change the BYTE of memory at the specified address X E100 to X 0D The display after executing this command would be All of the display ts tdentical to the last example except for the modified BYTE change shown here with the XX MEMORY GO xX E000 This command would transfer control to memory address X E000 Note that the GO parameter may not be abbreviated 183 PATCH Utility Command PATCH The PATCH utility is used to make minor changes or repairs to existing program or data files The syntax of the PATCH utility is PATCH filespec CMD Using filespec2 FIX parms PATCH filespec USING information in patch format filespecl Any valid filespec The default extension will be CMD filespec2 Any valid filespec for a PATCH format file The default extension will be FIX Option N Match F records before installing D patch OFF Remove Nulifies the effects of a previous D amp F type patch Yank Will remove the PATCH specified by filespec2 from filespecl The PATCH to remove must have been in th
106. 128 character mode has all of the same commands as the 256 character mode The display is a window of the 256 byte record and 128 bytes will be displayed By moving the cursors usually with the lt f gt and lt l gt arrows you will notice a scrolling effect The ASCII display will be at the top of the screen instead of the 16 leftmost columns The current record number is displayed in decimal as well as hexadecimal All inputs will be taken horizontally instead of vertically ASCII and hex search inputs will allow 30 characters instead of 6 147 UT NO Men a a e ae aaa a ee a I A NT A RA A a rR e er rr eaaa SS el eee eee Eo mev ii eae s es a rc No a IE ac ic maa a a a re Til FED Utility Command SAMPLE lt P gt COMMAND OUTPUT SPACE CHD DRIVE 1 RECORD 22 x 0016 0123456789ABCDEF BYTE 00 01 02 03 04 AS 06 07 08 09 OA OB OC OD OF OF ett oe os ee ee ee G a lt 2 2 D lt 00 gt 3C 09 32 3C 7F 3A 04 7F 3C 32 04 7F C3 FG 44 AS GAME OVER PLAYER lt 10 gt 47 41 4D 45 20 4F 6 45 52 20 50 4c 41 59 45 52 lt gt NEM HIGH SCO lt 20 gt 20 20 JE 48 45 51 20 48 49 47 48 20 53 43 4F REEN TER NAME lt 30 gt 52 45 45 48 01 00 B4 97 54 45 52 20 4E 41 4D 45 I lt 40 gt 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 21 c4 Wr Mura Mot lt 50 gt 57 60 7F CD Fl 57 77 3A 61 7F CD F7 1 77 3A la Wwb Ww b lt 60 gt 61 cp amp t 51 11 3A 62 7F CD F7 57 11 3A 62 7F j w 0 lt 70 gt CD 57 77
107. 190 REMOYE and KIE ean en ar a aai 193 Deleting files 193 Deleting devices 194 RENAME torosus eee aei 195 REPAIR er anc eee Bee a aa a 197 REPAIR functions 198 RESE Uae eects a N a died eeivasbetlee 199 RESET of a file 199 Single device RESET 200 Global RESET l 201 ROUTE saasaa a r untsaiesieceiuewee 202 RUN ooer a a 205 S1 A SE E EE E A TE S TAEA EE A E EAE E 207 SEITCOM oA E SENA 209 vii fe PN A Ag a ET A A I al aaaa eee vill L S DOS User Manual Parameter devpec Parameter filespec Parameter MEM Parameter DISK Parameter BANK Parameters PAUSE RESUME and CLEAR SYSTEM ALIVE switch SYSTEM AMPM V6 SYSTEM BASIC2 V5 SYSTEM BLINK aaaa SYSTEM BREAK switch SYSTEM BSTEP n SYSTEM DATE switch SYSTEM DRIVE d parm parm SYSTEM DRIVE d DRIVER filespec SYSTEM DRIVE d WP sw SYSTEM FAST amp SYSTEM SLOW SYSTEM GRAPHIC SYSTEM HERTZSIHERTZ6 SYSTEM PRTIME ONIOFF SYSTEM SVC V5 SYSTEM SW AP s DRIVE d SYSTEM S YSGEN ONIOFF DRIVE d SYSTEM SYSRES n l SYSTEM SYSTEM n SYSTEM TIME switch SYSTEM TRACE ONIOFF SYSTEM TYPE switch SYSTEM UPDATE switch V5 Summary of editing commands Invoking TED Text entry modes Loading a text file Entering text Cursor positioning manipulations SSS SHEFSSHSSSESSHSOSCHOSSEFSESSHFE SEES OHAS SEDER OSES SEPE SCH DHEBEHSOST SELECT SEEES SFSESSSSSF SSE FF SHSFSHSSCSSFSKSEHFE SSH SH SSFHSHSSSLSSHESSESESSH
108. 32 33 52 114 152 326 D DAM 198 326 Data Address Mark 114 197 326 DATA disk 5 51 121 DATE 102 224 246 date change 233 date prompt 54 103 date prompt boot 224 date prompt disabling 102 date prompt enabling or disabling 224 DATECONY 22 104 dates acceptable range of 102 DCB 26 326 DCT 17 24 31 179 226 326 deallocation of space 99 DEBUG 105 220 270 280 debugger 20 60 61 105 debugging programs 232 delay 32 225 delaying JCL execution 285 density 32 51 116 326 328 DEVICE 114 115 179 194 200 203 221 231 device 7 17 26 60 118 149 3226 Device Control Block 326 device reset 199 device renaming 195 devices deleting 193 devspec 11 16 95 326 DIR 53 55 59 66 120 160 222 DIR SYS 5 19 57 191 197 267 directory 4 120 152 179 197 268 326 directory cylinder 118 disk drives 15 31 115 disk drives restoring 228 disk drives sleeping disk formats 35 disk I O reliability 248 333 AE A a ES ee SSS ee TE AS AULT a lt As At A tt em mm ms me FLO a SE Pe Oe ag ENG ET ee Fo oe Ee Te pe Ss 6 er en eS L S DOS User Manual disk name 8 46 disk operation optimum 31 DISKCOPY 22 128 212 displaying control characters 82 DO 49 62 131 279 292 DOS command repeating 261 272 DOS commands 2 DOS BLP 22 163 DOSPLUS 197 double density 3 32 89 155 254 267 322 326 doub
109. 3L 00 06 3A EC 37 3C FE 02 D2 00 00 3E04 gt 20 34 30 20 31 35 20 3D 3E 20 20 30 3L 20 39 03 3E14 gt 20 34 33 20 30 30 20 39 01 20 30 30 20 34 02 20 3E24 gt 34 39 20 20 30 37 20 03 32 20 06 05 20 33 31 20 3834 gt 33 0 20 32 30 20 34 34 20 34 06 20 09 19 20 3D The debug display contains information about the Z 80 microprocessor registers The DOS 6 version will simultaneously display the ASCII equivalents of displayable characters in the right hand portion of the screen The display is set up in the following manner The register pairs are shown along the left side of the display from top to bottom The current contents of each register pair is shown immediately to the right of the register labels _ 106 Lee Cer ee ere oa as T L n DEBUG Library Command The AF and AF pairs are followed by the current status of the flag registers to the right of the register contents The other register pairs will be followed by the contents of the 16 bytes of memory they are pointing to The PC register will show the memory address of the next instruction to be invoked The display to the right of that address shows the contents of that address to that address X OF The bottoin four lines of the screen show the contents of the memory locations indicated by the address at the left of each line Refer to the list of debug commands for information on use of the debugger Note that in all examples
110. 57 337 agp ene Se VRET ee ee ee ee ee ae ee eee a Sy ee ee ae ropa sl ae GA er a tre Kad ol L S DOS User Manual SETTIME 246 single density 32 267 326 sleep 286 SLOW 119 227 249 SMOOTH 119 228 SOLE 22 153 211 sound port 287 320 speeding up disk I O 230 SPL 18 215 SPOOL 61 74 119 201 213 256 325 spooling pausing 217 spooling resuming 213 spooling suspending 213 STATIC ELECTRICITY 40 STEP 225 step rate 8 32 33 117 154 step rate boot 224 step rate changing 225 SubDISK 123 substitution fields 306 suspending JCL execution 285 SVC 229 256 SWAP 229 switch 330 SYS 18 SYSO SYS 19 54 269 SYS1 SYS 19 SYSLO SYS 21 SYSLISYS 21 SYS12 SYS 21 SYSI3 SYS 13 21 SYS2 SYS 19 231 SYS3 SYS 19 231 SYS4 SYS 20 SYSS SYS 20 21 SYS6 SYS 20 21 169 187 SYS7 SYS 20 169 187 SYS8 SYS 21 169 187 SYSI SYS 21 SYSGEN 54 118 167 171 218 219 229 325 338 SYSRES 55 59 96 119 230 SYSTEM 118 221 229 231 257 system devices 194 SYSTEM disk 5 51 121 153 SYSTEM diskette 19 97 system drive switching 231 system files 121 system files moving 91 system information sector 155 197 system modules 96 SYSTEM JCL 131 133 292 296 312 315 T tab expansion 159 173 177 274 tape files 67 TAPE100 234 TED 23 236 terminal program 74 text editor 236 TIME 231 245 286 291
111. 7 257 graphics 63 graphics characters 84 119 175 228 257 H half duplex 77 80 hard disk system 16 hard drive 118 hardware clock 103 245 head number 116 HELP 22 163 HERTZ5 228 HERTZ6 228 hex digit 65 HIGHS 35 180 199 201 202 207 220 221 254 328 HITAPE 22 69 167 host mode 30 I iO 328 I O driver memory 180 268 IEP 13 21 Immediate Execution Program 13 21 initial line count 276 INKEYS 321 interrupt 31 61 217 228 328 invisible 43 55 57 invisible files 121 J JBL 17 255 JCL 2 18 52 62 63 125 131 153 156 219 229 279 328 JCL and BASIC 318 JCL compile only 299 JCL conditional block 303 JCL execution blocks 288 JCL expression compound 313 JCL file terminating 284 JCL files merging 309 JCL labels 294 310 JCL message string 287 JCL procedure libraries 310 JCL compiled 293 JCL using a pound sign in 308 JKL 119 JL 23 Job Control Language 21 wy 279 Job Log 29 103 255 K key repeat 257 keyboard 14 27 35 42 61 150 249 279 290 keyboard chart 259 keyboard debounce 72 keystroke multiplication 262 keyword 164 KI 23 119 KI DVR 74 229 298 26 KILL 121 168 193 200 270 KSM 18 23 62 119 149 150 256 261 262 328 335 L S DOS User Manual LCOMM 61 74 256 328 LIB 169 library 1 25 187 328 library command 185 library modules 230 line feed
112. AR A DEEE BCI E Y AER AAE PTET r ee AES LE EE SORT EIN TOES e IC BG SMC TL EAB IL AE IRE RE AE OS a A A ETA E E S EE anaa E Ree A ASCII Character DEC HEX TAG ENTERED BY DEC HEX TAG ENTERED BY 0 00 NUL CTL lt gt 32 20 SPA lt SPACE gt 1 01 SOH CTL lt A gt 33 21 SH lt L gt 2 02 STX CTL lt B gt 34 22 SH lt 2 3 03 ETX CTL lt C gt a5 23 SH lt 3 gt 4 04 EOT CTL lt D gt 36 24 SH lt 4 gt 5 05 ENQ CTL lt E gt 37 25 SH lt 5 gt 6 06 ACK CTL lt F gt 38 26 amp SH lt 6 gt 7 07 BEL CTL lt G gt 39 27 SH lt 7 gt 8 08 BS CTL lt H gt 1 40 28 SH lt 8 gt 9 09 HT CTL lt I gt 2 41 29 SH lt 9 gt 10 OA LF CTL lt J gt 3 42 2A SH lt gt 11 OB VT CTL lt K gt 43 2B SH lt gt 12 0C FF CTL lt L gt 44 2C j Li Be 13 OD CR CTL lt M gt 4 45 2D lt gt 14 OF SO CTL lt N gt 46 2E f a gt 15 OF SI CTL lt O gt 47 2F lt gt 16 10 DLE CTL lt P gt 48 30 0 lt 0 gt 17 11 DC1 CTL lt Q gt 49 31 1 1 18 12 DC2 CTL lt R gt 14 50 32 2 lt 2 gt 19 13 DCs CTL lt S gt 51 33 3 lt 3 gt 20 14 DC4 CTL lt T gt 52 34 4 lt 4 gt 2115 NAK CTL lt U gt 93 35 5 lt 5 gt 22 16 SYN CTL lt V gt 54 36 6 lt 6 gt 23 17 ETB CTL lt W gt 55 37 7 lt 7 gt 24 18 CAN CTL lt xX gt 5 56 38 8 lt 8 gt 25 19 EM CTL lt Y gt 6 57 39 9 lt 9 gt 26 1A SUB CTL lt Z gt 58 3A lt gt 27 1B ESC CTL lt gt 7 59 3B koy 28 1C FS CTL lt gt 60 3C SH lt gt 29 1
113. ATCH BACKUP SPECIAL These commands would produce identical results The default file extensions are CMD for the file to be patched and FLX for the file containing the PATCH information The patch information in SPECIAL FIX might look like this Special patch for my backup system only X 6178 23 3E 87 X 61A0 FF 00 00 This is an example of a patch using the X nnnn toad location format Note the comment line in the patch code file This line will have no effect on the patch PATCH SYS2 SYS SYSTEM USING TEST FIX PATCH SYS2 SYS SYSTEM TEST Note the abbreviated syntax of the second example The USING and default FIX extension are not necessary The information in the patch file TEST FLX might look like this his will modify the SYS2 Module DOB 49 EF CD 65 44 FOB A9 AF 3E 44 E5 Eop This is an example of the direct patch mode It will patch the specified record and byte in the file SYS2 SYS There are two comment lines in this patch file Neither will have any effect on the patch PATCH SYS6 SYS LIBI 188 Los Gree We ees PATCH Utility Command This command will patch the SYS6 library module The patch file LIBI FIX might contain the following information L54 X 5208 32 20 DE AF 00 C3 66 00 This patch is in the memory load location mode Library patches may also be done with the direct disk modify mode Patching with the command line format Applying a patch from the command line uses the same
114. CL alert and return you to BASIC There are two important points to be made about this example First the comment line in the ALERT JCL file is absolutely necessary as a JCL file cannot start with an execution macro Second the EXIT ter mination macro is mandatory to assure that keyboard control will be returned to BASIC Although the example demonstrated an execute only JCL file it is perfectly allowable to call compiled JCL procedures from BASIC You may even construct a CMD DO filename parameters command using BASIC string substitution Anytime you wish to use a DOS version 5 CMD DO filename command to execute a JCL file and not return to BASIC you will have to change the format of the command This is especially important if the new JCL file is one that will also enter BASIC and run a program To do these types of JCL files from BASIC use the format CMD l DO filename 320 besa Batch Processing Job Control Language Using this format for the command will assure that a proper exit is made before the new JCL file is started Controlling a BASIC program In some cases the prompts in a BASIC program can be answered with a tine from a JCL file This will be true if the program uses the INPUT or LINEINPUT BASIC statement to take the input If the INKEY statement is used response will have to come from the keyboard rather than from a JCL file If the program is using the proper input method creating a JCL fo
115. Clone sw COPY filespec1 TO d lul nnn Clone sw COPY filespec d X COPY devspec TO filespec I devspec ibron Echo Cione indicates the desire for an exact duplicate of the directory entry of filespecl All ATTRIButes will be copied with the file CLONE defaults to ON will cause any characters copied from a devspec to be echoed to the screen specifies the logical record length at which filespec2 is to be set nnn 1 to 256 is an Optional parameter that allows a single drive copy from a non system diskette Important COPY should not be used to move Systein SYS files from one disk to another The BACKUP utility must be used for this purpose Whien copying from an x 2 or earlier version disk to an x 3 disk the old user access password if any will be removed and the x 3 style date and time information field will be established the time being set to 00 00 00 12 00am You should become familiar with this important command as it is used in the DOS system so the full power of this feature can be utilized Special attention should be given to the ECHO LRL and CLONE parameters LRL is a parameter that allows the establishment of a new logical record length for a file during the copy process If not specified LRL will default to the LRL of the file being copied This can be very useful when 91 et re a ee DR RR A A A A a a COPY Library Command restructuring data files and for changing ASCII type file
116. D GS CTL lt gt 9 61 3D SH lt gt 30 1E RS CTL lt gt 62 3E gt SH lt gt 31 1F VS SH lt CLR gt 63 3F SH lt gt Set Generation DEC 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 va 78 19 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 HEX TAG ENTERED BY 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 wre NK MS KM CH NWO VIO ZS TAG HS SH SH SH SH SH SH CLR lt gt B CLR lt gt CLR lt gt CLR lt 3 gt CLR lt ENTER gt lt gt lt A gt lt B gt lt C gt lt D gt lt E gt lt E gt lt G gt lt H gt lt I gt lt J gt lt K gt lt L gt lt M gt lt N gt lt O gt lt P gt DEC 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 Lis 114 115 116 i 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 Keyboard Driver Program HEX TAG ENTERED BY 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 a NK KX EKCEAPHNARQVDIOSBDSRPA YeTQOnmndaandd ws SH lt gt lt A gt lt Z gt CLR SH CLR SH CLR SH CLR SH 7F DEL CLR SH lt gt lt gt GeF lt gt lt ENTER gt 259 a I _ L Keyboard Driver Program Extended non ASCID DEC HEX TAG ENTERED BY DEC HEX TAG ENTERED BY 128 80 lt BREAK gt V6 160 AO CLR lt SPACE gt 129 81 CLR A lt F1 gt ECM lt gt 161 Al CLR SH lt 1 gt 130 82 CLR B lt F2
117. DAT 0 TO TEST DAT CLOSED 1 C OFF COPY TEST DAT 0 TO CLOSED 1 C OFF These commands will copy the file TEST DAT from drive 0 to drive 1 The file on drive 1 will be named TEST DAT and have the owner password set to CLOSED Notice that the second command dynamically assigned the name and extension of filespecl to filespec2 and then added the password CLOSED If a password exists on the file being copied it cannot be changed during a copy Also it will be necessary to turn off the CLONE parameter when assigning a password with the copy command To change a password see the ATTRIB command COPY TEST DAT 0 TO MYFILE 1 93 COPY Library Command This command would copy the file TEST DAT from drive 0 to drive 1 with the file on drive 1 named MYFILE DAT Notice that the extension of filespec2 was not specified and defaulted to DAT COPY TEST DAT 0 TO MYFILE 1 This command will copy the file TEST DAT from drive 0 to drive 1 with the file on drive 1 named MYFILE There will be no extension on MYFILE because the with no other characters was specified in filespec2 COPY DATA NEW 0 TO OLD 0 This command will copy the file DATA NEW from drive 0 to a file named DATA OLD on drive 0 The filename was not specified for filespec2 and defaulted to that of filespec1 DATA COPY DATA V56 0 TO DATA V28 1 LRL 128 This command will copy the file DATA V56 on drive 0 to a file called DATA V28 on drive 1 These two f
118. EFSHF SASHES HSHESH SHEETS FESS SPHISSSHSCTSSSHSSHESSSSOSSESFISOSESSSSSSSSEHSESHESSHHSFSSESTE SHR FSH ESESHeS Osse gaeaese SSSSPHSSSHSCSSEKE SES SSCHOHSHSSESSSASTHSSHSHSHAS SSS eC eeesFFsSaesEeSAEESeFSeneesses SF ASSPSSSSAF SF aASSASSSSSHSSFHS SH ASUS FHHSSSHSSSFATHSSSSH Reese etasrteseasaeetaua SSSHSSSSSSSHPSHSFSSASSSHSKLSESHSSEFH ASF as as esses Fase SaH Sete g Fe sseaesasegsas SHAK SHSHH et essssesge Ss sot ost Fansestteeesesg ass asves Table of Contents Text deletion 239 Block operations 240 Filing away your text to a disk file 2A2 Text search 242 Text search and replace 243 Printing text 244 Obtaining a Directory 244 Exiting from TED 244 Text recovery 244 HME zaone e A N 245 TOP aos N E E aneseeeteat anne 247 VERI Y r A O 248 DOS Drivers and Filters saosin S o CCICK E Teas er er eyo eT nee le a eta NESE PRICE 249 COM Ait RSZ 322 ea voacicstttaiairers sce vavesianicasacta ER 251 FDUB iscicceccncavalctideleGucatectiienseen ei ee a N 254 JOBEN penie ni E eanncsuce cessunen suuueseasseneanioss 255 KPV R tere E Pn eee 256 Keyboard duivalenis rena a csadiveeeens 257 Extended Cursor Mode ECM 258 Forcing CAPS lock or unlock 258 KoNNa N owas costes ates 262 MEMDISK DCT RAM Disk Drivet scccssscsesssscerceerses 266 MintDOS Model VII omly ccccscessesssscorseccesscseseessecese 270 PLOIDY OC Teano ar Eea a E 273 POR IMIS and PR cass cacsicscstcncssscves ctincicctavsauenscetccetacevasa
119. ES Any disk used for booting the system must contain SYSO SYS It may be removed from disks not used for booting SysisySs This overlay contains the DOS command interpreter the routines for processing the FEXT system vector the routines for processing the FSPEC system vector and the routines for processing the PARAM system vector This overlay must be available on all SYSTEM disks SYS2 SYS C This overlay is used for opening or initializing disk files and logical devices It also contains routines for checking the availability of a disk pack services the CKDRY system vector and routines for hashing fite specifications and passwords This overlay must also reside on all SYSTEM disks SYS3 SYS ne This overlay contains all of the system routines needed to close files and 19 eS ee ee L S DOS User Manual logical devices It also contains the routines needed to service the FNAME system vector This overlay must not be eliminated SYS4 SYS lt This system overlay contains the system error dictionary It is needed to issue such messages as File not found Directory read error etc If you decide to purge this overlay from your working SYSTEM diskette all system errors will produce the error message SYS ERROR It is recommended that you not eliminate this overlay especially since it occupies only one granule of storage s SYS5 SYS 3 This is the ghost debugger It is needed if you
120. F d Sets the XOFF character to d CTRL S XON d Sets the XON character to d CTRL Q DOS Version 5 notes You must have established the DOS keyboard driver KI DVR via the command SET KI to KI DVR partms before attempting to enter LCOMM as LCOMM makes extensive use of control and function keys only available with the KJ DVR program Also it is imperative that the SPOOLer not be in use while using LCOMM since the SPOOLer shares the same task slot as LCOMM LCOMM has its own printer spool buffer COMM provides the capabilities of keyboard send receive automatic spooling to a printer through a dynamic memory buffer and the transfer of 174 Lo O E Lo bee e ee e Loo Lo teas fee Wes COMM Communications Utility Command files from system to system without the need for handshaking when operating at 300 baud For those users interfacing to systems supporting XON XOFF protocol COMM provides for optional XON XOFF support using Device Control 1 DC1 and Device Control 3 ie ASCII controls COMM does not talk directly to the RS 232 hardware but rather to a device that has been previously coupled to the RS 232 hardware through an appropriate software driver This ts accomplished with the SET library command and one of the supplied serial driver programs The device COMM will interface with is passed as a device specification in the command line The device name normally utilized for this purpose is
121. I e e e m PATCH Utility Command e It may be entered as a string of ASCII characters enclosed in quotes No matter which method is used there is never a space between the sign and the start of the patch code A physical line may contain two patch verbs These are separated by a colon under DOS version 5 and a semi colon under DOS version 6 For example D02 45 17 62 F02 45 15 50 would be a properly formatted DOS version 6 patch line use a separator character for DOS version 5 pos Patch Modes X nnnn nn nn nn nn nn pn X nnnn String The X verb will patch a file by memory load location The patch code will be written into a load module added to the end of the file being patched This ending module will then load with the program and overlay or extend the code at X nnnn where nnnn is the memory load address for the patch code The patch code can be entered either as hexadecimal bytes or may be represented as an ASCII string It must be noted that this patch mode will extend the disk file even if all of the patching is to the inside of the program Because this type of patch will merely be added to the end of the file to be patched it may later be removed with the YANK parameter Drr bb nn nn nn nn nn nn Frr bb bb bb bb bb bb bb Drr bb New String Drr bb Old String This is the direct disk modify patch mode The Fr represents the record number in the file to be patched and the b
122. IC and run the progran ALARMSET BAS exiting to DOS Ready after completion of the program JCL ALERT Macros The FLASH and ALERT macros are provided to give both visual and audio alerts to the operator The FLASH macro will blink a message line 286 E i Batch Processing Job Control Language on the video screen making it easy to emphasize an important piece of information The ALERT macro will send an audio tone to the Model I II cassette port or Model 4 sound port allowing an audio alert FLASH duration message This macro will flash a message on and off on the video screen The duration can be any number from 0 to 255 This is the number of times the message will flash If no duration is specified the message will flash 256 times The message string can be any comment you wish displayed For example TEST JCL FLASH 10 Starting initialization JCL When the TEST JCL executes the FLASH line will be displayed It will flash on and off 10 times as specified by the duration count At any time during this period you may press lt ENTER gt to stop the flash and proceed to the next line Pressing lt BREAK gt at this point will abort the JCL and display the message Job Aborted The ALERT macro may be used to provide an audible signal to the operator It will generate up to eight different tones and direct its output to the cassette port on the line that normally goes to the AUX cassette jack on
123. ILE OBJ NUM HEX REC 5 LIST TESTFILE OBJ HEX REC 5 These commands produce identical listings of the fite TESTFILE OBJ Remember that the NUM and LINE parameters are always superceded by the HEX parameter 177 i i i UN Sp LOAD Library Command LOAD The LOAD command will load a load module format file such as a CMD or a CIM into memory without invocation The syntax is LOAD X filespec filespec is any valid DOS filespec that is in load module format 09 is an optional parameter for a LOAD from a non system diskette The LOAD command allows you to load into memory a disk file that is in the proper format The default file extension for the LOAD command is CMD The following address restrictions exist when loading programs LOAD Program must reside at or above X 5200 V5 or X 3000 V6 LOAD X Program must reside at or above X 5300 V5 or X 3000 V6 After a program is loaded control is returned to the system without invoking the loaded program The X parameter altows the loading of files that reside on an unmounted system or non system disk DOS will prompt you to insert the diskette with the desired file on it with the message Insert SOURCE disk lt ENTER gt After the load is complete you will be prompted to place the system diskette back in drive 0 with the message Insert SYSTEM disk lt ENTER gt 178 oes booa LOG Utility Command gt LOG LOG is a program that
124. ILTER PR PR FLT DOS 5 SET FF FORMS DOS 6 FILTER PR FF DOS 6 FORMS FFHARD CHARS 80 BASIC RUN PROGRAM2 BAS STOP DO MENU The resultant SYSTEM JCL file would be _MENU JCL selection start up BASIC STOP From the above examples you should now have a basic understanding of how the IF macro can be used to create a single JCL file that can be used for different purposes All that is required is that the proper tokens to be 299 Batch Processing Job Control Language entered on the DO command line To reduce the number of tokens needed and to provide for higher conditional logic statements to be handled JCL provides the SET RESET and ASSIGN tokens Using SET RESET ASSIGN The SET macro is used to give a token a logical true value the same as specifying it on the DO command line The RESET token does the Opposite giving a token a false value One basic use for SET is to let one token set the value of another For example F KI SET P1 END If these lines were added to the beginning of the MENU JCL example file you can see that specifying only the KI token will also set P1 to a true condition Again referring to the MENU JCL file it is possible that the operator could enter both the P1 and P2 tokens generally producing undesired results To keep this from happening the following lines could be added to the beginning of the file F KI SET P RESET P2 END
125. If A is false and either B or C is true As you can see the logical operators can be combined to test almost any arrangements of tokens you may need This is especially handy for setting 313 Batch Processing Job Control Language up default conditions and in checking for missing tokens as the following examples will demonstrate CHECK JCL CHECKI JCL F S 3 F S D ASSIGN S 0 You MUST enter S and D END QUIT F D END ASSIGN D 2 END Let us assume that the S and D in these two examples will be used as source and destination drivespecs later in the file The CHECK example tests S and D individually and assigns them default values if they were not true The CHECK example on the other hand is structured so that both S and D must be true or the JCL will abort The IF line in the CHECK1 example reads if not S or not D Although the use of logical operators may seem harder to understand than a simple IF token statement it does provide easier ways to determine if needed tokens have been specified Nested IF macros By definition a conditional block begins with an IF and concludes with an END When the IF evaluates true the lines between the IF and the IEND are compiled It is also possible to include other IF END blocks within the main conditional block in effect nesting them As previously explained the ELSE macro provides
126. Jkl Ativates the screen print option Rate r Sets the repeat rate to T Type Activates the type ahead feature Among other things the KI DVR program establishes the lt CLEAR gt key as a special control key for many DOS functions This driver must be set if SPOOL SYSTEM SVC KSM MiniDOS LCOMM or any other program that utilizes the lt CLEAR gt key as a control key is to be used On the Model III the keyboard repeat and debounce features are past of the ROM keyboard driver and will be available even if this driver is not used However using the KI DVR program will provide an increased key repeat rate On the Model I the keyboard will use the ROM driver on power up You will not have key repeat or debounce unless KI D VR has been set The driver allows the key combination lt CLEAR gt lt SHIFI gt lt 0 gt to generate a code of 160d the same as lt CLEAR gt lt SPACE gt Note that it will not toggle CAPS LOCK only lt SHIFT gt lt 0 gt will toggle CAPS LOCK If Model III DOS is running on a Model 4 computer installing the KI DVR will automatically load a driver which supports the lt CTRL gt key the function keys and lt CAPS gt in lieu of lt SHIFT gt lt 0 gt As this driver is established with the SET Library command it must be applied before any other KI filters When KI DVR is set the driver will reside in high memory Once KIJ DVR is set you will not be allowed to set 256 Lae Hee eee
127. L les tens a ie Vee dess Wee haze SYSTEM Library Command SYSTEM SVC V5 This DOS version 5 command will load a Supervisory Call SVC table into high memory A description of the SVC table is beyond the scope of this Reference Manual You must have set KI to the KI DVR program if you wish to use the SYC table SYSTEM SWAPszs DRIVE d Cs a SWAP enables the swapping of any two logical drives by switching their Drive Code Table DCT assignments Specifying SYSTEM DRIVE d1 SWAP d2 switches drive dl for d2 The command is functional while JCL is in execution even if one of the referenced drives holds the executing JCL file If one of the designated drives is the SYSTEM drive and JCL is in execution the other designated drive must contain a SYSTEM Note that SYSTEM SYSTEM qd is equivalent to SYSTEM DRIVE 0 SWAP qd SYSTEM SYSGEN ON OFF DRIVE d This command creates or deletes a configuration file on the disk drive specified If switch is not specified ON is assumed That is SYSTEM SYSGEN is the same as SYSTEM SYSGEN ON After a SYSTEM SYSGEN OFF command has been given the current configuration of the system will not change until the system is booted again When SYSGEN is invoked all current device and driver configurations will be stored on the diskette in drive 0 or that drive specified Job Control Language if active will be temporarily suspended during the configuration generation
128. L file will be scanned without execution up to the specified LABEL Once the LABEL is reached execution will begin and continue until the next LABEL or until the end of the JCL procedure file has been reached The primary reason for the LABEL parameter is to allow many different functions to be built into one large file This will greatly conserve disk space as a series of small JCL files would take up a minimum of one granule apiece For complete definitions of JCL LABELs refer to the JCL section of the manual If the LABEL and parameters cause the DO command line to exceed the maximum length permissable the semi colon character will allow you to continue passing parameters once the DO has started The proper use of the semi colon is as follows e Terminate the DO command line by enclosing as many parameters as you can in the parentheses Close the parentheses then insert the semi colon character and press lt ENTER gt e A question mark will appear on the screen At this point you may enter the remaining parameters making sure they are enclosed in parentheses 132 laces fee losa DO Library Command Refer to the following examples and descriptions as a guide to the uses of the DO function Character The character will DO the compile phase only without actually executing the commands The DO will compile your JCL file to the SYSTEM JCL file This will test if the syntax of
129. ORT 282 283 290 305 HALERT 282 287 320 HIASSIGN 303 306 DELAY 282 285 HELSE 295 297 314 HEND 295 I EXIT 282 284 319 320 FLASH 282 287 IAF 295 299 312 ANCLUDE 309 316 JANPUT 282 286 288 290 291 IIKEYIN 282 288 PPAUSE 282 285 290 318 HQUIT 304 SET 302 HISTOP 282 283 291 319 321 IWAIT 282 286 291 2 123 199 KBD 321 KEY 321 KEYIN 321 LABEL 311 1 12 hour format 124 12 hr clock time 222 2 2 sided floppy drives 154 24 hour format 124 24 hr clock time 222 4 4P 6i A abbreviation 12 aborting a JCL procedure 283 Aerocomp 254 331 L S DOS User Manual ALIVE 222 alphabetical order 126 alphanumeric 325 AMPM 222 AND 294 312 APPEND 41 62 ASCII 41 64 65 92 106 131 135 137 142 147 173 184 252 279 318 325 asterisk 49 326 ATTRIB 43 46 93 97 121 123 195 audible alert 287 auditory feedback keyboard 249 AUTO 48 60 219 229 319 automatic program execution 321 B background task 325 BACKUP 4 50 103 104 212 246 248 280 backup by class 51 54 55 backup by class forcing 57 backup reconstruct 52 54 55 57 BAS 17 BASIC 24 94 98 163 290 BASIC HLP 163 BASIC2 222 batch processing 2 5 baud 325 baud rate 78 bit 325 BLINK 222 blinking characters 165 blinking cursor 201 BOOT 4G 60 103 152 170 221 325 332 boot ste
130. S version 5 or the lt CTRL gt lt SHIFT gt lt gt key combination for DOS version 6 is pressed as the first character of any new line Note If you are building a JCL file lines will be limited to the maximum allowable characters permitted for a JCL command line The HEX parameter will allow you to enter characters other than those directly available from the keyboard Any one byte character value may be entered in the HEX format an The line length during a hex build will be 254 characters allowing 127 hexadecimal characters to be entered The HEX parameter uses a packed format with no spaces or delimiters between bytes For example you could create a character string containing graphics characters in the following manner 818A90A 10D This line contains the hexadecimal bytes 81 8A 90 and Al Note that the byte values are entered packed together with no spaces or other delimiters between them One of the possible uses for this format may be to build graphics strings to be used with the KSM function If a file is to be uscd with the KSM function do not embed the bytes OD or 3B in the String unless you actually intend for these characters to be present as these represent the Carriage Return and Semi colon characters They will be acted upon by the KSM file as end of line OD and embedded lt ENTER gt character 3B Note that each logical line must be terminated with a OD Therefore several logical lines
131. SS ne eee ee HELP Utility Command HELP also allows a global scan for any on line keyword If the keyword MEMORY was known but the file is unknown or to save typing in the filename then enter an asterisk followed by the keyword in the help command line For example HELP MEMORY would find the first occurrence of the keyword MEMORY in any HLP file The top of the screen displays the category being scanned while a global search is in progress If the key is found the text displays normally At the end of the text the prompt Press lt BREAK gt to exit or lt ENIER gt lo continue global scan appears Pressing lt ENTER gt will look for the same keyword in another file until all HLP files have been examined Upon completion of the scan or if no match is found the normal prompt for category selection will appear Continue as desired by pressing lt BREAK gt or lt ENTER gt to return to DOS Ready or by typing in a category name to obtain the directory for that file Besides use at DOS Ready the same command sequence may be employed within DOS version 5 BASIC by utilizing the CMD exp function Your application could be written to invoke help as an operator choice from a menu or command line For example CMD HELP DOS FILESPEC might be invoked by the application program if it detected an invalid filespec entry by the operator HELP requires about 5K of free memory to function All system memory guides
132. T X CC e Strip the high bit from the directory cylinder byte pointer at disk track 0 sector 0 byte 3 this is needed to convert certain DOSPLUS diskettes e Write DOS system information sectors onto the disk TY A LTR tet ma ee see SS SS TT TEN TS Y ST vera 8 a ig a a a ee ie ee A r e m mr ae e ee tS RF ee rte patie en tae oe Nee eee ge ge ew an oe ar g Cr e A iam REPAIR Utility Command REPAIR functions There are two types of Data Address Marks DAMs on every diskette One to mark a data cylinder and another to mark the directory cylinder The DAM used to mark the directory track varies between operating systems and may also be dependent on the computer hardware you are using With DOS this DAM has been standardized to be the same on any DOS diskette The REPAIR command will change the directory DAM of the target disk to match the DOS standard Your disk directory contains information on the space allocated on the disk as well as the names of your disk files With DOS the directory can be opened as a file called DIR SYS The REPAIR command will correct the protection level of the DIR SYS file on non DOS diskettes to allow them to be used in the same manner DOS keeps certain information in the directory about the number of cylinders on a diskette as well as how much space is available on each cylinder The REPAIR command will update this information on non DOS diskettes This will be nece
133. THIRD Compilation will begin at the line following the label and will continue until the next LABEL or End of File is reached DO This command will invoke the SYSTEM JCL file If the file does not exist an error will be generated DO TEST NEW 2 D 5 E 6 This command will compile and invoke the file TEST NEW on drive 2 The file will be compiled to the SYSTEM JCL file and each line will be invoked from this file The variables D 5 and E 6 will be passed as needed during the compilation The following examples show what will happen if the space is omitted in a DO command DO TEST JCL The use of the character normally tells the DO command to skip the compile phase and directly invoke each line of the JCL file If the space between the DO command and the is omitted the compile phase will be done This means that the TEST JCL file will compile to the SYSTEM JCL creating the SYSTEM JCL file if none exists DOSTEST JCL The character normally tells the DO to compile the TEST JCL file without executing it If the space between DO and the character is omitted the execution will be done DO This command will ignore the asterisk and generate the error message Filespec required 134 ksss We ee Meee Me L DUMP Library Command DUMP This command dumps a specified block of memory to a disk file The dump may be in load module or ASCII format The syntax is DUMP filespe
134. TTRIB command will let you apply or change a file s password Also a file specification may be changed during the COPY process Viewing devices and disk drive parameters The DEVICE command will let you see what devices you have active in your system You will also see the information that DOS has stored in memory about the number of disk drives and the types of disks you are using Certain disk drive information may be changed with the SYSTEM command Establishing or Removing devices The SET and ROUTE commands will let you establish devices The LINK command will also let you link multiple devices together The RESET and KILL or REMOVE commands can be used to remove unwanted devices Making a BACKUP Now that you have read the introduction you should follow the next set of instructions They will tell you how to make a backup which will be an exact duplicate of your master DOS disk e Your DOS master disk either is WRITE PROTECTED with a sinall adhesive tab or does not contain a write enable notch and is permanently write protected Do not remove the write protect tab if it exists L S DOS User Manual e Power up your computer system and all peripheral hardware Place the DOS Master diskette in drive 0 and press the RESET button to boot the DOS diskette into the system The DOS logo will now appear on the screen Enter in the correct date mm dd yy and time hh mm ss and the message DOS Ready will appear e
135. The INCLUDE macro can very easily be used to compile a large JCL procedure from a series of smaller JCL routines If the finished SYSTEM JCL file is a procedure that will be executed many times it may easily be saved by copying SYSTEM JCL to a file with another name Using the special symbol The symbol is used to pass character values to the system as though they came from the keyboard The proper syntax is the symbol directly followed the hexadecimal value of the character such as 1F The following values are all valid after the symbol HEX VALUE RESULT 09 TAB eight Spaces OA Line Feed IF Clear Screen Also the value of any printable character may be used although this is not normally done 317 Batch Processing Job Control Language When using the clear screen character it should be placed at the start of a line For example 1F This is a comment line 1F PAUSE Insert disk in drive 1 press lt ENTER gt _ In both examples the screen will clear and the JCL line will be displayed in the top left corner of the screen The TAB 09H and line feed OAH characters can be used to position comments or other lines in different positions on the screen These characters should always be placed after the period in the comment line or after the macro in an executable line For example 09 09 This comment will be tabbed 16 spaces PAUSE 0A 0A D0A This line will appear 3 lines down
136. The name of your Master diskette will be displayed in the center of the screen above the DOS logo It will probably appear as something like LDOS531 or LSDOS631 Write this name down as you will need it in the following procedure e Now you are ready to make several BACKUPS of your DOS Master diskette Follow the step by step procedures listed below After a backup is complete you may see the message Cannat clear MOI flags Source disk is write protected on the screen This is just an informative message and is normal when there is a write protect tab on the source disk An explanation of Mod flags can be found in the DIR command section CAUTION The default drive step rate will be 6ms for the Model IH and 4 If this is too fast for your disk drives use the additional parameter STEP 3 inside the parentheses in the following FORMAT commands For single drive owners e Type in the command FORMAT 0 NAME Q N The screen will clear and the DOS disk FORMAT utility will be loaded You will see the following prompt appear Diskelle name e Answer the prompt with the Master Disk Name recorded earlier You will then see the message Load DESTINATION disk and hit lt ENTER gt te Pee Wee Hee Ca E ot introduction to DOS At this point insert a new blank diskette in drive 0 and press lt ENTER gt After the FORMAT is complete this message will appear Load SYSTEM disk and hit lt ENTER
137. The old accessluser password field will be set to blanks This may be useful for files which must be transferred to an older DOS release such as by the TRSDOS 1 3 gt CONVERT utility Specifying RESET filespec DATE ON will establish the file s directory date as that of current system date and time Note that when this option is specified the MQD flag will be set to indicate a file change Single device RESET A single device reset will accomplish the following Any filtering linking routing or setting done to the device will be removed Any open disk file connected to the device will be closed Invoking a DEVICE command will show the device pointed to it s normal default driver routine If the device has been created by the user it will be pointed NIL when reset and the REMOVE or KILL command can remove it from the device display at this time If high memory was used when this device was altered it will not always be reclaimed by the system However most system provided modules can re use the same memory allocation if they are enabled again after being disabled or reset Here are some examples of the RESET devspec command RESET PR If you had your printer PR filtered with the PR FLT routine the RESET PR command would restore the normal I O path between the printer DCB and its default driver RESET DU Suppose you had a dummy device DU routed to a disk file TEST TXT and had your printer PR linked to DU
138. These 281 Ne et re ep en LN A A I ge tne er PE ee a SS e eT Re et a Batch Processing Job Control Language comments will be displayed to the screen during execution Following is a list of all JCL execution macros gt A t ta y7 JCL TERMINATION MACROS ABORT EXIT STOP JCL PAUSE DELAY MACROS DELAY PAUSE WAIT JCL ALERT MACROS ALERT FLASH JCL KEYBOARD MACROS KEYIN INPUT An execution macro cannot be the first line in a JCL file The execution comments provide a means to display informative messages as the JCL file executes You could label your JCL file and show other useful information as follows Program start up JCL last modified 01 01 92 SET FF FORMS DOS 6 FILTER PR PR FLT DOS 5 FORMS CHARS 80 MARGIN 10 LINES 60 BASIC RUN PROGRAM BAS This comment would be displayed when the JCL executes and show the file s purpose and the last date you made modifications to the file Remember from our last example that an unwanted return to the DOS Ready prompt would be made as soon as a keyboard input was requested by the program To keep this from occurring you can use the STOP macro 282 Co LOAN A GSS NL SO OO OS NE ELE EL LE LL ae OE LE CLL EE LLL LLL RS LN ttt ER LL a LLL LCL LLL Le e _ r rt Cse Lox Lo bee Batch Processing Job Control Language JCL TERMINATION macros STOP The STOP macro is used to hal
139. This configuration would cause all output to the PR to also go to DU and into the disk file TEST TXT If you RESET DU the device table would show DU Nil and the file TEST TXT would be closed However PR would still be linked to DU Since DU Nil any output sent to the PR would be ignored by DU The printer PR would function normally To clear the LINK issue a 200 ana A ES OP TS a etl oe eee eee eee ee RESET Library Command RESET PR command DU would continue to be shown in the device table until the system is rebooted DU i is deleted or a global RESET i 1S performed Global RESET The version 5 RESET command with no devspec will do a global reset All system logical devices will be returned to their default driver routines All user logical devices will be removed from the device control table Any filtering linking routing or setting will be cancelled All open files will be closed The Drive Code Table will be returned to its default state with the drive configuration coming from the system information sectors of the current system disk Any software write protection will be cancelled If your system drive has been set to some drive other than physical drive 0 be sure to insert a system disk into pltysical drive O before performing a global reset Any high memory disk drivers such as FDUBL or hard disk drivers will be removed from memory and access to any drives requiring once of these drivers will n
140. UTE or SET involving a disk file SYSGENing open files can cause loss of data if the disks are switched in the drives without the files being closed Disk switches with open files can also cause existing data to be overwritten SYSTEM SYSRES n This command will allow you to reside certain DOS system overlays in high memory not the library modules SYS files 1 5 and 8 12 V5 or 9 12 V6 may be loaded using this command Note that each system overlay will require only the amount of high memory normally used by the overlay when it is resident in the system overlay region This command does not allow multiple entries on the command line For example SYSTEM SYSRES 1 2 3 will result in only SYS3 being made resident Having certain of these SYS overlays resident in memory will speed up most disk I O operations as these modules will not have to be loaded from disk It will also allow you to purge these overlays from your system disk providing more room for data and programs Overlays 2 3 8 for DOS version 5 and 10 must be resident for certain types of backups 230 be oy Ales ee eee Wee et SYSTEM Library Command SYS2 SYS and SYS3 SYS must remain on any booting disk if a configuration file created with the SYSGEN parameter is to be loaded The DEVICE command will show any overlays that are many resident _ in high memory SYSTEM SYSTEM n This command will allow you to assign a drive other than drive 0 as your system
141. You must select at least three cylinders Selecting the number of cylinders allows you to use Memdisk but still retain some memory for the programs you want to run The amount of memory used by each cylinder is 4608 bytes 266 foe deo Hee Hee a eae Co PER ae MemDISK RAM Driver per cylinder 4 5K for double density DDEN and 2560 bytes per cylinder 2 5K for single density SDEN Selecting B uses one memory bank to create a 32K RAM disk in bank 1 Selecting C also uses one memory bank to create a 32K RAM disk but creates it using bank 2 A 2 bank 64K RAM disk is established by selecting D at this prompt Selection E disables the sclected drive s MemDISK driver This allows you to remove a MemDISK from memory and possibly free its driver space for other programs After selecting A B C or D you will be asked Single or Double Densily lt D gt This allows you to cause the selected memdisk to emulate a single density floppy disk or a double density floppy disk By simply pressing lt ENTER gt the system will default to single density If you want to use the RAM disk as the system drive it must be installed as double density If you selected to utilize bank 0 memory selection A you will be aked for the number of cylinders of storage space to utilize via the prompt Note each cylinder equals xx xK of space Number of free cylinders 3 12 If MemDISK finds that the s
142. a hardware clock Invoke SETDATE with a command such as SETDATE MM DD YY Any additional instructions needed will be provided after SETDATE invokes 103 DATE Library Command DATECONV Utility This command converts pre x 3 version non system disks to use the time and date directory format of DOS version x 3 or later The syntax is DATECONV d CS d Designates the disk drive to convert An optional version 6 parameter used to force conversion of some disks detected as system disks There are no parameters for this program If conversion of a TRSDOS 6 2 LDOS 5 1 or earlier SYSTEM disk is attempted an appropriate error message will be displayed To convert this type of disk you must first use BACKUP to move x 3 system files onto it before using DATECONV For example BACKUP s d S 1 OLD Data disks from versions earlier than x 3 will be converted in all cases and marked as an x 3 type disk DATECONV does not normally need to be used on an x 3 disk since the COPY and BACKUP commands automatically adjust the time and date storage when moving from LDOS 5 1 or TRSDOS 6 x to x 3 For this reason you should never move files to an x 3 disk when booted up under any earlier version If you do use DATECONV on an x 3 disk only those files that have an old style blank userlaccess password will be changed This is to protect the time stamp on proper x 3 files Note If you are using a hard disk drive which
143. a definite structure and syntax must be observed when creating the file All lines in a patch file must start with either a period or one of the four patch code verb identifiers D F L or X A period indicates that the line is a comment line and should be ignored by the patch utility Comments in patch files are very useful for documenting the changes you are making The actual patch code lines will start in onc of four ways X nnnn Change file starting at address nnnn to data Di bb Change file starting at record tt offset bb to data Frr bb Finds data at record ir byte offset bb Lnn Designates DOS library command ISAM number nn data hexadecimal values of the form XX XX XX or ASCII values of the form abcdefg The Lnn line is used to identify a particular library command module and is not normally needed by the user The X and D verbs are use to identify the patch line as either a patch by memory load location or a direct disk modify patch respectively The F verb is used simultaneously with the D verb to require a match of current file bytes prior to installing the patch code this provides a safeguard which ensures that the correct file and location is being patched Information following the sign will be nie actual patch code It must be entered in one of two ways e It may be entered as a series of hexadecimal bytes separated by a single space 185 ant a a aa r a a a rr a LE I
144. aR aAaHUIQQ SIAU SH SH SH SH SH SH SH SH SH SH SH SH SH SH SH o Si SH SH SH SH SH SH SH SH SH SH CLR lt gt 8 CLR lt gt CLR lt gt CLR lt gt CLR lt ENTER gt lt A gt lt B gt lt C gt lt D gt lt E gt lt F gt lt G gt lt H gt lt I gt lt J gt lt K gt lt L gt lt M gt lt N gt lt 0 gt lt P gt lt Q gt lt R gt lt S gt lt T gt lt U gt lt V gt lt W gt lt X gt lt Y gt lt Z gt Keyboard Driver Program DEC 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 m meaa HEX TAG ENTERED BY 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 710 TL 72 73 74 75 76 a 78 79 7A 7B 1C 7D TE 7F DEL CLR SH lt ENTER gt w e NKASS acem an QTDIOTSD SPRY eTQmMdandriow SH lt gt lt A gt lt B gt lt C gt lt DD gt lt E gt lt F gt lt G gt lt H gt lt I gt lt J gt lt K gt lt L gt lt M gt lt N gt lt O gt lt P gt lt Q gt lt R gt lt S gt lt T gt lt U gt lt V gt lt W gt lt X gt lt Y gt lt Z gt CLR SH CLR SH CLR SH CLR SH lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt ee D RPE TELA GEG SOON IE ITAL EER EEA EL PON HOM STONES B HAE LUISE II Ia E
145. abort the processing entirely Restrictions of JCL Certain DOS commands cannot be executed from a JCL file As the main concept of JCL is to use a pre determined set of commands any program with unpredictable prompts will not function properly when run from a ICL file Also any program which requires removing the system disk will certainly cause the JCL to abort Among the commands not valid from a ICL file are certain BACKUP commands BUILD COPY X certain CONV commands DEBUG certain PURGE commands RESET and RESET KI As a general rule you should not use any library command or utility program when specifying a QUERY parameter although the global RESET and RESET KI commands cannot be used in a JCL file a RESET device can be used with any device other than K1 However if the order of prompts or inputs in a program is known it is allowable to pre arrange the proper responses in a JCL file being careful that they remain in sync with the prompts In this manner you can have a ICL file totally run a program or other procedure with no operator input This will depend on the method used by the program to normally take keyboard input l 280 on Lo fies Batch Processing Job Control Language Simple JCL execution JCL files that contain only executable comments commands or execution JCL macros are very common tn day to day use of the DOS system The easiest JCL file to understand is one containing o
146. actual version 5 DOS driver program and is described in the DEVICE DRIVER section The parameters BAUD and WORD are valid parameters of the RS232T DVR program All I O to from the communications line will be sent through this driver routine and be properly dealt with to be sent out the RS 232 interface SET KI INKEY F 64 This command sets the keyboard KI to a user driver program named INKEY DVR and passes the parameter F 64 to the driver program SET PR RS232x This command would set PR the line printer to one of the supplied RS232 driver programs This would be the normal way to use a serial printer with DOS 208 ee Ooen Lo Lo S SETCOM SETCOM Library Command This command allows you to change or display the parameters of the serial device driver after the driver has been installed into memory It s command syntax is as follows SETCOM parms DEFAULT Set to system defaults shown below in brackets Baud n BREAK n Parity Query Sfop n Word n CD CTS DSR DIR Ri RTS Sets the BAUD rate 300 Sets logical break character to n The default is OFF for DOS 5 and lt CTRL gt lt C gt for DOS 6 Sets parity ON OFF EVEN ODD EVEN _A version 6 parameter which provides prompting for each parameter noted above Sets stop bits 1 or 2 1 Sets word length 5 8 bits 7 Carrier Detect IGNORE Clear To Send IGNORE Data Set Rea
147. ally continue at the expiration of the delay period The actual delay will be approximately 0 1 seconds per count The count may range from 1 to 256 Thus a delay from 0 1 seconds to a delay of 285 Batch Processing Job Control Language 25 6 seconds is possible The following example shows the proper syntax of the DELAY macro This could be an Informative message for the operator DELAY 50 basic run newplog bas STOP This example JCL will print an informative message and then delay for approximately five seconds After the delay it will execute BASIC and then run the desired program JIN AIT hh mm ss The WAIT macro is similar to DELAY except that the length of the delay depends on the setting of the system clock Providing the system clock is functioning the WAIT macro will put the entire system in a sleep state until such time as the system clock matches the time specified in the macro operand The system c ock can be set with the TIME command You can also set the time from a JCL file by using a direct execution of the TIME command or with the INPUT macro which will be discussed later Consider the following example example JCL for running alarm program wait 02 15 00 basic run alarmset bas exit Assuming that the system clock was set this example would display the comment and then wait until the clock matched the time of 02 15 00 specified in the WAIT macro It would then execute BAS
148. also append a device capable of sending characters to a file For example APPEND KI TO WESTCST DAT 2 This command will cause characters that are input on the keyboard to be appended to the file WESTCST DAT on drive 2 Depressing the lt BREAK gt key at any time will terminate this type of append Note that the keystrokes will not be shown on the display during this append as the ECHO parameter was not specified APPEND KI TO WESTCST DAT 2 ECHO This example will perform identically to the last except that any key typed will also be echoed to DO the video screen APPEND PAGE2 SCR 0 TO PAGEI SCR 0 STRIP This example would append PAGE2 SCR to the end of PAGEI SCR in the following manner PAGE would be backspaced one byte in effect allowing the first byte of PAGE2 to overwrite the last byte of PAGEL This would be necessary when appending files such as SCRIPSIT files that have an internal end of file marker in the file If the STRIP parameter was not used SCRIPSIT would load the appended file only up to the first end of file marker and ignore the appended PAGE2 section of the file 42 ose or os er EES C ee o ATTRIB Library Command ATTRIB files This command allows you to alter or remove the protection status of a file by changing passwords or the degree of access granted by a password ATTRIB also allows the defining of whether a filename will be visible or invisible when a normal directory of t
149. ameter prompts The ABS parameter is primarily useful when FORMAT is invoked from a JCL file As explained in the JCL section an unexpected prompt from an executing program can cause the JCL processing to abort Using the ABS parameter assures that there will be no prompt from the FORMAT utility to abort the formatting if the target disk already is formatted FORMAT cylinder verification When the formatting begins you will see the cylinder numbers appear as the necessary information is written to them After all cylinders are written format will verify that the proper information is actually on each cylinder If the verify procedure detects an error an asterisk and the cylinder number will be shown on the video display This space will be locked out so that no files will be written to the defective area The FREE command provides a method to see the locked out tracks on a diskette The WAIT parameter This parameter is not normally used when formatting It can compensate for hardware incompatibilities when using certain types of disk drives The only time it should be used is when all tracks above a certain point are locked out when verifying To use this parameter specify WAIT nnnn The value for nnnn will normally be a number between 5000 and 50000 The exact value can vary depending on the particular disk drive It is recommended that a value around 25000 be used at first This value can be adjusted higher if tracks are still lock
150. amount of file space to be allocated for the spooling Disk space is allocated in blocks of 1K 1024 bytes the same as memory When this parameter is set the system will create a file of the size specified If this parameter is not specified the SPOOL command will automatically allocate approximately 5K of disk space depending on the particular disk type The file name of this file will be determined by the filespec parameter To prevent the SPOOL command from using any disk space specify this parameter DISK DISK 0 By specifying the DISK parameter with no size the system will not allocate any disk space to the SPOOL command and will not create any file Parameter BANK This parameter allows for the spool buffer and most of the spooler module code to reside in a 32K memory bank other than normal high memory bank 0 If your computer is equipped with expanded memory known to the DOS use the MEMORY command to determine this then you should utilize BANK to install the spooler into a bank higher than 0 to use the minimum amount of high memory For BANK other than 0 MEM is automatically set to utilize all of the requested bank The following examples will show some possible combinations of the spool parameters SPOOL PR TEXTFILE 0 MEM 5 DISK 15 This command will allocate 5K of memory and 15K of disk space in a file named TEXTFILE SPL on drive 0 Any output sent to the printer will be buffered and sent to the li
151. and Command Structure All functions and procedures are specified by responding to a series of queries Some queries request yes no responses abbreviated Y N some request disk tape responses abbreviated D T while others request specific information i e file names new addresses etc Most yes no and disk tape responses can also be answered with a C to cancel the request and return to the main prompt as noted above If you want to return to DOS responding with E for EXIT will return you to the respective system Each query displays the valid responses acceptable to it Address load log to printer Y N E gt The address load log will be displayed only for files read in from disk The timing on tape reads is too critical to perform the extra processing necessary to detect the load limits and display them during a tape read If you are a disk user have a line printer and want this log displayed on your printer respond with a Y otherwise respond with an N If you want to exit CMDFILE enter E Whenever tis query is displayed the memory buffer used to store input files will be reset to its beginning position to initialize for a series of input requests This effectively clears the input buffer Input from disk or tape D T E C Q or lt ENTER gt to end reads gt This displays when CMDFILE is ready to read in another file Any file read in will be appended to any file previously input si
152. and tine DO TEST FIRST would start compiling with the first line after the FIRST label The following rules determine how much of a labeled JCL file will be included in the compile phase e If no label is specified on the DO command line all lines from the beginning up to the first label will be compiled e If a label is specified compiling will include all lines until the next label or the end of the file is encountered Doing the TEST JCL file using the FIRST label would write the first comment and the EXIT macro to the SYSTEM JCL file for execution Specifying either of the other labels would include only the appropriate single comment tine If the file were done with no label specified only the initial execution comment TEST JCL label example would be written out There is no limit to the size of labeled procedures They may range from one to as many lines as you can fit on your disk The only requirement is that a JCL file containing labels must be compiled When using labels in a JCL file one word of caution is necessary It is recommended that the file start with a comment line or some executable line other than a label Consider the following short example 311 Batch Processing Job Control Language FIRST Print this comment Now if a DO command were to do this file without specifying the FIRST label the following would result First the compiling phase would get the first line see that it i
153. another without having to retype the lines To allow this the INCLUDE macro and the LABEL feature of JCL can be used INCLUDE The ANCLUDE macro is used to merge together two or more JCL files during the compile phase The correct syntax is ANCLUDE filespec Before describing the INCLUDE macro any further one point must be emphasized an INCLUDE macro cannot be the last line in a JCL file If it is a Record number oul of range error will occur and the JCL will abort The filespec would be the name of the JCL file to be included This command is similar to specifying the filespec in a DO command line However it is not allowable to enter tokens or other information after the filc name and any information after the filespec will be ignored If you need to pass tokens to the included program they will have to be established in the program that is doing the NCLUDE This next example will show two JCL files and the results of the compile phase TESTI JCL TEST2 JCL comment line 1 This comment is included INCLUDE TEST2 comment line 2 EXIT 309 Batch Processing Job Control Language The command DO TESTI would produce the following SYSTEM JCL file TESTI JCL comment 1 TEST2 JCL This comment is included comment line 2 EXIT As you can see the compiling starts with the file named in the DO command line As soon as the INCLUDE is reached all lines in t
154. as well as the video While using this option the display will not pause if filled Since all characters are being sent to the printer no pause is required The V parameter causes the video restoration feature to be cancelled If not specified the screen will be returned to the same condition as it was when HELP was invoked less the help command itself The DOS version 5 B parameter causes the blink feature to be cancelled Vartous characters can be made to flash in the video display by specifying them as blinking characters during creation of the data file However if HELP were invoked while in a communications mode a continuous stream of characters would be sent from the host machine to the terminal The B parameter alleviates this difficulty The DOS version 6 R parameter causes the reverse video option to be cancelled Various phrases can be displayed in a reverse video mode if so specified in the creation of the data file However certain terminals utilize the characters involved and unpredictable results can occur while in the communications mode The R parameter alleviates this difficulty The S parameter causes the Search mode to be entered Typing HELP DOS D S would cause a listing of all keywords starting with D to be displayed rather than the entire list The potential match should be the left most characters of a keyword By specifying DI all keywords starting with DI would be displayed 165
155. ass and backup reconstruct will attempt to remove the mod flags from the source disk If the source disk is write protected you will see the following message appear after the first file has been copied Can t remove MOD flugs Source disk is wrile protected To provide a more readable display this message will not be displayed after every file although the mod flags will not be removed from any source files Backups with the X parameter The X parameter will allow you to perform backups without the need for the system files to be on the drive 0 disk This will allow backing up data disks of different sizes or capacities on a two drive system Single drive owncrs will be limited to mirror image type backups If the backup will be by class or a reconstruct two drives must be used Also the system modules 2 3 8 V5 and 10 must be resident in memory see the SYSTEM SYSRES command When doing a backup with the X parameter you will be prompted to insert the proper disk in drive 0 You may be prompted to switch drive 0 diskettes depending the type of backup you are doing and the system modules you have resident Using the backup parameters Many of the backup parameters are identical to those in the DIR and PURGE commands These parameters will allow you to choose the groups of files you wish to backup to your destination disk All parameters may be used singly or in combination with any other parameters If no paramete
156. ated by the system It may be necessary for backup to tum off the system real time clock during certain operations For this reason the message Nole Real time clock no longer accurate may appear after the completion of the backup This is merely an informative message reminding you the clock is no longer accurate If the backup is being done from a JCL file the following rules will apply e If the backup is mirror image the Pack IDs disk name and master password must be the same or the backup will abort e Backup with the X parameter single drive backups and backups with the Q parameter cannot be done from a JCL file As a final note it is not allowable to specify passwords in any BACKUP command line The BACKUP utility will ignore any password protection on a file whether doing a backup by class or a mirror image backup Mirror image backups _ A mirror image backup is basically a cylinder for cylinder copy from the source to the destination disk with only those cylinders that_actually contain data being moved The s date on the destination disk will be changed to the current system date However the boot sector containing the bootstrap step rate will remain untouched on the destination disk A mirror image backup will always compare the disk Pack ID s disk name and master password to make sure they are identical If they are not you will see the following message Different pack ID s Aborl backup 52
157. ausaeseares 274 How ICL WOUKS arara aa 219 Creant a JCE Dle nann 280 RRESIFICHIONS OF JCD nsession earo oiai aras 280 Simple ICL EXECUUON osina a iana 281 JCL Execution Macros and CommenttS ccccsssscosccosssenses 281 JCL PAUSE DELAY Macros 285 JCL ALERT Macros 286 JCL KEYBOARD ENTRY Macros 288 Simple JC comping sc sccsscssceeh sc aianei aiaia i eles 292 Compilation description and terms 292 JCL conditional decisions 294 Using SET RESET ASSIGN 300 ix L S DOS User Manual ICL substitution fields oasoooovesessseseseeessesssescrasoossesessossseussss 305 Combination of files 309 JCL labels 310 Advanced JCL compiling senseseseeroessesoesossssssersrenseeereresssa gt 312 Using the logical operators 312 Nested IF macros 314 Nested INCLUDE macros 316 Using the special symbol 317 Interfacing with applications programs 318 Practical JCL examples 322 ON OSSEE A OAE E ETE SES esOO8 SCOCCRAHSETOFHEEEES 325 Index ALLII SOCOEOCCECHOSSSESOSCEOSSEEE 988860808808 992992062866038 S808 CCS BESS Seaseous 331 lt e ep eranan mny mes Lo an Lo Introduction to DOS Introduction to DOS These first few pages will introduce you to the basic principles of a disk operating system and list some of the DOS commands and utilities you will be using in your day to day activities You can use this as a convenient reference until you become familiar with operating your
158. available on a disk Remember if a drivespec is not used the system will attempt to create the file on the first available drive The FILL parameter allows you to specify a particular character to propogate throughout the created file SHRINK is used to flag the file for deallocation of unused space once data is written to the file If SHRINK is not specified the file s create flag is turned on in the directory 99 Sn ee ee ee ee H CREATE Library Command Note If a file has been created a DIR command will show For a CREATEd file S nK For a normal file S mK The normal equal sign will be replaced by a colon to indicate that the file length is the result of a CREATE rather than the actual size of the data in the file CREATE NEWFILE DAT 0 LRL 128 REC 100 This command will create a file named NEWFILE DAT on drive 0 It will have enough space allocated to accommodate 100 records of 128 bytes each CREATE ASCII DAT 2 LRL 1 REC 5 120 This command will create a file named ASCII DAT in which records will have a length of one byte and there will be space taken on the disk for 5120 5K of these one byte records CREATE MAIL DAT 3 This command will create the file MAIL DAT on drive 3 There will be no space assigned to the file at this time The file name is merely placed in the directory This is very useful as it allows the placement of a yet to be used file on a designated drive Since it was
159. b is the byte in that record where the patch is to begin Normally you will use a corresponding F verb patch line for each D verb patch line In the F verb patch line the data bytes entered must correspond to the exact bytes currently in the file at the record and byte position specified The P verb patch line must immediately follow its corresponding D verb patch line By using the 186 re ane as Me Les w ee Utes PATCH Utility Command F verb along with the D verb you will ensure that you are making alterations to the correct file record location because it requires finding of bytes matching a particular F verb patch line prior to installing a D verb patch Again the actual patch code can be either hexadecimal bytes or an ASCII string This type of patch line does not extend the file and is applied directly to the record of the file Because no identification of the existence of this patch will be placed in the file this type of patch cannot be removed by the YANK parameter however the REMOVE parameter can be used to un install a D verb patch that was installed with the appropriate required matching of F verb patch lines If you must attempt to install a D verb patch line without using a corresponding F verb patch line you will need to specify the parameter OPTION N when invoking the patch command This allows you to force or inhibit the
160. be used to position the cursor for additional edits To exit the Hex modify mode the lt BREAK gt key must be pressed To modify a byte 1 Position the cursor over the desired relative byte in the record 2 Enter the hex digits that you wish to overwrite the current information with As digits are entered the previous hex digits will be replaced by the digits entered from the keyboard The first hex digit entered will modify the first hex digit in the byte and the second hex digit entered will modify the second hex digit in the byte After an entire byte has been modified the cursors will move to the next byte in the record Note no changes are made to the disk only to the edit buffer To make changes to disk see Save lt S gt lt ENTER gt Save the contents of the current edit buffer to disk The current record pointed to by FED will be overwritten by the contents of the edit buffer E T FED Utility Command Any changes made after the initial read of the record will be written to disk FED Search Commands Note The search commands described below may cause the information in the edit buffer to be overwritten by information contained in subsequent records of the file If edits have been made to the information in the edit buffer they should be saved to the disk prior to issuing a search command In most cases you should issue a B command prior to performing a search This will assure that the entire file will be sea
161. booting driver onto a system disk which has been formatted in dual density It s syntax is SOLE d d references the drive containing the dual density disk if not specified it will default to 0 The Model I Radio Shack BOOT ROM only supports booting from a diskette with a single density track 0 thus a special dual density system disk is needed to boot a double density DOS disk The Model I FORMAT ulility will format a double density disk with a single density cylinder 0 when both the DDEN and SYSTEM parameters are specified This assumes that the double density disk driver FDUBL has been installed After the operating system has been moved to the dual ARTSY diskette the booting driver is applied by using SOLE If your Model I is equipped with a double density adaptor you may wish to make a double density boot disk either one or two sided using the following procedure 1 Boot the DOS system disk and issue the command FDUBL Tandy Percom choosing one of the two parameters depending on the type of adaptor present in your machine Note that FDUBL defaults to the Tandy parameter 2 Place a blank disk in drive 1 arid issue the command FORMAT 1 SYSTEM and respond to the queries with the desired diskette configuration data 211 SETKI Library Command 3 Move the files from the system disk to the newly formatted diskette with the command BACKUP 0 1 SYS INV 4 Save your configuration by issuing t
162. by the BOOT process Depressing lt FI gt or lt I gt instructs the hardware to load DOS from a supported hard disk lt F2 gt or lt 2 gt from a floppy disk lt F3 gt or lt 3 gt specifies a Model III emulation mode which forces a load of a special MODELx III ROM image file lt P gt prompts for another disk which contains the image file lt L gt forces a new load of the image file and lt N gt mandates no load of an image file Finally lt ENTER gt is used to over ride 4P hard floppy automatic boot search procedures to force floppy booting thus if you use lt ENTER gt you will need to release the key then re depress lt ENTER gt to inhibit the automatic breakable AUTO command invocation 61 BUILD Library Command BUILD This command allows the user to build a file of desired character strings and save this file under any valid filespec BUILD is in the system mainly to build ASCII files for use with the DO KSM and PATCH features of DOS although you may build files containing any characters X 00 to AFF with the HEX parameter The syntax is BUILD filespec JCL Hex Append filespec is any valid DOS filespec PENG optional parameter that allows appending the BUILD data to the end of existing files Hex optional parameter allowing a packed hexadecimal format only The BUILD command is used to create a file or append to an existing file a series of commands comments or character strings entered
163. c Start a End a Tra a Ascil ETX d filespec is any valid filespec Ascii is an optional parameter for an ASCII dump End a is the ending address of the memory block ETX d optional End of Text marker for ASCII dump Start a is the starting address of the memory block Tra a is the transfer address or execution point The DUMP command writes an exact image of the specified memory locations to a disk file in load module or ASCII format default file extensions are CIM for non ASCII dumps and TXT for ASCII dumps The following restrictions are placed on the DUMP command addresses START a The memory block must start above address X 5500 for Model TIHI use or above address X 2FFF for Model 4 use END a The ending address must be greater than or equal to the starting address T TRA a The transfer address TRA may be any valid address If not specified the TRA will be a return to DOS Addresses may be entered in either decimal or hexadecimal format Hex addresses must be in the form X aaaa The ASCII and ETX parameters are used to dump memory to a pure ASCII file Address loading information is not present in the file and the file cannot be loaded by the system loader The file is identical to the file 135 DUMP Library Command structure of most word processor systems such as SCRIPSIT Following the last dump character an End of Text ETX character is written This character is normally an X 03 but may be chan
164. ce JL Once set a log of all commands entered or received will be sent to the specified file or device along with a time stamp Note that the time stamp will be determined from the setting of the system s real time clock see the TIME command If a fitespec is used the default extension will be JBL Setting JL will use high memory The RESET JL command will terminate the JobLog and close any associated disk file If JL is set again the previous high memory allocation will be re used To view the contents of a JobLog disk file you must first RESET JL so the file will be closed You may wish to add a trailing exclamation point 1 to the end of the filespec so that constant EOF maintenance will be invoked see the filespec definition in the GLOSSARY The LIST command will allow you to list the contents of the file to the screen or to the printer Note that if an existing filespec is used when setting JL any information sent to the JobLog file will be appended to the end of the file You may wish to send the information to a device such as PR rather than a file In this case a devspec rather than a fitespec would be used in the command line when setting JL to its driver 255 Keyboard Driver Program KI DVR The DOS Version 5 KI DVR program will enable enhanced keyboard features The syntax is SET KI TO KI DVR Type JkI Delay d Rate n Delay d Sets the delay until the first repeat to d
165. ces have been affected After any changes are made to the system the DEVICE command will show the memory address where each of the hardware devices is going to enter the first driver or filter dealing with that device as well as the interaction between devices and or files Issuing the DEVICE command will also update disk information in the drive code table in the following manner Each diskette in a currently enabled disk drive will be examined for number of cylinders sides density and location of the directory cylinder If a drive is enabled but contains no diskette the device table entry for that drive will not change The LOG utility program will perform the same function but for a single drive only If the device command should hang up or return totally incorrect drive information it is because the drive code table does not contain the proper size and location of your drives The physical location and size 5 25 or 8 must be correct for the device command to log on the drives If hard drives are enabled in your system the number of heads and the starting head number for each logical drive must have been properly set with the appropriate driver program Should you have a problem invoking the DEVICE command reboot DOS with the lt CLEAR gt key held down If using special hardware use the SYSTEM DRIVE DRIVER command to set the proper drive configuration for your system After assuring the drive information is correct with th
166. cess certain DOS functions without having to be at the DOS Ready prompt The syntax is FILTER KI USING MINIDOS FLT Because the MiniDOS filter uses the lt CLEAR gt key as a special control key the KI DVR program must be set before the MiniDOS filter is applied The MiniDOS filter allows the keyboard driver to intercept certain keyboard inputs and immediately act on them Note that the filter will reside in high memory If KI is reset the MiniDOS filter will re use its initial memory allocation if activated again Once the MiniDOS filter is applied pressing the lt CLEAR gt lt SHIFT gt and the specified alphabetic key will cause the following lt C gt Toggle the CLOCK display on or off lt D gt Enter the system DEBUGger if activated lt F gt Display FREE space for all active drives lt K gt Kill a file lt P gt Send a character to a line printer lt gt Display a disk s directory lt R gt Repeat the last DOS command lt T gt Issue a Top Of Form to the line printer When the MiniDOS filter intercepts one of these keys it will immediately execute the associated function These keys are active inside any program that uses the DOS keyboard driver including BASIC When the function has been completed control will be returned to the calling program as though no key had been pressed For this reason if some of these functions are executed from the DOS level the DOS Ready prompt will
167. cessed by the RS 232 driver and then presented to the line printer Since the ECHO parameter E was specified each character will also be echoed to the screen Prior to executing this command the CL device must have been set to an appropriate serial driver COPY KI TO KEYIN NOW 0 95 COPY Library Command This would allow the sending of all keyboard entries to the disk where they would be stored in a file named KEYIN NOW If the file already exists it will be written over Because the characters that are typed are going directly to the file they will not appear on the screen To view the characters specify the ECHO parameter To terminate this copy you should depress the lt BREAK gt so The file will then be closed and DOS Ready will appear COPY ASCII TXT 0 TO PR This command will copy the contents of the file ASCII TXT to the line printer Although this command is functional it would give the same output as would the LIST command with the P parameter The copy in this example will terminate automatically when the end of the file is reached Examples of copying with the X parameter The command COPY filespec d X is similar to a regular copy except that the X parameter will allow transferring a file from one diskette to another without requiring an DOS system present on any disk involved in the copy The colon and drive number are optional so that you can choose to copy a file on some drive other tha
168. cimal characters to replace the current contents Pressing the SPACE BAR will then enter the new characters into memory This operation will automatically advance to the next memory location and allow you to continue entering characters until the lt ENTER gt or lt X gt key is pressed If aaaa is omitted the current memory modification address will be used Command F Fill Memory The command syntax is Faaaa bbbb cc lt ENTER gt This command will fill a block of memory with a specified byte The parameter aaaa is the first address to be filled bbbb is the last address to be filled and cc is the specified byte to fill the locations with Command G Go to an Address and Invoke The command syntax is Gaaaa lt ENTER gt Gaaaa bkp1 bkp2 lt ENTER gt This command goes to a specified address and begins execution The parameter aaaa designates a specified address If it is omitted the PC contents are used Bkpl and bkp2 are optional breakpoint addresses They will cause execution to stop at the specified breakpoint One or both may be specified The breakpoints must be in RAM memory All breakpoints are automatically removed whenever you return to debug No more than two breakpoints are allowed at the same time If you have entered DEBUG from Model I II BASIC typing lt G gt lt ENTER gt will return you to BASIC For Model I I use typing lt G402D gt lt ENTER gt or lt O gt lt ENTER gt from the extended debugger wilt
169. command 45 ATTRIB Library Command ATTRIB disks ATTRIB d Lock Unlock Mpw s Name s PW s d is an optional drivespec defaults to 0 Lock Locks all visible non system files not currently protected by changing their password to the master password of the disk Mpw Specifies the disk s current master password Name Allows changing the disk name PW Allows changing the disk master password Unlock This removes the password from all visible non system files as long as their password matches the master password of the disk The ATTRIB command will allow you to change the disk name the disk master password and the password protection of all visible and non system files Any time the ATTRIB command is used you will be prompted for the disk s master password if it is other than PASSWORD and not specified with the MPW parameter ATTRIB 0 UNLOCK NAME MYDISK This command will remove all passwords from the user s visible non system files on drive 0 as long as the files current password matches the master password of the disk It will also change the disk s name to MYDISK Since the current master password was not specified with the MPW parameter you will be prompted for it before this command is actually invoked if it is other than PASSWORD ATTRIB 1 NAME DATA PW SECRET MPW BOSSMAN 46 Lo ee ees ees Wage es ees dees Hee ie et ATTRIB Library Co
170. commands allow the use of partspecs partial file specifications and not partspecs A partspec is any or all parts of a filespec generally excluding the password For example the full filespec for the DOS utility REPAIR i Is REPAIR CMD UTILITY 0 Some examples of partspecs would be 11 L S DOS User Manual REPAIR CMD REP C REP 0 R C REPAIR CMD 0 A not partspec is simply a partspec preceded by a dash character such as REPAIR CMD etc Also a not partspec would be used to exclude a certain file or group of files from a command while a partspec is used to include a file or group of files For example using a partspec of REP would find a match with all of the following files REPAIR CMD REPAIR BAS REPAIR ASM REPEAT BAS REPRESEN REP 102 3 Since some of the DOS commands allow the use of partspecs you can use the filename and extension fields to create files with common attributes and then access them as a group DOS also creates or uses default extensions during some operations Other operations can then use these default extensions when searching for a file The parameters section of the syntax block will give a very short description of the allowable parameters for the command This description will generally be very brief as a complete explanation will be given in detail in the text of that section Please note that many command parameters may have a default value if they are not specified For example
171. computer under the DOS system There may be a file named README TXT on the DOS disk Disk 2 for Model I If so this file will contain important information which may not appear in this printed documentation You should read this file by issuing the command LIST README Nomenciature used in this Reference Manual Throughout this reference manual illustrations of communications with the operating system are presented in various forms These are EXAMPLE font used to depict keyboard entries typed by you Message font used to indicate a message displayed by the DOS screen font used in presentation of display screens optional square brackets surround optional keyboard entries onloff a vertical bar is used to indicate either of two permissible entries only one of which may be entered at a time Using this manual The DOS User s manual is set up to be easily used It is divided into several different sections The first section is composed of general information about the DOS system It contains the introduction to DOS as well as descriptions of the commands and files available The second section contains reference material on all the DOS library and utility commands These commands are the heart of the operating system and provide the link between the user and the computer They will be 1 L S DOS User Manual listed in alphabetical order Another section contains device DRIVER and FILTER programs for some of the d
172. control will be returned to DOS To inspect all the keywords contained within a file type HELP filespec lt ENTER gt This will list all of the keywords within the named file If the previous example had been HELP DOS lt ENTER gt a list of the available keywords would have been displayed Once again the display will pause if necessary After each screen full of keywords the prompt lt ENIER gt lt BREAK gt or type keyword will appear At this time if lt ENTER gt is pressed the next screen full of keywords will be displayed If lt BREAK gt is pressed HELP will abort and control will return to DOS A keyword may be entered and the information relating to that keyword will be displayed If the specified keyword was not in the called file the list of all keywords would display again to indicate what was available within that file To list all of the help files presently available on the system merely type HELP lt ENTER gt 164 fess oc Loses i a ae L Lo HELP Utility Command This will search all drives on line for files ending in the HLP extension and list them to the video display For example Help Categories presently on line are DOS HLP 1 BASIC HLP 1 Press ENTER to exit or enter calegory The function of the HELP command may be altered by specifying one or more of the following optional parameters P V B R or S The P parameter sends the output to the PR device
173. cs would also be displayed The wee mask ts used to mask out leading characters in a filename or extension The commands DIR uUP 0 DIR CK 0 DIR BACK 5 D 0 would again all display the file BACKUP CMD along with any other files that match the criteria Using wec s after a partspec will have no effect on the command All files that meet the specified leading criteria will be displayed regardless of the number of other characters in the filename or extension A wee may also be used in the middle of a partspec For cxanipic the commands DIR BSCK 0 DIR BS P 0 DIR BA C D 0 would all display the file BACK UP CMD along with other matching files Using filespecs and partspecs Entering the not symbol the minus sign in front of a filespec or partspec declares it to be a not filespec or not partspec The specs are used to exclude files from a directory display The same rules concerning tlespecs partspecs and the wcc mask apply exactly the same for specs as for normal file and part specs For example the commands DIR BA 0 DIR B K 0 DIR CMD 0 DIR D 0 would show all files on drive 0 except for BACKUP CMD and any other files that match the spec criteria 127 DISKCOPY Utility Command DISKCOPY amp QFB This utility is designed to allow for a backup with format to be performed _ Only floppy drives may be used the source may be a MemDISK and the backup performed must be
174. cters directly into memory starting at address aaaa The current contents of the address will be shown and the command will wait for the next keyboard character After the character is entered you will advance to the next memory location To exit this command use the lt ENTER gt key The lt SPACE gt character cannot be entered with this command Pressing the lt SPACE gt will advance one memory location without changing the contents of the current location If aaaa is omitted the current memory modification address will be used 11 RO eee Wes We De i L DEBUG Library Command Command U Update Screen Display The command syntax is U This command will dynamically update the display showing any active background tasks It may be cancelled by holding down any key Command V Compare Memory Blocks The command syntax is Vaaaa bbbb nn lt ENTER gt This command will compare the block of memory starting at aaaa to the block of memory at 6665 The compare will be for nn bytes If the display is in the register mode the first byte of memory displayed will be set to the first location in the block starting at aaaa which does not match the block at 6666 The current memory modification address used by the M E and F commands will be reset to the corresponding byte in the second block Command W Word Search The command syntax is Waaaa dddd lt ENTER gt This command will search
175. d during a disk function the error number will appear on the screen surrounded by asterisks The error indication will repeat each time another error occurs To abort the disk function hold down the lt ENTER gt key Example 0 R 7000 This example would read the directory track from the disk in drive 0 The information read would be stored in memory starting at location X 7000 Example 0 7000 This command would write the directory track on drive 0 using the information stored in memory starting at location X 7000 The assures that the proper Data Address Mark will be written to the directory cylinder 114 eee Agee eee L A ae Feu DEVICE Library Command DEVICE This command will display all logical devices which are in use and the devices and files to which they are currently pointing and or attached to It will also log on the diskettes currently in the available disk drives by updating the Drive Code Table to show the number of cylinders sides the density and the location of the directory track The syntax is DEVICE Byteio sw Drives sw Status sw P sw N sw Byteio Displays the byte I O portion of the data The default is ON V5 OFF V6 Drives Displays the drive portion of the data The default is ON Set non stop display mode Assumed if P is selected If ON duplicates the display to the screen and the printer The default is OFF Status _ Displays the o
176. d for it before the fonnatting begins Paraineters not passed in the format command line will default as follows NAME will default to BOSBISK TATA DISK MPW will default to PASSWORD DENSITY will use different default values depending on the hardware Model II and MAX 80 will default to double density Model I Radio Shack interface will default to double density if there is a doubler board and driver program in use Otherwise it will default to single density DOS version 6 defaults to DDEN SIDES will default to 1 side CYLinders will default to the value set with the SYSTEM DRIVE CYL command and stored in the system information sectors on drive 0 If no value has been set the default will be 40 cylinders for the Model HI and 4 35 cylinders for Model I 5 25 drives and 77 cylinders for Model 8 drives STEP rate will default to the value set with the SYSTEM BSTEP command also stored in the system information sectors If no value has been set the defaults will be 30 40 ms on the Model I and 6 ms on the Model II and 4 These values represent the step 155 FORMAT Utility Command rates in milliseconds 5 0 6ms 1 12ms 2 20ms 3 30 40ms 8 0 3ms 1 6 ms 2 10ms 3 15 20ms The QUERY parameter defaults to YES and you are normally prompted to enter all parameters If you are sure that the default values will produce the exact format you desire you may specify the parameter Q N to bypass alt par
177. d joins amp together multiple logical I O devices The syntax is LINK devspec TO devspec2 devspec is any currently enabled logical device This command is used to join together two logical devices Both devices must be currently enabled Once linked any output sent to devspec will also be sent to devspec2 Any input requested from devspecl may also be supplied by devspec2 The user is cautioned about making multiple links to the same device s as it is possible to create endless loops and lock up the system The order of the devices in the link command line is important since output to devspec2 will not be sent to devspecl nor can input requested from devspec2 be supplied by devspecl Also using the ROUTE library command on devspec will destroy its link to devspec2 but routing devspec2 is perfectly acceptable Once linked devices can be un linked by the command RESET devspec A global RESET or a reboot will also un link devices See the RESET and BOOT commands for further information Following are some examples of the use of LINK LINK DO PR This command will link the video display to the line printer All output sent to the display devspecl will also be sent to the line printer devspec2 Once linked the line print r must be enabled if it is physically hooked to the system i e the cable is connected to both the printer connector and the printer If the printer becomes de selected or faults out of pap
178. d phrase or command The extension of the filespec must be specified as KSM to see the individual key prompts The actual display will be 262 ne ey KSM Filter Program i gt and will continue up to Z gt Once all 26 characters have been assigned the file will be closed and the BUILD will be terminated The BUILD may also be terminated any time before reaching 7 gt by pressing the lt BREAK gt key in response to any character prompt The following rules will govern the entry of phrases during the BUILD Each phrase should be terminated by pressing lt ENTER gt This does not place an lt ENTER gt character at the end of the phrase but merely signifies the end of the phrase e The ENTER parameter is used to determine what character KSM will see as an embedded lt ENTER gt key If not specificd it defaults to a semicolon The value for enter may be entered as a decimal value between 0 and 255 or as a character enclosed m quotes such as Whenever this character is encountered in a KSM phrase it will be translated into an lt ENTER gt e Length of phrases should be limited to 63 or 79 characters for DOS command lines and 255 characters for BASIC lines The BUILD HEX parameter may be used to create characters or strings that are not directly available from the keyboard The KI DVR program docs allow the full ASCII character set to be generated However if you wish to change key assignments
179. d to record the tracks and sectors where a file is stored DOS uses an area of the disk 3 L S DOS User Manual called the directory This directory is usually placed on the center cylinder of the disk during the formatting process FILES How information is stored The most important thing to remember about disk storage is the term file Any information be it a program or data is stored as a file This means that the information is written to the data areas of the disk and the name of the file and the actual location of the data are stored in the directory No matter what kind of file you are dealing with the file name must use the following format FILENAME EXT PASSWORD D FILENAME Up to eight alphabetic or numeric characters the first of which must be alphabetic All files must have a filename EXT An optional field called the file extension If used it can contain up to three alphabetic or numeric characters the first of which must be alphabetic An extension can be of great use to identify and deal with certain types of files and it is strongly recommended that all files you create be given extensions PASSWORD This is an optional field that will assign a protection status to a file If used it can be up to eight alphabetic or numeric characters the first of which must be alphabetic D This is an optional field called the drive specification It is used to specify the particular drive number the file is
180. date cyl d h fffft f SSSSS S mmm nnn DIR Library Command drive number name of the disk date of the disk number of cylinders on the disk disk density S single D double H hard Number of heads on the disk Amount of free space in K Total formatted space in K Number of free file slots Total number of file slots The lines which contain filenames describe all information about a directory entry These fields are described as follows filename ext SIP C pp This is the name field of a file This is the extension field of a file Attributes indicating Sys Inv Prot PaDS and Mod S indicates the file is a system file I indicates the file has been declared invisible P indicates the file has an OWNER password indicates that the file is either a Partitioned Data Set or a SubDISK file is called the mod flag and indicates the file has been modified since it was last backed up The characters I P S and may appear separately or in any combination to show the file s actual status DOS version 6 may display a C in the attributes field to indicate that a file was established with the CREATE library command A question mark will indicate that the file is either open or was left open by a program see the RESET command This field shows the protection level of the file and can be set or changed with the ATTRIB command The protection level displayed could be NO EX RE
181. de I II general purpose disk to disk tape to disk and disk to tape utility that provides the capability of appending two or more command CMD CIM OBJ files load modules or SYSTEM tape files that can be loaded with the BASIC SYSTEM command Inherent in its capability of performing I O to disk or tape are the following functions Append two or more COMMAND disk files or SYSTEM cassette tape files into one file This is useful to concatenate two or more separately assembled OBJECT code files concatenate two Or more non contiguous blocks of code or also couple two or more programs together so they load together Offset a tape or disk file so that it loads into a region other than originally programmed A driver routine is optionally appended that moves it back to its original load region User options provide for disabling the clock interrupts and keyboard debounce routines in the event that the SYSTEM program would have overlayed the debouttce routine of DOS SYSTEM cassette tape files can be created from non contiguous blocks of memory For the disk user during input of COMMAND files the load address range of each block of code is displayed to the CRT and optionally to a line printer The file s transfer address or entry point is also displayed Invoking CMDFILE At DOS Ready simply type CMDFILE The program will load and invoke 67 te re r r rr i TL LL AT SE LE SEI AN CMDFILE Utility Comm
182. del I II HI and 4 computers provided the floppy drive types are supported by hardware You will discover that this DOS reference manual will not answer questions about your computer s operation consult your computer owner s manual for hardware reference material This manual contains all reference material for the disk operating system to get the greatest value out of your computer system it will be necessary to read and study both your computer s hardware reference manual and this DOS reference manual This section will deal with generalized conventions that exist throughout the operating environment It will also give an overall view of the total DOS system Let s start by listing some of the hardware related features that you will find when using DOS e In DOS version 5 the keyboard will originally use the ROM driver On the Model I this will not provide key debounce key repeat type ahead or any other advanced feature The Model III has debounce key repeat and screen print built into the ROM driver the supplied KJ DVR provides enhanced keyboard features such as type ahead e In DOS version 6 the keyboard driver is provided as part of the resident operating system DOS version 5 comes with a keyboard driver program called KI DVR The use of this driver is mandatory if functions such as key repeat type ahead screen print printer spooler KSM MiniDOS LCOMM or the SVC table are to be used It is strongly recom
183. disable the prompt for the time on power up or reset You must not have a write protected disk in drive 0 if using this command The switch is either ON or OFF as follows 231 SYSTEM Library Command ON Enables the time prompt on power up or reset If the switch is not specified ON is assumed OFF Disables the prompt for the time on power up or reset SYSTEM TRACE ON OFF This command will display the contents of the Z 80 processor Program Counter on the video display in the upper right corner The display will be a hexadecimal address Any information normally displayed on the top line will be overwritten by the trace display The display is constantly updated as a high priority background task The TRACE command is primarily useful during debugging of assembly language programs The trace display will hait if an assembly language program disables the interrupts or if a BASIC program Model I only does a CMD T Doing a CMD R will restart the trace display The allowable commands are TRACE ON Tums the TRACE on TRACE OFF Tums the TRACE off TRACE Turns the TRACE on which is the default parameter Note TRACE along with some other operations may not function properly on the Model III when the display is in the wide character mode SYSTEM TYPE switch This command will turn the task processing of the keyboard driver type ahead feature either on or off DOS version 5 must first have set KI to t
184. diskette and will remain consistent on any backup copy made from the master To view your initial configuration type in the command DEVICE at the DOS Ready prompt Be sure no configuration file has been loaded Do not have diskettes other than your master DOS diskette in any drive at this time or you will not get a true picture of the default drive configuration DOS reserves a certain area of memory called the Drive Code Table referred to as the DCT to store information about the disk drive configurations This drive code table is used by DOS any time access is attempted to a disk drive The exact details of the drive code table will not normally concern the average user DOS provides features such as type ahead the spooler and L COMM that use the hardware interrupt clock Because a disk rotational speed of 300 RPM may be evenly divisible by the interrupt clock rate from time to time it may appear that the disk drives go to sleep for 10 to 30 seconds To avoid this we recommend that the drives be set to run at 302 303 RPM This will assure optimum disk operation without degrading the overall reliability of the system Alternatively you may use the SYSTEM SMOOTH command to alter the DOS disk driver in those cases where it is not practical to adjust the floppy disk drive As stated above issuing a DEVICE library command will show all currently enabled disk drives Two of the display areas are very important to understand
185. drives The SYSTEM command is used to execute the driver program SYSTEM DRIVE d DISABLE DRIVER name name The name of the driver provided with your DOS FLOPPY LX80 MODx x 1 or 3 or MAX80 d the new logical drive number 1 to 7 x 1 or 3 depending on the computer model This driver program is provided to allow you to change the logical numbers of your 3 5 5 25 and 8 where applicable floppy drives It will primarily be uscd when running a hard drive Used in conjunction with the SYSTEM SYSTEM command it will allow you to set up your hard and floppy drives to any desired logical number sequence If you have already defined a drive with the SYSTEM command you must disable the drive with the DISABLE option before you redefine the device Upon execution the following prompt or prompts will be displayed Enter drive code 0 5 1 8 Enter drive 1 0 address lt 1 4 gt The drive code prompt will be asked if your computer supports 8 drives The drive I O address requested wilt be a number between 1 and 4 and will correspond to the drive s physical location on the drive cable On the Model I the first physical drive on the cable witl be 1 the second will be 2 etc On the Model II and 4 the lower built in floppy will be 1 the upper built in floppy will be 2 and the two external drives will be 3 and 4 The driver program must be installed using the SET command If you attempt to invoke it as a command fr
186. dy IGNORE Data Terminal Ready ON Ring Indicator IGNORE Request To Send OFF In order to be able to use SETCOM you must first install the serial driver using the SET command Additional information is provided in the section documenting the serial driver 209 SETKI Library Command SETKI The DOS version 6 SETKI command is used to adjust the keyboard reaction of key repeat when you press a key The syntax is SETKI parms Default Returns the parameters to their default values Rale r Sets the repeat rate as r F is a number in the range 1 127 2 is the default value Query Prompts you to enter new values for RATE and WAIT Wait w _ Sets the initial delay between the time a key is first pressed and the first repeat of that key as w W isa number in the range 10 127 22 is the default SETKI changes the keyboard repeat key response If you do not specify a parameter the current delay and repeat rate settings are displayed SETKI WAIT 15 lt ENTER gt This example sets the delay rate to 15 SETK lt ENTER gt This example displays the current delay and repeat rate settings in the format Wait 15 Rate 2 Note Both the RATE and WAIT parameters use modulo 128 For example entering 138 has the same effect as entering 10 210 bic ke dhe Le b Go bh Lo hes Lesa ee SETKI Library Command SOLE SOLE isa DOS version 5 Model I utility which is used to install a double density
187. e According to these rules using either DO command line 1 or 2 would cause the execution comment in the TEST JCL example to be written to the SYSTEM JCL file Using DO command line 3 would bypass any lines between the IF and the END This type of logical decision capability allows a single JCL file to be created and lets the computer operator pick a course of action by mercly typing in the same DO filespec command with different tokens For example consider the following JCL example which shall be referred to as START JCL the first line is an execution comment as previously explained in the SIMPLE JCL EXECUTION section START JCL for program start up SET FF FORMS FLT DOS 6 FILTER PR FF DOS 6 296 eee Regen Ees ia Litas Batch Processing Job Contro Language FILTER PR PR FLT DOS 5 F PRI FORMS CHARS 80 END F PR2 FORMS CHARS 132 END Let us assume that these are the first lines in a JCL file that will start some applications program running The JCL installs the forms filter while the two conditional blocks let the operator define the number of characters per line for printed output via the FORMS command The DO commands to accomplish this would be DO START PRI DO START PR2 When the first DO command is issued the IF PR1 will test true and the 80 character FILTER command will be written to the SYSTEM JCL file Because PR2 was not specified the IF PR2
188. e X nnnn type format The PATCH utility will allow you to change information in a file in one of two ways If the file is in load module format CMD type files it may be patched by memory load location Any type of file may be patched by the direct disk modify method A patch is applied to a file either by typing in the patch code directly from the command line or by creating an ASCII file consisting of the patch information Either the BUILD command or the TED text editor may be used to create PATCH files A word processor such as SCRIPSIT may be used provided the file is a pure ASCII file with SCRIPSIT use the S A type of save Also SCRIPSIT sometimes leaves extra spaces after the last carriage return in a file To prevent this position the cursor just after the last carriage return and do a delete to end of text to remove any extra spaces It is desirable to use some logical method of naming patch files The filename of the patch code file could be followed by a letter or a number 184 anes A PATCH Utility Command that would be advanced as different patches become available for the same program For example BASICI FIX BASIC2 FIX SYS7A FIX and SYS7B FIX Although not required it is strongly suggested that all patch code files use the extension FIX This will make it easier to use these files as that is the default file extension that the PATCH utility will use Patch Line Syntax For PATCH to install properly
189. e are applied If P1 is was not entered on the DO command line the ELSE sets P2 to true and applies the 132 character print mode even if P2 was not entered The compiling continues writing the BASIC line the selected PROGRAM line and the STOP to the SYSTEM JCL file As previously mentioned the SET macro can be used to reduce the number of tokens that have to be entered on the DO command line Consider the following SYSOPT JCL example Establish DOS system options F ALL SET KITY SET PR SET MINI SET SRES END F KIALL SET KITY SET MINI END F KITY set ki ki dvr type DOS 5 END F PR filter pr pr fit chars 80 DOS 5 END 7 F MINI filter ki minidos DOS 5 END F SRES system sysres 2 system sysres 3 system sysres 8 DOS 5 system sysres 10 END This example shows how many different DOS options can be established with a JCL file The way it is structured the operator can choose any or all 302 le ls Wee Wee Bees lee ioe Hees Wee Le ee ee fo Batch Processing Job Controt Language of the options Without the use of SET it would be necessary to enter four separate tokens to establish all of the options By using a conditional block the single token ALL can be made to set all of the necessary tokens true Also the token KIALL can be used to set only the two keyboard related options Notice the use of upper and lowe
190. e device command save this configuration with the SYSGEN or SYSTEM SYSGEN command 118 L a ee DEVICE Library Command The Options line will show you the system options currently active These options are usually established with the FILTER LINK ROUTE SET SPOOL and SYSTEM library commands These options vary with the system implementation and can be Fast Slow Indicates whether the computer is switched to a fast or slow speed Forms PR Indicates that the forms filter is resident Graphic JKL KI KSM Memdisk MiniDOS Smooth Spool Type Verify Indicates that the screen print function will pass graphic characters to the printer instead of translating them to periods Indicates that the DOS version 5 screen print module is resident Indicates that the DOS version 5 enhanced keyboard driver is resident Indicates that the DOS version 6 KeySuwoke Multiply filter is resident Indicates that the DOS version 6 RAM disk is active Indicates that the DOS version 5 minidos filter is resident _ Indicates that the floppy disk smooth option is active Indicates that the system printer spooler is resident Indicates that keyboard type ahead is active Indicates that the DOS version 6 read after write verify function is active for disk writes You will also see which system overlays are currently resident in high memory See the SYSTEM SYSRES command for details on how
191. e display is set to include the specified address you will see vertical bars around that byte of memory The address and current byte will appear in the lower left of the screen To modify the byte enter in the desired characters Pressing the lt SPACE gt bar will modify the byte and 11 a EON Lo Le ie E ee bem tee ee DEBUG Library Command move to the next address Pressing the lt ENTER gt key will modify the byte and exit from the M command Pressing the lt X gt key will exit from the M command without modifying the current byte If aaaa is omitted the current memory modification address shown by the vertical bars will be used Command N Next Load Block The command syntax is Naaaa lt ENTER gt This command will position the vertical cursor bars to the next load block This instruction is used to move logically through a block of memory that has been loaded directly from disk using DEBUG To use this instruction you must position the location bars over the file type byte at the beginning of any block Press N lt ENTER gt and DEBUG will advance to the next load block header The position of this header is determined from the length byte of the load block Command O Return to DOS The command syntax is O lt ENTER gt This command is the normal way to return to DOS Ready Command P Print Memory The command syntax is Paaaa bbbb lt ENTER gt This comma
192. e file is totally received and the file is finished writing to the disk close the file by resetting the FR with a lt CLEAR gt lt 6 gt followed by lt CLEAR gt lt Q gt This will do an FR OFF a DTD OFF followed by aclose of the file just received Ieee eee Tee eee He ee Lo CONV Utility Command CONV The CONV utility will allow you to move files from a Model IH TRSDOS diskette onto an DOS formatted diskette Two drives are required Model I owners must have double density hardware to use this utility The syntax is CONV s Dir CONV parispec w wcc s d parm parm S is the source drive It cannot be drive 0 d is the destination drive Requests a directory of files on the source disk Convert invisible files Convert files only if they do not exist on the destination disk Convert files only if they already exist on the destination disk Query each file before it is converted Convert system files Convert visible files Parameters VIS INV SYS If none of these parameters are specified all file groups will be considered Specifying only one parameter will automatically exclude the other two Thus to move all files except the system files you would specify both VIS and INV 89 CONV Utility Command Parameters NEW OLD QUERY The NEW parameter is used to move files onto the destination disk only if they do not already exist The OLD parameter will move only those files
193. e file name This is because the extension of filespec2 will default to DAT thereby creating the same filename for filespec2 and filespecl which are the same file RENAME FO FF This version 6 DOS command will rename the FO device to the new name FF 196 A I ee e A RR RA r 1 Lo ace REPAIR Utility Command REPAIR REPAIR is a utility program to update and correct information on certain types of diskettes to make them usable by DOS The syntax is REPAIR d d is any currently enabled drive On the Model Ill or 4 REPAIR must be used to read any non DOS disk created on the Model I or any Model I LDOS earlier than LDOS 5 0 2 You must use the CONV utility to copy programs from TRSDOS 1 2 or TRSDOS 1 3 disks to DOS disks you should never use the REPAIR utility on them Disks created under other non TRSDOS Model IH operating systems may need to be repaired before being read On the Modei I it will not generally be necessary to REPAIR a disk to read it However other operating systems may mark the location of the disk s directory track in different manners If you are having trouble reading a disk the REPAIR command may be necessary REPAIR will perform the following functions e Update the Data Address Mark DAM for the directory cylinder to an X F8 e Read enable the directory file DIR SYS e Check and correct the excess cylinder byte e Set the granules per cylinder byte GA
194. e is with data files or ASCII type text fites Files that are in load module format such as CMD or CIM type files cannot be appended property using the APPEND command to append these types of files refer to the CMDFILE utility BASIC programs cannot be appended unless saved in the ASCH mode The syntax ts APPEND filespec TO filespec2 STRIP APPEND devspec TO filespec ECHO STRIP filespecl are valid DOS file specifications including filespec2 drivespecs devspec is any valid active device capable of generating characters Echo is an optional parameter that will echo the characters to the screen when appending a device to a file is an optional parameter that will backspace the destination file one byte before the append begins APPEND copies the contents of filel onto the end of file2 Filel is unaffected while file2 is extended to include the contents of fileli The files must each have the same LRL Logical Record Length or the append will be aborted with the error message Files have different LRLs and neither file will be touched For example suppose you have two customer lists stored in data files WESTCST DAT and EASTCST DAT You can add the WESTCST DAT file onto the end of EASTCST DAT file with the command 41 APPEND Library Command APPEND WESICST DAT 1 TO EASTCST DAT 0 EASTCST DAT wiil now be extended to include WESTCST DAT while WESTCST DAT will remain unchanged You can
195. e list of entries is displayed Cancels the blink feature when displaying information on the screen V5 Sends the help display information pau to the printer Cancels the use of reverse video when displaying information on the screen V6 Causes the search mode to be entered Cancels the automatic video screen restoration The DOS HLP file provides on line help information for DOS commands DOS version 5 also includes a BASIC HLP file which contains information on disk BASIC statements and functions The help screen is composed of e Brief description e Command Syntax e Parameter descriptions 163 HELP Utility Command The HELP displays use the following notations Optional arguments or parameters note that some Model I systems will display these characters as ff and gt l Alternative selection ONIOFF means ON or OFF lt gt Key combination you press For example to obtain HELP about the DOS LIB command at DOS Ready type HELP DOS LIB lt ENTER gt This will now access the file called DOS HLP and display the information filed under the keyword LIB The video display will remain until any character generating key is depressed If there is more information about the keyword than would fit on one screen pressing a key will cause more information to display and if necessary pause repeatedly until the information is exhausted At that time the video display is restored and
196. e output file will overlay the disk system s debounce routine between approximately 4300H and 4400H respond with a Y else respond with N The next query will be bypassed as the driver routine appendage dictates the transfer address Enter new transfer address or lt ENTER gt to use XXXX gt If you want to change the transfer address entry point you can enter the new address This is useful when appending two or more files since the transfer address used would default to the transfer address of the last file read in unless otherwise specified Output to disk or tape D 1 E C or lt ENTER gt to restart gt Again a response of E will exit the program while C will cancel the request and return you to the main query Just depressing lt ENTER gt will also return you to the main query Cancellation is available if you do not want to create an output file but rather just want to determine disk files load addresses If you want to create an output disk file respond with a D You will be prompted for the filespec with Enter filespec to write output gt After entering the filespec remember CMD will be used as a default extension the output file will be written to disk using VERIFY 72 bea oor bie Le ca o E CMDFILE Utility Command If you want to create an output tape file respond with a T You will be prompted to enter the filename with Enter tape file name gt
197. e printer is unavailable DOS version 6 generates the Device nol available error code Control will then be returned to whatever module called the printer driver By specifying SYSTEM PRTIME OFF you will disable any time out if the printer is unavailable the DOS will lock up The default is OFF PRTIME is configurable with the SYSGEN command This facility is applicable to version 5 only when the PR FLT is installed as it uses the printer driver resident within the filter SYSTEM RESTORE ON 1 OFf V6 This DOS version 6 parameter alters the boot up sequence to either restore all floppy disk drives to cylinder 0 RESTORE ON or leave all floppy drives other than drive 0 at the cylinder of their last access Restoring all floppy drives will speed up the first access performed SYSTEM SMOOTH ON OFF The SMOOTH sub command is provided for faster disk I O involving floppy drives aligned precisely to 300 rpm If smooth is turned on it alters the floppy disk driver so that the system interrupts are disabled earlier than what would otherwise occur This has the effect of providing faster I O with disk drives precisely aligned to 300 rpm where extra sector retries would be necessary and the drives may appear to go to sle p Note that when SMOOTH is turned ON you will not be able to type ahead during disk I O nor will you be able to effectively use dump to disk ON with L COMM even at 300 baud 228 tt A A ET pe A rtia
198. e the message MemDISK disabled memory now available MemDISK was disabled and was able to totally remove itself from the memory it was using If you receive the message MemDISK disabled Unable to reclaim high memory MemDISK was unable to reclaim high memory Bank 0 because another driver or filter was installed after MemDISK was set up and the other program is still in the way This is known as memory fragmentation If you need to use this area of memory then you must reset the system If you receive the message MemDISK disabled Unable to reclaim driver area MemDISK was disabled and was able to reclaim high memory or alternate bank memory but it could not reclaim the driver area Finally if you receive the message MemDISK disabled Unable to reclaim high memory and driver area MemDISK was disabled but it could not reclaim any memory Filters and drivers can be loaded into an area within DOS called I O driver low memory This area does not take away from the memory available for your programs However not all of the drivers and filters can fit into this area at the same time If there is no room left in low memory most of the drivers and filters can be automatically loaded into high memory Low memory works on a first come first served basis and MemDISK is the 268 MemDISK RAM Driver only driver or filter that must load into low memory Thus MemDISK should be installed before other drivers a
199. e thought of as a series of concentric circles starting at the outer edge of the diskette media and moving in towards the center These circles of information are referred to as tracks starting with track number O at the outer edge The number of tracks available on a diskette will depend on the type of disk drive you have purchased 7 The term sector refers to a space on a track that can hold 256 characters of data You will find the term byte is commonly used to refer to one character and thus a sector is referred to as 256 bytes The number of sectors available per track is dependent on the size 3 5 5 25 8 or hard of the disk and on the density specified when formatting the disk With DOS a double density floppy diskette will have approximately 80 more space available compared to a single density diskette with the same number of tracks Four sectors or 1024 bytes will be referred to as 1K standing for about one thousand bytes or characters The minimum allocation of disk space made when storing a file on a diskette is called a granule or gran The number of sectors that make up a gran will vary depending on the size and density of the diskette and the type of drive This basic format structure is used by DOS for any type of drive it supports 3 5 5 25 8 or hard disk Diskettes formatted by other operating systems may not be directly readable by DOS To keep track of the Gatien file names on the disk an
200. each line with six cylinders per line This disk has three granules per cylinder as it is a 5 25 double density disk The granules per cylinder will vary according to diskette size density and number of sides _ A granule will be represented as one of four characters period will represent an unused gran asterisk will represent a locked out gran floppy disks only XK will represent a used gran D will represent a gran used for the Directory tekn If the drive has more cylinders than can be displayed on a single screen you must press lt ENTER gt to advance to the next screen Also if the screen completely fills with the granule information the system will pause you must press lt ENTER gt to return to the DOS Ready prompt This will prevent the top line of the display from scrolling off the screen This display may also be sent to PR your printer by using the P parameter 162 SN ina acai aaa samcamaaaamaaagaaaa amass l E ken ecw kae HELP Utility Command HELP Utility This command displays help information It uses the DOS HLP file to present information about DOS commands Information is retrieved by entering commands of the form HELP filespec HLP keyword P V R S I filespec Is the name of an available help data file Designates a global search of all on line HLP files for the specified keyword keyword Is the name of one help file entry if omitted th
201. eatures such as type ahead and adjustable key repeat It also establishes the lt CLEAR gt key as a special control key This will be used by programs such as KSM and MiniDOS filters and the COMM communications program Certain other programs and commands such as the SPOOL command require that 27 L S DOS User Manual KI DVR be set for proper operation These requirements will be specified where necessary For DOS version 5 it is strongly recommended that the KI DVR program be active during normal operation It requires very little memory space and enables many functions not available if KI DVR is not used The address of the KI driver routine as shown with the DEVICE library command will be changed to a location in high memory if any of these functions are used or if KI is routed set or linked The DEVICE command will also show the currently selected keyboard options You are advised not to route or link the KI device unless you are extremely careful You may inadvertently remove all input to the system or introduce totally unwanted characters To send the KI characters to a specific device or file see the commands APPEND and COPY DO The Video Display The DO device is the video display If your computer is equipped with a lower case modification the power up video driver routine will include a lower case driver Note that the DO driver routine address will also change if DO is involved in a route set or link If
202. ec Entering the command DO FB S 1 D 2 would first pause the JCL and prompt you to insert a disk in drive 2 As you can see the substitution fields can be used in message lines and comments as well as in executable command lines After pressing lt ENTER gt the JCL would continue formatting the disk in drive 2 and then executing the backup command with drive 1 as the source drive and drive 2 as the destination drive Because the sign is used to mark the start of a substitution field some caution is necessary when trying to display a single in a comment or message Consider the following example PAUSE Insert a disk in drive 1 If the JCL file was execute only this line would be properly displayed However if the JCL were compiled an error would occur For this line to be properly displayed in a compiled JCL it would have to be written as 307 Batch Processing Job Control Language PAUSE Insert a disk into drive 1 The double pound sign is a special case and lets the JCL compiler know that you wish a single sign to be displayed and do not wish to start a substitution field Another practical use for substitution fields is copying password protected files from one drive to another In this example a group of files will be copied from drive 0 to a drive specified in the DO command Also the user will have to supply the proper password for the copies to work MOVE JCL file t
203. ed out or lower until the bottom limit _is determined 156 Pas FORMS Library Command FORMS This command allows you to display or alter the operating parameters of the forms filter PR FLT for Model I II FORMS FLT for Model 4 once the filter has been installed The syntax of the FORMS command is FORMS parms Default Sets all parms to defaults Addif Adds a line feed after a carriage return Chars n The number of characters per printed line Ffhard Use 12D for forin feed rather than fine feeds Indent n_Indents n spaces on lines longer than chars 0 Lines n The number of lines printed per page 66 Margin n Sets the left margin 0 Page n Sets physical page length 66 Query A Model 4 parameter which when used will have FORMS prompt you for each parameter entry Tab Expands tab characters to tab stops OFF XLATE X aabb Translates aa to bb 00 00 If the ADDLF parameter is specified a linefeed will be issued after Srey carriage return The CHARS parameter sets the number of characters that will be printed on each line It may be any integer between 1 and 255 157 FORMS Library Command If the FFHARD parameter is specified any form feed determined by the PAGE and LINES parameters will be sent as an X OC character rather than a series of linefeeds If you use this parameter be sure your printer will recognize the X OC character INDENT sets the number of spaces a line is to be inde
204. elected memory seems to be pre formatted as could be the case if you were re installing the memdisk after a re boot you will be told So 4 Destination MemDISK contains data You will be finally asked Do you wish to Formal it lt Y N gt Answering N or lt ENTER gt will leave the memory alone and allow you to recover the MemDISK data that may have been stored there prior to a re boot This provides you an opportunity to re use a previous MemDISK Answering Y will force MemDISK to reformat the allocated RAM and set up the BOOT SYS and DIR SYS files Formatting is not optional upon 267 a a A A A A RA Nag BP A aa aana amama e EE AAA R EA aE EAT TE e ee Oe ee ee ME ES m ee ey a A a Oe gl a a ALS Y MemDISK RAM Driver initial installation MemDISK is not initially installed unless you format it Once the formatting is done MemDISK will place its directory onto cylinder 1 of the pseudo floppy drive and display a completion message Once you tum your machine off afterward when you turn on the system and boot up all information including the boot and directory information on the pseudo disk will have been erased Therefore DOS will not permit you to SYSGEN while a MemDISK is active If you want to disable the MemDISK you must issue the command SYSTEM DRIVE drive DRIVER MEMDISK lt ENTER gt Then at the menu select the lt E gt option Memdisk displays one of the following messages If you receiv
205. ellancous PINGS acini ea EANG 24 Creating a minimum configuration disk scccssssecececesees 24 DOS PASSWOUS proiio a ead ote taee 25 DOS System MOV I COS scrise iein aara naien eki 26 KI The Keyboard 21 DO The Video Display 28 PR The Line Printer 28 JL The Job Log 29 SI The Standard Input 30 SO The Standard Output 30 CL The Comm Line 30 DOS disk drive access 000 PE E T TE E T 31 Diskette parameter information 32 Drive parameter information 33 Special Floppy disk drive types 34 Standard disk formats ssscssssscoscssscscesssssseseersssseecesesseereneas 35 Memory usage and configuration esesesesseressessesssessssesrsnesesse 35 System configuration s csesssccccssesecssssccecceceecececsssssseeecees 37 Compatibility with other operating Systems ssccssceeees 38 Incase OF CUUMICUNEY ssessscsseesrecsicics aia neues 39 DOS Commands oesssoooososoceoeccesooecsccccocossssesscceeccsssese 4l APPEND narani E E 4l PT TRB Pies ngscisecs dove cee octet ssn cosesticcessnicecereitares lis 43 PT TRUBS ISS innan tern ns 46 AUTO saaana a ices ica eee 48 BACKUP UUM sects xj secretes sees tteee aes K 50 Mirror image backups 52 Backup by class and Backup reconstruct 54 Backups with the X parameter 55 Using the backup parameters 55 Examples of backup commands 57 BOOT va cocccacssecctieaataxpataeusecens es eae atin tensed 60 BUMD areis ienris aeia ties 62
206. emory a specific byte pointed to by the cursor will load Complete listing of a file or individual record to a printer is supported FED has both a 256 byte display mode and an extended 128 byte display By having a 128 character display mode the extra space makes it more visually appealing The filespec drivespec record number input and output can be displayed horizontally instead of vertically 137 FED Utility Command Here is a sample display of the 256 byte mode ASCII representation Hexadecimal representation Current Record toh ux s8 1 00 gt 21D8 6811 003D CD5S 588D 5320 4006 1721 0 8 2x gt 3 10 gt ED6O CD40 OODA 945A 78B7 2005 3813 333 0 filespec D 1 b 20 gt 60CD 2058 LLED 60CD 1 44 20F0 210D 6206 0 D 3 s 0 Rw 30 gt 00CD 2444 C233 603A F360 C630 2A15 5277 D K C R C R 40 gt BDAB F960 OBED 4313 201 0000 ED43 OFS2 f a R gt 3 UU s 50 gt 2100 6122 0A52 3R1C CD33 00CD 5555 C93A R B 2 B 60 gt 0152 BICC 105A FE04 0410 SALL EDGO cD42 D 3 6D 3 1 b 70 gt 44C2 3360 11ED 60CD 3644 C233 6021 0D62 HAs eee see fnn 1U 80 gt 2100 6102 0001 EDBO CDE3 SBC9 CD28 SScD K R BD 90 gt DESD CORD 4B0F 52CS 118D 60DS CD42 44C2 13 6D 3 f b a A0 gt 3360 CD36 44c2 3360 210D 6211 0D61 0100 R B BD B0 gt OLED BODI CL2A 1352 B7ED 42C8 03CD 4244 i 3 6 UD 3 G C0 gt C233 60CD 3601 028R 544 C233 60C9 473A R
207. en the copy is complete the BASIC Ready prompt will appear At this time you may type CMD S to return to DOS Ready or type in RUN to copy another file 98 aeons CREATE Library Command CREATE This command allows for the creation of a file of the type and size that is requested by the parameters The syntax is CREATE filespec Fill fLrl Rec 1 Size s Fill f The created file will be populated with this byte If omitted the file is not initialized with any byte Lrl 1 This is the Logical Record Length to be used It must be an integer in the range 1 to 256 default LRL 256 This is the number of records of length LRL to be allocated to the file This is the amount of space in K 1024 byte blocks that the file is to be able to hold SIZE may not be specified if LRL or REC are SHRINK If specified the file is marked for future deallocation of space CREATE is used to pre create a file of a specified type and size This allows the hile to be as contiguous as possible on the disk and limits the number of disk accesses that must be performed when dealing with the file This also assures that the expected amount of space on the disk will be available for use by this file The file will be dynamically expanded if the created size is exceeded but it will never decrease in size below its current size unless the SHRINK parameter is specified A file cannot be created that would require more space than is
208. entions If this parameter is not specified the normal convention will be used Model I 66 0 and Model HI 67 1 If this parameter is specified any X 09 character will be expanded to a standard 8 column tab This parameter will translate a specified character to another character The format is X aabb where aa is the character to be translated and bb is desired character result Both aa and bb must be hexadecimal values This parameter may be useful to translate printer control characters when using more than one type of printer on the same system l SET FF PR USING FORMS FLT V6 FILTER PR FF FILTER PR USING PR FLT V5 he awe ene bees Sea Ua bes hes Fe oa FORMS amp PR Filter Programs These set of commands will establish the filter program in high memory or low memory for DOS version 6 if sufficient space is available in the V O driver region and initiate it to filter the PR line printer output The first set illustrated is for DOS version 6 while the latter is for DOS version 5 Examples for changing the filtering parameters are illustrated in the section on the FORMS FILTER PR PR SLINE 0 FILTER PR PR SL 0 This DOS version 5 example will establish the printer line counter to start from 0 rather than 1 and use a page length of 66 lines per page as the SLINE 0 parameter was specified The SLINE parameter will match Model I conventions and may be necessary when running M
209. eo isplay has incomplete screen of text displayed the page next request will be ignored Text deletion TED provides five forms of text deletion in addition to the block deletion discussed later To delete the single character which appears under the cursor invoke the delete command via lt CTRL D gt This action will get rid of the character and all text which succeeded that character will be pulled back one position The lt CTRL D gt command also puts you into DELETE mode which is made apparent by the display of the word Delete in the status line The DELETE mode is active for only the next keyboard entry There are only four subcommands associated with the DELETE mode delete to beginning of line bol delete to end of line eot delete to top and delete to bottom TED will always prompt before performing one of these deletes Deletion desired Command sequence delete to bol lt CTRL D gt then lt SHIFT lt gt delete to eo lt CTRL D gt then lt SHIFT gt gt delete to top lt CTRL D gt then lt SHIFT f gt delete to bottom lt CTRL D gt then lt SHIFT Y gt lt Z gt 239 _____ BRE Hhitity Zommand After typing lt CTRL D gt the character now under the cursor is the character which was to the right of the deleted character Since in the case of delete to bol and delete to top you are deleting text which is in front of the cursor you really don t want to delete the character which is under the cursor af
210. er etc the system may lock up depending on the use of the forms filter and the setting of the SYSTEM PRTIME mode Remember that both linked devices must be enabled Note that any output sent individually to 170 eos eee We ies e Duas LINK Library Command the printer such as a PRINT from Basic will not be shown on the video display LINK PR DO This command will link the line printer to the video display All output sent to the printer will also be sent to the video display The line printer must be on line and enabled if any printing is to be done This link will not send any characters from the video to the line printer Although files may not be directly linked to a device it is still possible to accomplish the same results through the use of phantom devices Follow this two step procedure to accomplish a devspec to filespec link Use the ROUTE command to create a phantom device and route it to the file then use the LINK command to link the device to the phantom device CAUTION Do not use the SYSTEM SYSGEN command if you linked a device to a file The file will be shown as being open every time you power up or boot the system You could very easily overwrite other files if you happened to switch disks with the file open This example will show how to link your line printer to a disk file named PRINT TXT on your drive 0 diskette First a phantom device must be created F
211. es During this copy the user will be prompted to switch disks as necessary See the example of an X parameter copy at the end of this section In the following examples the use of the word TO between filespecs or devspecs is optional Spec and spec2 need only be separated by a space Examples of COPYing filespect TO filespec2 Note that when copying files if filespec2 already exists on the destination drive it will be overwritten by the copy 92 ese Ue Wet ae La COPY Library Command When copying files the filename extension and password of filespec2 will automatically default to those of filespecl if they are not sporio See the following examples COPY TEST DAT 0 TO TEST DAT 1 COPY TEST DAT 0 TO DAT 1 COPY TEST DAT 0 TO TEST 1 COPY TEST DAT 0 1 These four commands will invoke identical copies All parts of filespec2 will default to those of filespecl if not specified The use of the word TO is optional in any copy command COPY TEST DAT TO 1 This command will search the disk drives until it finds a file named TEST DAT and then copy it onto drive 1 using the filespec TEST DAT COPY TEST DAT PASSWORD 0 TO 1 This command would copy the password protected file TEST DAT PASSWORD from drive 0 to drive 1 The file on drive 1 will be named TEST DAT PASSWORD Remember that all parts of filespec2 including the password will default to those of filespecl if they are not specified COPY TEST
212. ess the lt BREAK gt key This will cause the record which was contained in the edit buffer prior to the search to be read back in from the disk If a match is not found an will appear in the command buffer and the cursor will be positioned over relative byte X FF of the last record Only hex bytes can be entered not hex digits An will appear in the command buffer if an odd number of 144 a re as ae ea lar Eel E _ FED Utility Command hex digits are entered If there are multiple occurrences of the specified string you can go to each occurrence by means of the lt G gt o command lt G gt Goes to the next occurrence of current search criteria string or L address The lt G gt o command performs a continuation of the last search If the last search was for a string it will go to the next occurrence of that string If the last search was for an address it will lt G gt o to the next occurrence of that address Note that lt G gt o works in conjunction with the last search If the data searched for is not found one of two things will happen If the lt G gt o command is issued after an lt L gt command and the address is not located the current record will be read in from disk and the position of the relative cursors will be unaffected If the lt G gt o command is issued after any other search command and the search criteria is not located the last record will be displayed
213. evestoa SPSOSHREFFSASESSE HSH SSSSSFSSES SOS SESSESSOSSFSSHASHESESTSEFCSHSSCK SESE SHEE EHEHE SHES TE TE TERT EEEF SSE HALE Entering FED FED Manipulation Commands FED Modification Commands FED Search Commands FED Output Commands FED Miscellaneous Commands SSSSSHESSSTSSESSEFSSSESSCHSE SH SSF Ss FSESSCHSESHE SOS HS SEOSSSHSSSHHEESCSESESES SF SOTECA HEF Haeeeses SS SSSOSSESSESSSSESTSHSEKLSSTOSETHSSSEHSESTVSEHELETSEFC EH CEETATS TSH Ee 108 108 108 108 109 109 109 110 110 110 110 111 Lit Lil 112 112 112 112 113 113 113 113 114 115 120 21 126 127 128 131 133 133 133 135 137 138 141 142 144 145 146 kes ees fie o eee We e ae Table of Contents FORMA T aa A E Eaa PATERA 152 FORMAT parameter default values 155 FORMAT cylinder verification 156 The WAIT parameter 156 FORMS 157 TRET ouea AE a A 160 MECR UNI innean a a 163 2 UI ERS cg E AREI EE A AP TOE A E SAER AEE EA 167 KEEA REMOVE conio a aN Nin 168 E e A I EA ANIT AAEE EART E E S NE E E ANTA 169 LINE et eee N aN aG 170 LIS Tacana R 173 Parameter ASCIIS 175 Parameter NUM 175 Parameter LINE 175 Parameter HEX 175 Parameter REC 176 Parameter LRL 176 Parameter P 177 Parameter TAB 177 LOAD eei a aE 178 LOG oaao N A EE SATE Ee eee 179 MEMORY anena en E VIORE 180 PATCH iram a Aa aaa 184 Patch Line Syntax 185 DOS Patch Modes 186 Patching with the command line format 189 PURGE aanas N ce tuctevelaneeans
214. evices available under DOS Programs include provisions for such features as keyboard type ahead and formatted line printer output The next section contains detailed operating instructions and information on the DOS Job Control Language JCL this is a batch processing facility CAGE 219 Finally the last section contains a GLOSSARY which describes significant terms used in this reference manual and an extensive INDEX To locate the section of the manual you wish to access refer to the Table of Contents or the Index All commands or programs in each section will be in alphabetical order Any time you encounter an unfamiliar word or definition refer to either the Glossary or the information in the first section of this reference manual What is a Disk Operating System DOS Without a DOS your computer is controlled by routines stored in ROM read only memory The ROM handles all I O input output to your system devices the keyboard cassette video printer etc It does this from within a BASIC language environment A DOS takes over control of the I O processing and adds its own routines to handle the disk drives Instead of starting out in BASIC you will be in a new environment known as the DOS Level Now any commands you give are interpreted by the DOS rather than by the BASIC stored in the ROM In some environments such as DOS version 6 the ROM is disabled after booting and the configuration is all RAM What doe
215. ext buffer it will be replaced with the REPLACE string The display window will be redrawn starting with the line which contained the string which was replaced The cursor will be repositioned to the first character immediately following the replacement string If you wish to replace the next occurrence of text which matches up with the SEARCH string with that same REPLACEMENT string all you need do is lt CTRL R gt ENTER The GO command lt CTRL G gt still functions to find the next occurrence of the SEARCH string If that occurrence of the string is beyond the text currently displayed on the screen and you wish to confirm its replacement simply GO to the next occurrence then REPLACE as necessary 243 ek rts ri Printing text TED provides the lt CTRL P gt command to print the entire text buffer If you want to print just a block of text use the BLOCK PRINT command Obtaining a Directory TED provides the lt CTRL Q gt command to obtain a directory of files After the Drive prompt enter the desired drive specification as either d or d You may also restrict the display to files matching a particular file extension by entering a 4 character sdtring preceding the drive as in TXT 1 a dollar sign in any extension character position designates a match on any character Depressing lt ENTER gt after a directory query will restore ther text screen image Exiting from TED To exit TED and return t
216. f DOS default extensions along with sugges tions for others that may help you standardize your file access ASM The extension used by most Editor Assembler programs for source files BAS Used for BASIC programs The BASIC provided with DOS version 5 uses this extension the BASIC provided with DOS version 6 does not CIM DOS default for DUMP command It stands for Core IMage CMD DOS default for LOAD and RUN commands and PATCH and CMDFILE utilities Used to indicate directly executable files COM Used by some systems to indicate COMpiled object code DAT Normal extension for data files DCT DOS default for the SYSTEM DRIVER command Drive Code Table DVR DOS default for the SET command Usually indicates a device driver program FIX DOS default for files to be used by the PATCH utility FLT DOS default for files used with the FILTER command JBL DOS default for Joblog files 17 L S DOS User Manual JCL DOS default for the DO command It stands for Job Control Language KSM DOS default for KSM Utility It stands for KeyStroke Multiply OVx BASIC extension for Overlay files Overlay x REL Used by some systems to indicate relocatable object code SCR DOS default for Scripsit text files SPL DOS default for the SPOOL command SYS DOS SYStem files only Do not use for your own files TXT DOS default for the LIST and DUMP with the ASCH parameter command This stands for TeXT file T
217. f only the letters A Z a z and the numerals 0 9 ASCII The alphanumeric representation of controls and characters as a single byte falling within a range from 1 to 127 sometimes including 0 ASCII files Files generally containing only ASCH characters BACKGROUND TASK A job that the computer is doing that is not apparent to the user or does not require interaction with the user Some exainples are the REAL TIME CLOCK the SPOOLer and the TRACE function BAUD A term that refers to the rate of serial data transfer BIT One cighth of a byte one binary digit BOOT The process of reseting a computer and loading in the resident operating system from the system drive BUFFER An area in RAM that will temporarily hold information that is being passed between devices or programs BYTE The unit that represents one character to your computer A byte consists of cight binary bits that are either ON 1 or OFF 0 One byte can represent a number from 0 to 255 CONCATENATE To add one variable or string onto the end of another CONFIGURATION The status of the system and physical devices that are available to it This configuration may be dynamically changed with several library commands and the SYSTEM command and may be saved with a SYSGEN If the system is SYSGENed that configuration will be re established each time the machine is re booted or re started CURSOR The location on the video display where the nex
218. f within a JCL file SYSGEN will abort with an appropriate crror if the drive specified to receive the configuration file is write protected An invisible file named CONFIG SYS will be created to hold the configuration Each time the system is booted the configuration stored in this file will be loaded and set You may prevent this automatic configuration by holding down the lt CLEAR gt key while the boot is in progress Note that the system configuration will take place before any AUTO ed command is invoked 219 In addition to the options settable by the SYSTEM command the following will be stored in the Coan Riann file by a SYSGEN or SYSGEN Library Command SYSTEM SYSGEN command Certain DOS features should never be SYSGENed if a disk file is involved They are any ROUTE or SET involving a disk file SYSGENing open files can cause loss of data if the disks are switched in the drives without the files being closed Disk switches with open files can also cause All filtering linking routing and device setting that has been done This includes the serial driver and KI settings Any active background tasks such as CLOCK DEBUG TRACE etc Any special utility modules or user programs loaded into high memory and protected with the MEMORY command All memory from HIGH to the physical top of memory and added version 6 low memory modules will be written to the CONFIG SYS file All modules added to DOS version 6 I O driver mem
219. filespecs and files 6 Moving files 6 Removing unwanted files 7 Changing file names 7 Viewing devices and disk drive parameters 7 Establishing or Removing devices 7 Making a BACK IUD oorsien aa E ariaa 7 POE sinpleari ve OWNS orainn a N 8 For multiple drive Owners sesaseosessussrssesesessscsoessssessosssesesseneeseoes 9 MODEL I Backing up the DOSXTRA disk cccsssesso ones 9 After the Backups are completed ssscssccsccesensssnceserssones 10 Entering DOS commands eessrecescsscrecssacoscsesocencoasescoesoseesssee 10 Special command specificationS e seseeessssereosssseocesssessesesoose 12 Immediate Execution Program eessrseseseereooreeosreesersssesssscosee 13 Hardware related features csscssecseccsesessnssssenssssosonscsssssees 14 DOS File AeSCri puns soies 16 File group system files SYS csssssccccesessnsssssreconsnsesesees 19 SYSO SYS 19 SYS1 SYS 19 SYS2 SYS 19 SYS3 SYS 19 SYS4 SYS 20 SYSS SYS 20 SYS6 SYS 20 SYST SYS 20 SYS8 S YS DOS version 6 20 SYS8 SYS DOS version 5 21 SYS9 SYS 21 SYS1O SYS 21 L S DOS User Manual SYSII SYS 21 SYSI2Z SYS 21 SYS13 SYS 21 File group utilities CMD cccsccsseceseerssssecsssssececssseesenss 22 File group device drivers DVR ccccccessessscsssesssecseeceeees 23 File group filter programs FLT c sccsssssccssceerseceseseees 23 File group BASIC and BASIC overlays 24 Mis
220. filter program would have been applied Now if you would do the same JCL file again specifying the KI token on the command line problems will occur Since the forms filter program cannot be applied if it is already active the JCL will abort again when it tries to execute the FILTER line for the second time As you can see the QUIT macro definitely should be used rather than the ABORT JCL substitution fields Perhaps the most powerful feature of the JCL language is the ability to substitute and concatenate character strings to create executable lines The character strings can be entered as token values on the DO command line 305 Batch Processing Job Control Language or can be set with the ASSIGN macro A substitution field is created by placing pound signs around a token For example TEST JCL forms chars C basic run P 1 STOP This example uses two substitution fields one in the FORMS command line representing the number of characters and one in the run program line representing the name of the program If the DO command DO TEST C 132 P1 PROGRAMI were used the lines written to the SYSTEM JCL file would be TEST JCL forms chars 132 basic run PROGRAM 1 STOP As you can see the compile phase substituted the character string value of the tokens into the actual command line In effect you could set any valid number of characters for the FORMS command and run any
221. first depressing lt CLEAR gt lt 5 gt followed by some other PF key appropriate to the intended function Specific details will be presented as the other PF keys are discussed The file receive devivce is used for either receiving a file being transferred to you or for making a file copy of the communications line dialogue This device will also be used to download from a bulletin board system All of the PF keys available to the FS device are also available to the FR device These will be discussed later This device may be turned on or off by control characters received from the communications line if the HANDSHAKE switch is on The characters received will be put in a memory buffer and may be written to disk with the DTD function lt CLEAR gt lt 7 gt DTD Dump To Disk DTD is used to write the memory buffer used with FR to the disk DTD may be turned on before or after a file has been received If turned on before the file will be written to disk as it is being received This will be necessary if the file will exceed the size of the FR memory buffer When COMM first initializes DTD is set to ON When an FR RESET is performed DTD is set to its OFF mode Model I users may want to set DTD to OFF until an entire receive file FR mode has been received to guard against occasional dropping of a character during disk J O On the Model III it will be necessary to wait until the entire file is received before turning on DTD if you are using
222. floppy disks and any baud rate above 300 lt CLEAR gt lt 8 gt Menu This PF command will display a menu to the screen It looks like this 78 oes a ies Bare Een eee E COMM Communications Utility Command t t DUPLX ECHO ECOLF ACCLF REWND PROF DCC CLS 8 B CMD HNDSH EXIT majme wn mm Ja mmm maja mlm m Faa fe a Gas n wom a jma oo KI DO PR CL F3 FR OTD ID RES ON OFF k s Ead FR File DOWNLOAD TXT 3 MEMORY 36K Notice that the display will be teft to right and in the relative positions of the keys which are used for the functions This is not intended to be a complete menu it is like having a built in quick reference card The lt CLEAR gt lt 8 gt may be invoked at anytime The screen display will be altered to display the menu scrolled five lines but no data will be lost as COMM will still be buffering the incoming characters The buffered characters will be displayed after the menu is placed on the screen The menu display will show which devices and functions are active as well the amount of available memory The asterisks above and below the PF tabels will indicate whether the function is active or not Those above the labels are for the shifted PF functions those below for the unshifted functions CL is shown with two asterisks denoting that it is capable of both input and output A single asterisk under a device indicates single direction I O If handshake is active
223. for when powering up the systein The time and date values may also be set with the TIME and DATE commands The real time clock may be turned off while DOS is doing soine of its critical disk I O functions such as when using the BACKUP and FORMAT utilities You will be notified of this by this message which notifies you that the real time clock has lost several seconds or more Note Real time clock no longer accurate The SETTIME program may be provided to allow you to set or read a hardware clock Invoke SETTIME with a command such as SETTIME HH MM SS Any additional instructions needed will be provided after SETTIME invokes 246 Lo TOF Library Command TOF This command will emit a form feed character 12d to the PR device If the printer is currently unavailable the command does nothing Its syntax is TOF 247 Se ee es ee en pm in VERIFY Library Command VERIFY The VERIFY command forces all disk writes to be verified with a read after write operation The syntax is VERIFY switch switch is the parameter ON or OFF ON is the default VERIFY will determine whether or not writes to a disk file are verified with a read after write operation The state of the VERIFY command may be saved in the configuration file with the SYSTEM SYSGEN library command The normal power up condition is with verification turned off To cause a read after write verify of every write operation you
224. from the keyboard If the filespec does not contain an extension DOS will automatically assign a default extension of JCL for Job Control Language see DO and JCL If a file with the identical name exists the BUILD command will abort with the error message File already exists unless the APPEND parameter has been specified The APPEND parameter will allow you to add to the end of an existing file Be aware that some programs like the SCRIPSIT word processor place their own end of text marker at the end of a file To properly extend this type of file e Use the BUILD command to create a new file consisting of the information you wish to append to the existing file e Then use the APPEND library command with the STRIP parameter to properly append the new information to the file Should you wish to create a KSM type file see KSM filter the file extension should be KSM This will prompt you with each key identifier 62 tm Oe oe _ at sy omer sees BUILD Library Command as you enter what you wish that key to represent This type of build is detailed in the section on the KSM utility After the file has been opened all characters that are typed will be placed in the file just as they appear on the video Lines are limited to a length of 255 characters Each line that is entered should be terminated by pressing the lt ENTER gt key The file will be written to the disk when the lt BREAK gt key for DO
225. g a text file The lt CTRL L gt command is used to load a text file into the text buffer area When you depress lt CTRL L gt you will be prompted for the name of the file with Load Filespec If the extension is omitted from your entry TXT will be automatically provided The LOAD command will not automatically clear any text remaining in the text buffer prior to the LOAD The new text is not inserted at the cursor position but rather is appended to the end of the current text If you wish to load the new file over the old text simply invoke the command sequence lt SHIFT fl gt followed by lt CTRL D gt then lt SHIFT l gt for DOS 6 or lt SHIFT Z gt for DOS 5 This will delete the entire text buffer If the file is too large to fit into the available text buffer the error message No room will be displayed and no text will be loaded If any disk read error is encountered while reading the text file into the text buffer the message I O error will be displayed The text which was loaded up to the point of encountering the error will be retained in the text buffer Entering text Entering text is easy you just type away If you already have text in the buffer and wish to enter new text at the end just move the cursor to the bottom via the lt SHIFT l gt key for DOS 6 or lt SHIFT Z gt for DOS 5 then type in your text If you wish to enter new text at some other point just position the cursor toggle to t
226. g device and devspec2 must not ee the name of an existing device RENAME will not allow the changing or deleting of a file s password To change or alter a password refer to the ATTRIB command RENAME TEST DAT 0 TO OLD DAT This command will rename the file TEST DAT on drive 0 to OLD DAT RENAME TEST DAT 0 TO REAL This command would rename the file TEST DAT on drive 0 to REAL DAT The extension DAT was not specified for filespec2 and defaulted to that of filespec tf 195 on pe eer eraa aa a a aaam I LN le ana wr ms amama raima NR auaa i U ul a er a mm mm aea RENAME Library Command RENAME TEST DAT 0 TO REAL This command will rename the file TEST DAT on drive 0 to a file named REAL The use of the with no characters after it in filespec2 kept the extension from defaulting to DAT RENAME TEST DAT TO REAL DAT This command will search the active drives for the fite TEST DAT and rename it REAL DAT RENAME TEST DAT TO OLD This command will search the active drives for a file TEST DAT and rename it TEST OLD The filename was not specified in filespec2 and defaulted to that of filespeci RENAME DATA NEW SECRET 1 TO OLD This command will rename the password protected file DATA NEW SECRET on drive 1 to DATA OLD SECRET The filename and password for filespec2 defaulted to those of filespec1 RENAME TEST DAT TO TEST This command is not a valid command and will produce the error message Duplical
227. ge It would be used if your JCL processing logic detected an invalid run time condition and wanted to display an informative message Also any error that the operating system detects that will result in a jump to the ABORT DOS vector will disable further JCL processing and display the above message Basically this macro should be used to exit JCL execution any time an undesired condition occurred EXIT The EXIT macro is used to end the execution of JCL processing and return to the program that initiated the DO command If no termination macro is entered in a JCL file the JCL processing will terminate upon reaching the end of the file as though EXIT was the last line in the JCL file displaying the message Job done The Job done message indicates a normal conclusion of the JCL file This type of JCL exit should be used if the conclusion of the JCL command file also represents the conclusion of the job that is running Therefore the following JCL could be used to run a program that did not require any keyboard input and needed to return to the DOS Ready prompt after it finished Program start up JCL last modified 01 01 92 SET FF FORMS DOS 6 FILTER PR PR FLT DOS 5 FORMS CHARS 80 MARGIN 10 LINES 60 BASIC RUN PROGRAM BAS EXI As you can see from these macros you have three different ways to end a JCL file STOP_ Stop JCL execution remain in the user s program ABORT Stop execution
228. ge 3COOH 3FFFH You can maintain that load block in its original location to the screen by entering the lowest address above the screen area as identified in the ADDRESS LOAD LOG in response to the above query This would provide the offset to any portion of the program originally loading at an 70 bes kese eaa ees OSI foxes Lo L keas CMDFILE Utility Command address greater than the screen end 3FFFH and maintain the original load addresses for any block loading into an area below the address entered For example the ADDRESS LOAD LOG begins with Block loads from 3C00 to 3C7F Black loads from 5200 to 5282 Block loads fram 5283 to 5304 The entire program module can be offset starting at 5200 by entering 5200 in response to the Enter Address to restrict offset or lt ENTER gt gt query In this manner the load address of the load block addressed to the screen memory will be retained as 3C00 to 3C7F CMDPFILE can read the library modules of DOS If CMDFILE interprets the module being foaded as one conforming to the load format of DOS s ISAM files then the query lile has ISAM overlays enter f gt will be displayed If you enter the 2 character overlay number CMDFILE will read only the desired overlay into its memory buffer If you respond with FF then the entire module will be loaded The DOS ISAM file Structure is not described in this documentation If you want to change the
229. ged with the ETX parameter to a character of your choice For example a Scripsit file will normally have an X 00 as the ETX character Here are some examples of using the DUMP command DUMP ROUTINE CMD S X 7000 E X 8000 T X 7000 DUMP ROUTINE CMD ASR E 32768 1 28672 These two omii will create identical files The first uses hex notation for the addresses while the second is in decimal format The result will be to writte the block of memory starting at X 7000 and ending at X 8000 to a disk file named ROUTINE CMD If the file already exists it will be overwritten If it does not exist it will be created on the first available drive The transfer address of the program will be X 7000 DUMP TEST 1 S X 9000 E X BCOF This command will DUMP the specified block of memory to a disk file named TEST CIM on drive 1 Since the file extension was not specified it defaulted to CIM The transfer address was not specified and will be written to the file as a return to the system DUMP WORD TXT 0 S X 7000 E X A000 A This command will dump the specified memory range to a disk file named WORD TXT Since the A ASCII option was specified no load module information will be written to the file and the EXT End of Text character will be the normal X 03 DUMP WORD 0 S X 7000 E X A000 ETX X FF A This command is identical to the last one except that the End of Text marker will be written as an X FF In addition the file
230. has been set to 44 a sy Sees Metres e es eee en ee _ pa Lo ATTRIB Library Command EXECute only The only way this file can be read into the computer is with the RUN command in BASIC RUN ISAM BAS This file cannot be loaded listed or printed without using the owner password SECRET Full access will be granted if the file is specified as ISAM BAS SECRET because the owner password has been given Remember that the owner password will allow complete access regardless of the protection level that has been set Notice that this file will be invisible in the directory because the INV parameter has been specified EXAMPLE RUN ISAM BAS Any attempt to look at this program after it is running will cause the program to be deleted from memory Listing the program in BASIC cannot be done unless the program is loaded using the password SECRET Any attempt to interrupt the execution of the program will cause the program to be erased from memory ATTRIB ISAM BAS SECRET 0 OWN VIS ATTRIB ISAM BAS SECRET 0 O V This command will get rid of all passwords and make the file ISAM BAS visible in the directory Notice that the owner password of SECRET was required to re attrib the file ATTRIB HOST CMD 0 INV ATIRIB HOST CMD 0 i This command wilt make the file invisible to the normal directory command DIR without assigning any passwords to the file To see invisible files use the 1 parameter of the DIR
231. has its own formatting routine that does not support extended dating you will have to DATECONV your hard drive partitions after you re format them 104 ee ee Bee Hee he thes teen Gee Coa iken Loo m e DEBUG Library Command DEBUG The DEBUG command turns the DOS system s debugging utility on or off The syntax is DEBUG ON OFf Ext Ext optionally turns on the extended debugger ONIOFf turs the ghost debugger ON or OFF If not specified ON is assumed i Unlike the other library commands the DEBUG command does not immediately produce a visible result It loads the system debugger into memory and then waits to be activated The extended debugger also loads a separate block into high memory and protects this area by decrementing the HIGHS value Once the debugger has been turned on it will be entered when one of the following occurs e The lt BREAK gt key is pressed e After a program has been loaded before the first instruction in the program is invoked as long as the file s protection level is not execute only or higher The debugger may also be automatically activated by holding down the lt D gt key during the bootstrap operation The debugger will be disabled during the execution of any programs with an invoke only or NO access protection level Once the debugger is turned on it will remain active until it is turned off until an execute only program is invoked or until the system
232. have intentions of testing out machine language application software by using the DOS DEBUG command If your operation will not require this debugging tool you may purge this overlay SYS6 SYS lt 4 This overlay contains all of the algorithms and routines necessary to service the library commands identified as Library A by the LIB command This represents the primary library functions Very limited use could be made of DOS if this overlay is removed from your working SYSTEM disk SYS7 SYS 7 This overlay contains all of the algorithms and routines necessary to service the library commands identified as Library B by the LIB command A great deal of use can be made of DOS even without this overlay It performs specialized functions that may not be needed in the operation of specific applications Use the PURGE comunand to eliminate this overlay if you decide it is not needed on a working SYSTEM diskette SYS8 SYS DOS version 6 E This overlay contains all of the algorithms and routines necessary to service the library commands identified as Library C by the LIB command A great deal of use can be made of DOS even without this overlay It performs machine specific functions that may not be needed in 20 mmaya lee DOS FILE GROUPS the operation of applications Use the PURGE command to eliminate this overlay if you decide it is not needed on a working SYSTEM diskette SYS8 SYS DOS version 5 This
233. he insert mode then type away TED will stay in insert mode until explicitly toggled back to overstrike mode As you are entering text any word which is too long to fit at the end of a video line will be split at the 64th column and continued onto the next line These long words are not automatically bounced onto the subsequent line as is the case with the typical word processor 238 Les oer isis beg Hegin a TAPE100Utitity Gommand Cursor positioning manipulations The ARROW keys are the primary tools to move the cursor They will move the cursor in the direction indicated by the arrow The shifted arrow keys will be interpreted as cursor movement requests unless TED is in the DELETE or BLOCK modes The lt SHIFT lt gt request will move the cursor to the first position of the current line The lt SHIFT gt request will move the cursor to the last position of the current line You can position the cursor to the first position of the text buffer by a lt SHIFT f gt request Finally the lt SHIFT J gt for DOS 6 or lt SHIFT Z gt for DOS 5 positions to the end of text The page up lt CTRL U gt command will refresh the video screen so that the new first displayed line is thirteen lines previous to the current first displayed line The page next lt CTRL N gt request will refresh the video screen so that the new first line displayed is the last line of the current displayed text If the vid
234. he KI DVR program specifying the TYPE parameter in order to gain access to type ahead If you wish to temporarily suspend the type ahead feature use the SYSTEM TYPE OFF command This will turn off the type ahead processing without disturbing any other filters you may have applied to the keyboard This will just inhibit the type ahead operation it does not remove the type ahead task The type ahead task processing may be restarted with the SYSTEM TYPE ON command 232 ere a SYSTEM Library Command SYSTEM UPDATE switch V5 The UPDATE sub command Version 5 Model I only will allow the system date to be updated if the real time clock passes midnight 23 59 59 The date will advance one day and the day of the week and day of the year will also change This routine will use some high memory Due to hardware differences this routine will not work on the Model IL The UPDATE module can be removed from memory The switches are ON or OFF to enable or disable the update function Doing a global RESET library command will disable the update function 233 TAPE100 Utility Command TAPE100 This DOS version 6 Model 4 program is used to transfer files to or from a Model 100 cassette tape It s syntax is TAPE 100 file Read Write TAPE100 filel TO file2 Read i Write file file2 Are each either a DOS filespec or a Model 100 filename Read Specifies that you want to read a file file from tape and w
235. he second JCL file are processed and then the compiling returns to the rest of the original file There is no limit to the number of ANCLUDE macros you can use other than having enongi disk space for the resulting nee file For example let us assume that the TEST2 JCL file contains a procedure that you wish to repeat three times with pauses in between You could re write the TEST1 JCL file as follows TESTI JCL PAUSE Initial pass now ready NCLUDE TEST2 PAUSE Get ready for pass 2 NCLUDE TEST2 PAUSE Get ready for pass 3 INCLUDE TEST2 J1EXIT As should be evident this JCL will compile to a series of pauses with the TEST2 procedure done after each pause JCL labels The LABEL feature of JCL will allow you to permanently merge together many small JCL procedures into one large file and then access those procedures individually This will save disk space and directory entry space for you The format for a LABEL is 310 aie Batch Processing Job Control Language LABEL The tabel name can be up to eight characters long either upper or lower case letter A Z or a z or the numbers 0 9 Following is a brief example of a JCL file containing labels TEST JCL label example FIRST this is the first procedure exit SECOND this is the next procedure THIRD this is the last procedure This file contains three labels To select any procedure specify the label on the DO comm
236. he Computer unit ROM Read Only Memory In the TRS 80 Models I and II the BASIC language and drivers stored in the Computer unit SECTOR A contiguous block of disk storage defined to be 256 bytes where each byte within the sector has an absolute location and byte identification number All sectors have a predefined absolute starting and ending location SI A DOS system device the Standard Input It is not presently used by the DOS system SO A DOS system device the Standard Output It is not presently used by the LDOS system SWITCH A parameter with a definite setting such as ON OFF TOKEN A variable used in JCL UTILITY A program that provides a service to the user Utility programs usually run outside of the operating system itself WCC The abbreviation for WildCard Character In DOS the replacement of filespec characters with during certain DOS commands WORD Two bytes in HEXadecimal format X nnnn Usually entered in reverse notation low byte then high byte LSB MSB 330 eee INDEX 1 327 Jo 317 CL 26 30 75 77 151 194 251 DO 6 26 28 42 77 115 117 170 194 203 326 JL 26 29 115 117 194 255 328 KI 6 26 27 77 115 194 208 220 229 232 256 280 328 PR 6 26 28 77 115 117 125 162 165 170 194 200 203 247 253 255 257 330 SI 26 30 115 117 194 330 SO 26 30 115 117 194 330 304 AB
237. he command SYSTEM SYSGEN DRIVE 1 5 Install the double density boot file by issuing the command SOLE 6 At this point remove both diskettes then place the double density DOS disk into drive 0 Insert the DOS diskette 2 into drive 1 and copy the files from it to drive 0 and re save the configuration with the commands BACKUP 1 0 INV SYSTEM SYSGEN 7 Make additional copies of this double density system diskette onto blank diskettes in drive 1 by issuing the commands FORMAT 1 SYSTEM BACKUP 0 Note You cannot use DISKCOPY or QFB to backup a dual density diskette 212 a EER Lo P SPOOL Library Command SPOOL The SPOOL command establishes a FIFO First In First Out buffer for a specified device usually a line printer The syntax is SPOOL devspec TO filespec Mem a Disk b Bank c SPOOL devspec OFFI Pause Resume Clear devspec Is any valid DOS device if not entered PR is assumed filespec Is an optional DOS filespec if not entered devspec SPL is asumed Bank c A version 6 parameter in the range 1 30 which specifies that the spool buffer and main spooler module should use bank C this requires machines with expanded memory installed Empties the spooling buffers without printing Disk space to be used by the spooler 0 to bb b is the amount of disk space to be used in blocks of 1K 1024 bytes Memory to be used by the spooler a is the amount of memory
238. he disk drive itself the step rate and delay Diskette parameter information All three of the diskette parameters shown in the device display cylinder density and sides are dependent on the diskette that was in the drive when it was last accessed These parameters are established when the disk was initially created with the FORMAT utility You will notice that the device display will show information for an enabled disk drive even if there is no diskette in the drive This information will reflect the diskette that was last accessed in that drive DENSITY will be shown as SDEN single density or DDEN double density If you have a Model 4 or Model III or have an appropriate double density board and are using the FDUBL driver for the Model I you will see the prompt Single or Double densily when formatting a diskette The den 32 Lae wae ane deos Ea ee eae oes Laces DOS SYSTEM DEVICES AND DISK DRIVES sity of the diskette will be determined by how this question is answered CYLINDER and SIDES are interrelated terms Most disk operating systems use the term tracks when referring to a diskette A track is limited to one side of a diskette The terin cylinder refers to a track number on all sur faces of a disk On a single sided diskette a track is the same as a cylin der On a 2 sided diskette there are two tracks with the same number for each cylinder one on the front and one on the back A multi pla
239. he disk is displayed ATTRIB will also allow you to alter the diskette name master password and lock or unlock all visible non S YStem files The syntax is ATTRIB filespec password d Owner s Prot s Vis Inv password password used only if a password already exists Inv makes file invisible to a directory command Owner the new owner password Prot the new protection level NOne EXec REad WRit UPdate NAnie KIH FUI Vis makes file visible to a directory command Whien you create a file the password you specify becomes the owner password If you don t specify a password a string of eight blanks is assigned as a default password in effect creating mo password If a protection level has not been assigned to a file full access will automatically be granted regardless of any owner password The OWNER password will still be required for full access on password protected files that have a protection level other than FULL To have a file that allows no access whatsoever without the use of the owner password change the protection level to NO or NONE Without entry of a password access up to and including the level of protection that is specified will be granted The password that follows the Owner is the owner password and always allows complete access to a file 43 a ee er neat I cl aaa ATTRIB Library Command If the VIS or INV parameters are not specified in an ATTRIB command they
240. he highest unprotected memory location referred to as HIGHS and load directly below this location or lowest version 6 unprotected memory address below the resident system and load the module above this After loading the DOS system moves HIGH down or LOWS up to protect these routines If you have invoked any SYSTEM commands that require the use of this high memory be aware that your overall free memory will be decreased accordingly 221 oe mamma ee cater ee rp a SYSTEM Library Command Most of the following sub commands for the SYSTEM command may be used together in the same command line To do this observe the syntax SYSTEM parm parm oarm Each parameter must be accompanied by its switch or setting as required SYSTEM ALIVE switch ALIVE displays an alternating character in the upper right corner of the screen It is primarily used to determine the current state of the task processor If the alive bug is alternating the task processor is running Note that the character may continue moving indicating an alive system even when the TRACE library command display has stopped The switch is either ON or OFF If not specified ON is assumed The ALIVE parameter uses some RAM in high memory The ALIVE module can now be removed from memory SYSTEM AMPM V6 The display of the time field in the version 6 DIR command s output can be altered to display the time in 12 hr clock time or 24 hr clock time
241. he host accepts You may then close your file send by entering lt CLEAR gt lt 5 gt followed by lt CLEAR gt lt 0 gt which will turn off the _ FS and close the file If at any time you want to force the transmission to resume after a line is ended you may turn the CL back on by entering lt CLEAR gt lt 4 gt followed by lt CLEAR gt lt gt This is also explained under handshake When using COMM to communicate between two TRS 80 s it will be necessary for one end to turn on half duplex lt CLEAR gt lt SH gt lt gt followed by lt CLEAR gt lt SH gt lt gt and echo lt CLEAR gt lt SH gt lt gt followed by lt CLEAR gt lt gt If files are to be sent and received this should be done at the receiving end To transfer files use one of the following two methods If the receiving end s system is subject to character loss during disk I O some TRS 80 Model I machines or you are operating above 300 baud on a Model HI then Method A should be used If you are operating with a hard drive your system can usually dynamically write to disk during transmission thus Method B should be chosen Method A Intermediate Memory Buffering e The sending end should do a lt CLEAR gt lt 5 gt followed by a lt CLEAR gt lt 9 gt and enter in the filespec to be sent e The receiving end should do a lt CLEAR gt lt 6 gt followed by a lt CLEAR gt lt 9 gt and enter in the filespec to be received The dump to disk DTD mus
242. he results of entering the following example command DISKCOPY 1 2 Drive 1 will be used as the source drive while drive 2 will be the Cylinder 0 of the destination diskette will be verified os destination drive Prior to DISKCOPY performing any action a prompt will appear to load the diskettes Once the proper diskettes have been installed press lt ENTER gt and the backup will begin The following actions will take place e The source diskette will be logged in to determine the type of format a e Cylinder 0 of the destination diskette will be formatted e Ifcylinder 0 of the source disk contains data it will be read i into memory a e If cylinder O of the source diskette contains data the information stored in memory see third step will be written out to the destination diskette The previous steps will be repeated for all remaining cylinders z e The following message which may vary with the DOS release will appear after the last cylinder has been verified ea Duplication complete 1 disk crealed Replace destination disks and press lt ENTER gt to repeat lt R gt lo restart with new poramelers 0F lt BREAK gt to exit program e Press lt ENTER gt in response to this prompt to make another mirror image backup Press lt BREAK gt to abort the DISKCOPY utility The following prompt may appear Load SYSIEM diskelte and hit lt ENTER gt E E 129 DISKCOPY Utilit
243. he single entry keyboard routines KBD KEY and BASIC s INKEY will continue to be requested 321 ieee r an aa re anaa A RN FLEA a r a miv tt en tr A a r a aans paars Batch Processing Job Control Language from the keyboard at program run time and will not utilize the JCL file data for input requests Thus by understanding fully the dynamics of JCL processing you can write applications that take full advantage of the power inherent in the Job Control Language Practical JCL examples It is virtually impossible to explore all the possibilities that exist concerning the creation of JCL files The examples that follow will give you some ideas as to how JCL may be used to make your day to ey operating of the DOS system even more efficient Example 1 This example will show you how to SYSRES system modules using a JCL file The modules that will be resided are 2 3 8 and 10 These modules are required to be resident in order to perform a backup by class between two non system diskettes in a two drive system The JCL file used to perform such a function may look something like this BURES JCL JCL used to SYSRES system modules 2 3 8 10 SYSTEM SYSRES 2 SYSTEM SYSRES 3 SYSTEM SYSRES 8 DOS 5 SYSTEM SYSRES 10 end of BURES JCL When executed this JCL file will cause the system modules 2 3 8 if DOS 5 and 10 to be resident in high memory Because this JCL uses no labels or compilation macros the c
244. hes a value in the command table that command will be invoked otherwise the entry will be ignored TED operates in two text entry modes overstrike and insert The initial mode established when TED is first invoked is the overstrike mode While TED is in overstrike mode it will use an underscore as the cursor character When you toggle to insert mode the cursor is changed to a full graphics block You toggle from one mode to the other via the lt CTRL A gt cominand When TED is in overstrike mode any acceptable text entry typed character is written over the character which appears under the blinking cursor You can overstrike a newline character i e lt ENTER gt which is displayed as small graphics block You can also overstrike either a begin block marker or an end block marker You can be in overstrike mode when you come to the end of the text or starting from an empty text buffer for that matter and still be able to enter text in this mode When you switch to insert mode anytime you enter an acceptable text entry character the entire text will be pushed down one position starting 237 i omma from the character under the cursor to make room for the inserted character The video screen will be constantly updated as text is inserted The text entry mode is only changed via the lt CTRL A gt command Going into delete mode does not change the mode of text entry Loadin
245. his next section will describe the various files found on your DOS master diskettes and explain their functions It will also describe how to construct a minimum system disk for running applications packages 18 a Oe OA htt An A TY TS _ es L DEEE La on i DOS FILE GROUPS File group system files SYS DOS s use of overlays requires that a SYSTEM diskette usually be avail able in drive 0 the system drive Since the diskette containing the operating system and its utilities leaves little space available to the user it is useful to be able to remove certain parts of the system software not needed while a particular application is running In fact you will discover that your day to day operations will only need a minimal DOS configura tion The greater the number of system functions unnecessary for your application the more space you can have available for a working system diskette The following will describe the Functions performed by each system overlay identified in an DOS DIR command using the SYS pa rameter by the file extension SYS There are two system files that are put on the disk during formatting They are DIR SYS and BOOT SYS These files are never to be copied from one disk to an other DOS automatically updates any information contained in these files SYSO SYS TESE Tis ts not an overlay tt contains the resident part of the operating system SYSR
246. his own command If this is the case the INPUT macro could be used INPUT optional message string When using the INPUT macro in a JCL file it is recommended that the keyboard type ahead feature of the KI DVR program either not be active or be disabled with a SYSTEM YPE OFF command This can be done as a JCL line if desired If not done using any macro such as PAUSE that requires pressing the lt ENTER gt key will cause the JCL to abort if it later encounters a INPUT The INPUT macro is used to input a line from the keyboard Our definition of JCL explained that JCL execution worked by taking over the keyboard and substituting lines from a JCL file in place of keyboard entry With this macro control of the keyboard is temporarily returned to the operator Now any command may be typed on the keyboard and then passed to the system The number of characters allowed will depend on where the JCL execution was when the INPUT was encountered For instance if the JCL was executing at the DOS Ready level then up to 63 for DOS 5 or 79 for DOS 6 characters could be entered the same as for a normal DOS command If the INPUT was encountered after going into BASIC then up to 255 characters could be entered Consider a slight re write of the MENU JCL example used with the KEYIN macro MENU JCL Program 1 is MAIL Program 2 is LEDGER Program 3 is PAYABLES BASIC IKEYIN Select program 1 3 M1 RUN MAIL BAS
247. his parameter directs the output to the line printer rather than the video display It may be used in conjunction with any of the other LIST parameters Parameter TAB This parameter will cause the expansion of any TAB characters X 09 encountered during ASCII listings to the video display or line printer If a tab parameter is not specified tabbing is fixed at every eight columns 8 16 24 32 40 48 and 56 The TAB parameter accepts a tab column number between and 32 to set the actual tab position to a multiple of other than every 8 columns The following examples will show some different LIST commands LIST MONITOR CMD HEX LRL 8 REC 0 LIST MONITOR CMD H L 8 These two commands will produce identical results listing a file called MONITOR CMD to the video display using an LRL of 8 and starting with the first record of the file The second example has merely substituted the abbreviations for the HEX and LRL parameters and let the REC parameter default to 0 This listing display will be only 8 bytes wide as the LRL is also the display width for LRL s 1 to 16 Maximum display width is 16 bytes per line The same line width applies to listings sent to the printer with the P option LIST REPLY PCL NUM TAB P The result of this command would be to send a listing of the file REPLY PCL to the printer using ASCII format expanding all tab characters encountered and numbering each new line that is printed LIST TESTF
248. ically set the N parameter and will print the entire directory without pause The Mod and Date parameters will allow you to see only those files that have been modified since their last backup or fall within a specified range of dates The DOS requires dates to be within the range 01 01 80 to 12 31 2011 enter only the last two digits of a year The Date parameter accepts four formats to provide for selecting specific ranges of dates note that the parameters are character strings and must be enclosed in aes These formats are l e DATE M1 D1 Y1 M2 D2 Y2 copies only those files whose mod dates fall between the two dates specified inclusive e DATE MI D1 Y1 copies all files with mod dates equal to the specified date e DATE M1 D1 Y1 copies all files with mod dates less than or equal to the specified date 125 DIR Library Command e DATE M1 D1 Y1 copies all files with mod dates greater or equal to the specified date The directory display will normally be shown sorted in alphabetical order To disable this feature specify SORT NO as a parameter when issuing a DIR command The PURGE library command and the BACKUP utility access files in their unsorted order You may see the same order of unsorted access by specifying the SORT NO parameter in a DIR command Using filespecs and partspecs Along with the previous parameters DOS provides other methods for locating files in a disk directory Three terms will be used
249. ified OFF the driver will wait for a FALSE condition before sending a character If not specified the lead will be ignored lt BREAK gt PAUSE lt SHIFT gt lt gt and lt ENTER gt characters received from the communication s line will be recognized by DOS This would be useful in host type applications With BREAK on the system break bit will be set whenever a modem break extended null or logical BREAK is received If BREAK is specified OFF the driver will never set the break bit Regardless of the setting of BREAK the system pause bit will be set when the ASCII code X 60 is received and the system enter bit will be set whenever a carriage return X OD is received 252 lL ee cept COM amp RS232x Serial Driver Programs The following example sets the driver program for a serial printer SET CL TO COM DVR V6 SET CL RS232T DVR V5 SETCOM BAUD 300 WORD 8 STOP 1 CTS ROUTE PR CL This example did not specify PARITY thus it will use the default value CTS was specified so CTS must be a TRUE condition before sending a character This would be useful when using a serial printer with its BUSY line hooked to the CTS line on the computer characters would be sent to the printer only when the printer was ready to accept them The CL device will usually be used to communicate with the RS 232 hardware However when using a Serial printer the PR device would normally be used when setting the
250. iles will contain the same data but the logical record lengths will not be the same We will assume that the original file had a record length of 256 This would be a normal random type data file The file DATA V28 will be created by the copy and will have a record length of 128 bytes This ability to reset the LRL of a file is very useful when converting data to be used by a BASIC that can deal with blocked files record lengths less than 256 such as the BASIC you run with DOS This function is also necessary when you wish to append two files but cannot because they have different logical record lengths By copying one of these files and setting the LRL parameter to the desired length the record length can be adjusted and the APPEND library command will then function Also see RESET to change a file s LRL COPY MANUAL TXT JWY 0 TO 1 L 128 This command will copy the file MANUAL TXT with the password JWY from drive 0 to drive 1 In the process of doing the copy the LRL will be changed from whatever it was to 128 Note that the LRL parameter was abbreviated to L in the above example COPY CONTROL 0 ASC 1 LRL 1 94 Lo LO LE LO Le bara bed a oe COPY Library Command This will copy the file CONTROL to CONTROL ASC on drive 1 The LRL of the file will be changed from whatever it was in CONTROL to one byte in length This is an excellent way to convert a data file to a file that could be handled by a word processo
251. in the system or display a space map of a disk drive The syntax is FREE d P d An optional drivespec specifying a free space map of a specified floppy drive An optional parameter that directs output to the printer as well as the video display To invoke the free command simply type FREE at the DOS Ready prompt The display format of the FREE command will display the identical disk configuration information as displayed by the header of the DIR command DOS will respond with a display similar to this which may vary slightly in appearance depending on the system the top line is shown here strictly for illustration only Drive diskname diskdate cyldh Free fffff f sssss s Fi mmm nnn Drive 0 DOSS31 11 15 91 40D1 Free 87 0 180 0 Fi 97 128 Drive 1 DATADISK 06 01 91 3551 Free 19 0 88 0 Fie 39 64 The first line gives the drive number the disk name and date the disk configuration the amount of free and total space on the disk followed by the quantity of free and total files on the disk Specifically the information given in each of the fields is aa This field shows the drive number that the rest of the information in the line will pertain to bb This diskname field shows the name of the disk established with the FORMAT utility program cc This diskdate field shows the date of creation or the date of the last Mirror Image backup to the diskette 160 Mee lee ee ee dd ee gg hh
252. install MemDISK first 250 L COM amp RS232x Serial Driver Programs COM and RS232x These programs are drivers for the RS 232 serial hardware They allow you to set your RS 232 parameters to values that match other RS 232 devices parameters for COM DVR are set with the SETCOM command SET devspec TO serial DVR parm parm devspec Is the device to be used with the RS 232 normally CL or the Comm Line serial Model I RS232R LX 80 RS232L Model IU RS232T MAX 80 RS232M Model 4 COM Baud Sets the BAUD rate to any supportable rate BREAK Determines the recetved character if any acepted as a system BREAK Parity Sets the PARITY switch ON or OFF If ON is specified EVEN or ODD may also be used PORT 0 or 1 to select the A or B channel Stop Sets the stop bits either 1 or 2 Word sets the word length 5 to 8 bits DTIR sw Data Terminal Ready RTS sw Request To Send CD sw Carrier Detect CTiS sw Clear To Send DSR sw Data Set Ready Ri sw Ring Indicator The RS232R driver program will accept and configure the RS 232 hardware in the Model I Radio Shack interface RS232L is for the LX 80 The RS232T driver program will accept and configure the RS 232 291 COM amp RS232x Serial Driver Programs hardware in the Model IH The COM driver program is for the Model 4 All are installed using the SET command The defaults for the Model I configuration parameters will be the switch setting
253. ions per physical line Logical lines may continue on more than one physical line as long as a OD does not appear which would terminate the logical linc The lt ENTER gt is used to terminate a physical line If a non hex digit is entered the error message Bad hex digit encountered will be displayed and the build will abort BUILD MYPROGA FIX 0 This would build a file with the desired extension of FLX for use with the PATCH program 65 CAT amp CLS Library Commands CAT This DOS version 6 library command generates an abbreviated disk directory It s syntax is CAT J partspec filespec d1 d2 parm parm a Exclude files which match partspec Partial filespec with possible wild card characters d Optional drive specification d2 Optional Model 4 drive designation to request a directory display of drives dl d2 inclusive parm Paramaters identical to that shown for the DIR command It s operation is identical to the DIR command with the parameter entry A N 3 CLS This library command clears the video screen It s syntax is CLS It s operation is identical to the simultaneous depression of the lt SHIFT gt lt CLEAR gt keys The action also restores the video to wide column mode and restores normal video if reverse video was active The cursor is repositioned to row 0 column 0 66 fee Week Wee L i CMDFILE Utility Command CMDFILE Utility This is a Mo
254. is is a disk that contains the DOS system files A system as complex and flexible as DOS would occupy considerable memory space to be able to provide all of its features DOS however makes extensive use of overlays in order to minimize the amount of memory reserved for system use An overlay is a module that loads into memory overlaying anything which was loaded there previously In this manncr many functions can occupy the same arca of memory being loaded and used only when specifically needed The compromise in using an overlay driven system is that while a user s application is in progress certain disk file activities requested of the system may require the operating system to load different overlays to satisfy the request This could cause the system to run slightly slower than a less sophisticated system which has more of its file access routines always resident in memory The use of overlays also requires that a SYSTEM diskette be available in drive 0 the system drive The second type of disk wilt be called a DATA DISK This is a disk that has been formatted but contains no DOS system files This would be the type of disk you would normally use in a drive other than drive 0 No matter which type of disk you are using the formatting process will put two files on the disk BOOT SYS and DIR SYS These files contain information about the type of disk and the disk directory and are normally invisible to the user Under no circu
255. is to let you create files to automatically control applications programs and to maintain the data generated by these programs Compilation description andterms The purpose of the compilation phase is to read in the JCL file line by line checking for directly executable lines keyboard responses and execution macros and to evaluate any compilation statements and to write the resultant lines to a file called SYSTEM JCL After the compilation is complete control would normally then be passed to the second phase the execution of the compiled SYSTEM JCL file The DO command allows for four different methods to DO a JCL file Briefly recapped they are 292 S EEEE ea a a a ll m iaiia aami r a aa enema te ee naa met a et a aes cae Batch Processing Job Control Language DO filespec Execute only DO Execute current SYSTEM JCL file DO filespec Compile only to SYSTEM JCL DO filespec Compile to SYSTEM JCL then execute SYSTEM JCL As stated earlier the JCL works by substituting lines in a file for keyboard entries However when using the compile phase a JCL file is not restricted to using a series of executable commands to create these substitution lines All that is required is that the SYSTEM JCL file contain only executable lines after the compile phase is completed The user is allowed to create a file consisting of e Directly executable commands e Pre arranged keyboard responses e JCLe
256. ith the extension CMD will be copied from drive 0 to drive 1 Note that the wcc has no actual effect on the backup Specifying the CMD will look at all CMD files just as the CMD will If the file exists on drive 1 it will be overwritten otherwise it will be created at this time No files on drive 1 will be touched except for the CMD files copied from drive 0 BACKUP AT 2 3 MOD This command will backup all visible files whose filename is eight characters long and contains AT as the last two letters Only those files that meet this criteria and have been modified will be copied A backup by class will be invoked BACKUP S 1 2 This command will backup all visible files whose extensions are three characters long ending with the letter S The wce masks the first two characters of the extension so the extensions BAS TSS SYS etc would all match A backup by class will be invoked BACKUP CMD 0 1 This command will backup all visible files from drive 0 to drive 1 except those that have the extension CMD BACKUP 1 1 58 ae L ke BACKUP Utility Command This command will backup between two disks in drive 1 You will be prompted to switch between the source disk and destination disk at the appropriate times The disks involved in this type of backup must allow a mirror image backup or the backup will abort This command could be used to backup a data
257. ives currently enabled Only one DRIVE d parameter may be entered on the command line The parameters for this command are as follows d Designates the drive number affected sw Specifies the switch ON or OFF ON will set the write protect status and OFF remove it and allow the drive to be 226 oe Lo SYSTEM Library Command written to Setting WP to OFF will not over ride any hardware write protection in effect i e a write protect tab The command with no drivespec specified will act globally That is SYSTEM WP ON will write protect all drives in the system and SYSTEM WP OFF will remove any software write protection that has been done on any drive The WP OFF parameter will have no effect on a disk physically protected with a write protect tab Note that if the switch ON or OFF is not specified ON is assumed SYSTEM FAST amp SYSTEM SLOW These commands are used only if a suitable clock speed up modification has been installed in your computer unit or it is designed to run at 4 Mitz They will modify certain timing loops in the DOS to accommodate the current processor clock speed as well as switching the software controlled clock These two commands have precedence over any other SYSTEM command and will always be invoked before any of the other commands are carried out No memory will be used by these parameters The version 5 Model HI FASTI SLOW parameters will utilize the Model 4 hardware
258. key is held down during power up or reset the computer will immediately enter ROM BASIC Otherwise you may be prompted to enter the date and or time After answering these prompts there are several keys that will modify the remaining boot sequence if held down They are presented in the reference material for the BOOT command Once the system has booted and displayed the message DOS Ready it is ready to accept a command from the user DOS file descriptions Throughout the manual you will see references to filespec and devspec These are abbreviations for file specification and device specification Due to the device independence of DOS it is possible to 16 Me Sem Gea Introduction to DOS interchange these two terms in most commands For example you can copy your keyboard to your line printer or to a disk file You can even append information from a device onto the end of a disk file Each command will give detailed instructions and examples of the interchanging of filespecs and devspecs if applicable Certain DOS commands allow the use of partspecs partial filespecs This will allow you to use the filename and extension fields to create groups of ftles with common filespecs and then access these files as a group DOS creates default extensions in the filespec during some op erations Other operations will use these default extensions when searching for a file Following is a list o
259. kk A ROUTE Library Command Before routing any device to a disk file it is advisable to determine the amount of free space available on the diskette Make sure the space available on the disk is adequate to hold the amount of data you wish to route to it A Disk space full error may lock up the system if encountered when writing to a file via the ROUTE command The constant EOF maintenance file mode may be useful to invoke when routing to disk files see use of the trailing character with filespecs in the Glossary This will cause the EOF End Of File to be updated after each buffer is written to the file If EOF maintenance is not invoked then the EOF will not be written to the file until the routing is reset which will properly close the file If a file is not properly closed the data written to it may not be recoverable If a Disk space full error is encountered when the EOF maintenance has been invoked all data up to the last full buffer written to the file will be intact and the file will be readable by the system 204 ee RUN Library Command RUN The RUN command will load a program into memory and then invoke it The program must be in load module format The syntax is RUN X filespec parm parm filespec is any valid DOS filespec of a file in load module format X is optional to invoke the program from a non system disk for the single drive user optional parameter
260. l cures for these problems The system seems to access the wrong disk drives or cannot read the diskettes There are two main causes of this problem If you have special hardware it must be configured properly with the SYSTEM DRIVE DRIVER command Check the drive table display with the DEVICE command and make sure that tt shows the correct drive configuration If you have trouble reading diskettes created on other operating systems refer to the REPAIR and CONV Utilities Those sections will explain what is necded to make these types of disks readable e RS 232 communications do not work or function incorrectly If you experience RS 232 problems the first thing you should do is to make sure both ends are operating with the same RS 232 parameters baud rate word length stop bits and parity If these parameters are not the same at each end the data sent and received will appear scrambled Some hardware such as serial printers require handshaking when running above a certain baud rate It may be necessary to hook the hardware s handshake line such as the BUSY line to an appropriate RS 232 lead such as CTS e Random system crashes re occurring disk I O errors system lock up and other random glitches keep happening If you encounter these types of problems the first thing to check is the cable connections between the TRS 80 and the peripherals The contacts can oxidize and this can cause many different rando
261. l automatically recover the date that was last set and will not bother with prompting for the date The date that had been set will be displayed and the system will continue Should you wish to examine the date that is set in the system simply type DATE and press lt ENTER gt If the date has been properly set the system will return the currently set date in day of week month day of month ycar format The current date will also be sent to the Job Log if active If you have disabled the initial date prompt the message Date not in systern will be displayed Should you wish to set the date to one other than the system is currently using simply enter DATE mm dd yy The new date will be set by the system DATE 01 04 95 sets the date for the first month January the 4th day and the 95th 1995 year On the Model I the SYSTEM UPDATE command will allow the date to change when the system s real time clock rolls past midnight Due to hardware restrictions this is not possible on the Model HI Because the real time clock may be turned off during certain I O functions most notably during the BACKUP and FORMAT utilities and sometimes during other disk I O the time and date may not remain accurate If the computer is kept in a constant power on state from day to day do not depend on the system clock for exact timing functions unless you have a hardware clock installed The SETDATE program may be provided to allow you to set or read
262. l be taken in an input box and the input box will be positioned vertically along the right hand edge of the display When in the 128 character mode these types of inputs will be taken directly to the right of the command buffer No input box will appear but a flashing cursor will be present indicating that an input is requested It is advised that when using FED the lt BREAK gt key should always remain cnabled as some FED commands are exittcd by the use of the lt BREAK gt key gan lt A gt lt B gt lt C gt cccccc lt D gt lt E gt lt F gt nnnnnn lt G gt lt H gt lt l gt nnnn lt M gt lt R gt nnnn lt S gt lt ENTER gt lt T gt lt X gt lt ENTER gt lt Z gt lt BREAK gt lt ENTER gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt SHIFT gt lt gt 140 FED Utility Command FED Commands Enter ASCII character modify mode Position to the Beginning record ASCII Character string search for cccccc Dump Disk File to printer from current position Position to the Ending record Find Hex string nnnnnn Go to the next occurrence of last search Hex or ASCII 7 Enter Hex modify mode Locate Hex load address nnnn Memory location of a specified byte New File request open a different file Output a top of form to printer X 0C Print current record in edit b
263. l output format LINE in text file where ASCII list is to begin The Logical Record Length to be used to display a file when in the hex mode Sets non stop display mode assumed if P is selected Sets line numbering mode for ASCII text Set tab stops and expansion for an ASCII listing n 1 32 8 Directs output to the line printer Record number where hex list is to begin If no parameters are specified the LIST command will list the file in ASCH format and the logical record length LRL of the file will be read from the directory Normal ASCII format will strip the high bit from each character in effect displaying only those characters in the range X 00 to X 7F The ASCII8 parameter may be used to see all characters including graphics characters 173 LIST Library Command The display output defaults to paged display mode 23 lines V6 or 15 lines V5 of ASCII information 16 lines of hexadecimal will be displayed then the listing will pause lt ENTER gt will resume the paged display or type lt C gt to continue in non stop mode You may specify LIST NS to force the listing to display in non stop mode NS may be abbreviated to N If you select the P output mode i e output to a printer N is automatically specified The DOS version 5 hexadecimal display mode produces a combined hexadecimal and ASCII display of a complete 256 byte record via a compressed display mode The separate disp
264. lay format is available by turning off the compressed display mode via the C OF F parameter The parameters shown may be entered in the same command line such as LIST TESTFILE 0 HEX REC 5 LRL 80 P If an extension is not used in the filespec a default of TXT will be used If no file with the TXT extension is found LIST will search for a file with an extension of all blanks Here are some examples of how LIST handles the default file extension of TXT LIST TESTFILE 0 The system will first search drive 0 for a file named TESTFILE TXT If not found it will then search for a file named TESTFILE LIST TESTFILE The system will search all active drives for a file called TESTFILE TXT and list the first file named TESTFILE TXT it encounters If this file is not found it will search all active drives for a file named TESTFILE again listing the first TESTFILE it encounters LIST TESTFILE SCR The system will search all drives for a file called TESTFILE SCR and list the first file named TESTFILE SCR encountered If the file is not found the LIST command will not search for TESTFILE TXT 174 few Nees fe Ee DORI besa LIST Library Command The parameters of the LIST command will determine the output format of the information in the listed file Refer to the following section for a complete explanation and the proper use of these parameters Note that the NUM and LINE parameters are for ASCII
265. le density booting 211 double density controller 34 154 211 double pound sign 308 double sided 154 download 85 DRIVE 224 Drive Code Table 115 179 201 225 226 229 231 326 drive motor 117 225 drive motor startup 33 drive number physical 32 drive disabling 225 drive enabling 225 DRIVER 226 driver 67 118 207 326 drives changing assignments 2 drivespec 12 32 121 326 dual density 51 152 211 DUMP 135 Dump To Disk 78 DVR 17 208 E ECM 258 editing text files 236 334 End of File 134 EOF 142 255 326 EOF maintenance 204 expanded memory 213 216 ext 327 Extended Cursor Mode 258 extended debugger 106 extension 4 F FAST 119 227 249 FCB 203 327 FDUBL 23 154 201 211 254 FED 137 file 4 File already open 199 file closing 204 File Control Block 202 file editor 137 file Ieftopen 199 filename 4 327 files deleting 190 193 filespec 11 16 327 FILTER 118 149 327 filter 23 25 118 FIX 17 185 327 FLOPPY 273 FLOPPY DCT 24 FLT 17 149 foreground task 328 form feed 157 247 FORMAT 3 22 103 152 160 211 231 246 254 FORMS 23 150 157 214 274 297 FORMS FLT 157 281 FREE 53 121 156 160 270 free space 53 161 full duplex 80 81 pen m qa a re s n SS eer a araa ee ae a T V be Fae yh fe eon eee G gran 3 5 309 328 granule 3 101 162 GRAPHIC 22
266. le named SYSTEM JCL If this file does not exist it will bc placcd on the first available drive which is not write protected Once the line is compiled it is then invoked directly from the SYSTEM JCL filc There must be at least one available enabled and not write protectcd drive in the system to compile and invoke a JCL file When gencrating the SYSTEM JCL file DO will automatically search for the first available non write protected drive to create the output However 131 a arr a t DO Library Command an invoke only option is available with a DO control character and will be explained later Please note that the occurrence of any error will terminate the DO execution The lt BREAK gt key if not disabled will allow you to manually abort the DO The three control characters will change the compile and execution phases of the DO command When using these characters a space character is mandatory between the word DO and the character If the space is omitted the character will be ignored Note that if no character is specified both the compile and execution will be done The LABEL parameter will allow you to create JCL files with multiple entry points Each entry point can indicate a different location at which processing will begin Note If the LABEL function is used the compile phase must be done or the DO will abort with an error message If the LABEL parameter is specified the JC
267. lel printer This is the Job Log a time stamped log of commands This is the Standard Input presently unused by DOS This is the Standard Output presently unused by DOS Note that these are just the DOS system supplied devices it is possible for you to create your own devices There is another DOS device that is referenced in this manual even though not shown in a normal device table This device is the Communications Line CL it is usually associated with your computer s serial port The DOS device independence makes it possible to route devices from one to another or even to a disk file It allows setting the device to a totally different driver routine It makes possible single or multiple links of devices to other devices or to disk files In other words you may re direct the I O between the system its devices and the disk drives in almost any manner 26 ey fee Hees ee te ete 78 e miara DOS SYSTEM DEVICES AND DISK DRIVES NOTE Once a normal DOS device has been pointed away from its Original driver routine it may be returned to its normal power up state with the RESET command A user created device may be either disabled or completely removed via the RESET and REMOVE KILL commands Besides just sounding impressive this device independence feature has many practical aspects For example the line printer is normally controlled by a very simple driver routine However the printer outp
268. licenses for LDOSILSDOS or purchase extra copies from your dealer The program may be copied but for the purpose of archival copies only for the original purchaser s computer Determination of suitability for any particular purpose whatsoever is the sole responsibility of the end user No warranties expressed or implicd are given with regard to the suitability of this product for a particular purpose or application Software is made available on an as is basis and MISOSYS Inc shall not be liable for any actual or consequential damages whether real or alleged arising from the use of this software ge ee yg ee Fee Tig ge et ee eee a a a ane att ae ENS SS Se ee ee ee ee ee a T et E ee wn a Oe Ea ieee zen a ORE Table of Contents Introduction to DOS seseeoseososssessoroeseseessecesesesossoceessesse L Nomenclature used in this Reference Manual ccccccssossessoee 1 Usinp this Mantal iss c25 occas ances stacslsceca vases eaves cacsussecvavecueansuseuse cans 1 What is a Disk Operating System DOS scsccssssesscrseeeecene 2 DISK Ol CAN IZ SUIOR 552 wheats ssetentecsccdyusten cela eiacsassvsiacauasaiepanitieeSiextics 3 FILES How information is stored sscccccceccesesesssnsscecsosessess 4 DOS organization and files cccescceccsscssecevscsececreccrsssvasasseoseecs 4 DOS and Dev iCes sicccevesssecscecdesscpsvte e S 6 Usine te DOS TAGS onain cued lacsuccuvctaets 6 Viewing
269. ll simply be ignored as the 25K has already been set aside by the original create command Creating the file to more than 25K will be allowed and will permanently assign the extra space allocation to the file Tr A ati miele a El o d tl TS TO A pA i PN TT I SY ER A aa a a SE A a A a ee eA LT A a aa DATE Library Command DATE The DATE command is used to set the month day and year for use with your applications programs and by DOS as it creates and handles your disks The acceptable range of dates is from January 1 1980 through December 31 2011 years 1980 through 1999 are entered as 80 99 while years 2000 2011 are entered as 00 11 The syntax is DATE mm dd yy mm is the 2 digit month 01 to 12 is the 2 digit day 01 to 31 yy is the 2 digit year 80 to 99 1980 1999 or 00 11 2000 2011 DATE with no parameter specified will display the current date It is important to set the date with DOS because DOS uses the date when creating and accessing files and when making backups and formatting disks If the date is not set DOS will make no date entries in the directory when it would be useful to see the actual date When looking at the directory you are able to see the mod date when a file was created or fast written to If the date was not set this last written to date will not be updated and the file would not show the true last written to date When doing backups or formatting DOS will u
270. lly your program and data files The reason for having methods of keeping files from being displayed by a simple DIR command is one of readability It is much easier to find program and data files on a disk if you do not have to search through all the different system and utility filenames Parameters are provided to allow all files on a disk to be displayed Directory parameters The first parameter discussed will be the drivespec It is generally entered as a colon followed by the desired drive number The command DIR 0 would display the directory of logical drive 0 and DIR 5 would do the same for drive 5 The command DIR with no drivespec would display the directories of all enabled drives Specifying a drive that is not enabled will cause an Illegal drive number error message to appear If you are doing a DIR command you may omit the colon if you are not specifying a filespec or partspec The DOS version 6 command DIR 0 121 DIR Library Command would be the same as DIR 0 The parameters to include the system and invisible files are S and I Visible files will always be included in any display The command DIR 0 1 would display all visible and invisible files on drive 0 the command DIR 0 S would display all visible and system files and the command DIR 0 1 S would display all files For DOS version 6 operation a drive range may be specified as follows d1 d2 displays the directory information for drive
271. load addresses of the output file offset it enter the new base load address For example if the existing load is from 4300H to 5000H and you want it to load starting at 5300H enter the base address 5300H After entering the new base address you will receive the query Do you want to add the offset driver routine Y N E C gt A response of E will exit the program while C will cancel the request and return you to the main query If you do not want the restoring driver routine appended respond with N otherwise respond Y It may not be immediately obvious why you would want to offsct a file but not add the appendage One use would be to change the base address of a relocatable driver routine Another would be to change the load address of Tiny PASCAL files a 71 CMDFILE Utility Command Do you want to disable the interrupts Y N E C gt A response of E will exit the program while C will cancel the request and return you to the main query If you want to disable the interrupts which should be done if the program does any tape operation or will overlay the disk operating al S erup BFORESSINE a then respond Y else N Do you want lo disable the keyboard debounce Y N E C gt A response of E will exit the program while C will cancel the request and return you to the main query If you want to disable the keyboard debounce routine which should be done if th
272. lphanumeric mode Characters outside of the displayable range X 20 X BF will be displayed as periods DOS version 6 ASCII entry is performed as noted for the M command Command B Move Block of Memory _ The command syntax is Baaaa bbbb nnnn lt ENTER gt This command will move a block of memory from one location to another aaaa is the starting address of the memory block to move bbbb is the destination address of the memory block nnnn is the number of bytes to move Entering a 0 will move 65535 bytes and will cause the extended debugger to function improperly Command C Call Address The command syntax is C This command will single step through the instructions pointed to by PC the Program Counter If any CALL instruction is encountered the routine called will invoke in full The destination of any jump instruction encountered must be in RAM memory or the C command will be ignored Command D Display Address The command syntax is Daaaa lt ENTER gt This command starts the memory display from the address aaaa Command E Enter Data The command syntax is Eaaaa lt SPACE gt 10 Ra J a i A Damama cement A a a a aa RN A aa amaa RR A A a A a aaa a fan L L Lo kss oo i DEBUG Library Command This command allows you to enter data directly into memory starting at address aaaa The contents of memory address aaaa will be displayed and you may then type in two hexade
273. lse all lines up to the corresponding END will be ignored Since the last END corresponds to the first IF none of the lines in this example would be written out to the SYSTEM JCL file Assuming from this point on that the first IF evaluates true two lines will always be written out These are the Comment A and Comment D lines The first nest is IF B If B is true the Comment B line will be written out If B is false all lines including the IF C block will be skipped up to the JEND corresponding to the IF B 315 A 4 LE TLS AS AR SERRA BR ER mt EE TT A al ALA A alate LS Batch Processing Job Control Language The next nest is IF C The only time this will be considered is if both A and B have tested true As normal if C is true the Comment C will be written out Although not shown in the example it is perfectly allowable to use the logical operators when nesting IFs Again note the use of the comments after the END macros Using comments such as these will help you follow the logic flow especially until you become familiar with using nested IF macros Nested INCLUDE macros When using the INCLUDE macro it is allowable for the included file to also contain another INCLUDE macro This is referred to as nesting Briefly stated the following rules will apply e The maximum nest level will be ten active INCLUDE macros e An INCLUDE macro cannot be the last line i
274. lt P gt lt Q gt lt R gt lt S gt lt T gt lt U gt lt V gt lt W gt lt X gt lt Y gt lt Z gt V6 t eee uses aioa Leones De o Keyboard Driver Program Abbreviations A gt Notation for the lt CTRL gt key CLR gt Notation for the lt CLEAR gt key CLRSH gt Depression in order of the lt CLR gt and lt SH gt keys CTRL gt Control key operated by lt SHIFT gt lt U gt or lt CTRL gt key ECM gt Extended Cursor Mode toggled by lt CLR gt lt SH gt lt SPACE gt SCM gt Standard Cursor Mode toggled by lt CLR gt lt SH gt lt SPACE gt SH s gt Notation for the lt SHIFT gt key SHCLR gt Depression in order of the lt SH gt and lt CLR gt keys Notes 1 Can also be generated with lt gt if not in ECM 2 Can also be generated with lt gt gt if not in ECM 3 Can also be generated with lt l gt if not in ECM 4 Can also be generated with lt ENTER gt 5 Can also be generated with lt SH gt lt gt if not in ECM 6 Can also be generated with lt SH gt lt gt gt if not in ECM 7 Can also be gencrated with lt SH gt lt T gt if not in ECM 8 Can also be generated with ff if not in ECM 9 Can also be generated with lt CTRL gt lt ENTER gt 10 Also generated in SCM with lt CLEAR gt lt gt 11 Used to empty the type ahead buffer 12 Used by KeyStroke Multiply if KSM is active 13 Used by the MiniDos filter
275. m on LDOS amp LS DOS Reference Manual 7 Cat No M 40 060 a a Copyright 1992 MISOSYS Inc All rights reserved ni E NT E a Le Lo a lL m r rece ee e en eT a L keal eri L LDOS LSDOS Reference Manual An 8 bit Operating System for Z80 based Computers MISOSYS Inc P O Box 239 Sterling VA 22170 703 450 4181 L S DOS User Manual L S DOS Reference Manual Copyright 1982 1992 MISOSYS Inc Combined Manual First Edition 1992 All Rights Reserved No part of this reference manual may be reproduced in whole or in part either manually or automatically by any means including but not limited to the use of electronic electromagnetic xerographic optical network or BBS information and retrieval systems without the express written consent of MISOSYS Inc Unauthorized reproduction and or adaptation is a violation of United States Copyright laws and may subject the violator to civil penalties or criminal prosecution Program License Agreement When accompanied by an Operating System disk or disks this package is sold for use by the original purchaser on his her machine only If being purchased by a company school or other entity with multiple machines multiple users or networked systems single copy purchases for multiple use are not allowed or supported Please write inquiring about our reasonable multiple use andlor site
276. m problems Clean the edge card connectors on the CPU unit and the peripherals and be sure all other cable connections are secure 39 L S DOS User Manual If you experience constant difficulty in disk read write operations chances are that the disk drive heads need cleaning There are kits available to clean disk heads or you may wish to have the disk drive serviced at a repair facility If you need to frequently clean the disk heads you might be using some defective disk media Check the diskettes for any obvious signs of flaking or excess wear and dispose of any that appear even marginal Tobacco smoke and other airborne contaminants can build up on disk heads and can cause read write problems Disk drives in dirty locations may need to have their heads cleaned as often as once a week One common and often overlooked cause of random type problems is STATIC ELECTRICITY In areas of low humidity static electricity is present even if actual static discharges are not felt by the computer operator Be aware that static discharges can cause system glitches as well as physically damage computer hardware and disk media If the system boots but things continually go wrong from then on hold down the lt CLEAR gt key during the boot and then re configure the system 40 ees eee oe APPEND Library Command DOS Commands APPEND This command tets you append add one file onto the end of another Its primary us
277. mand specified the RS 232 parameters to match those expected by the main frame To download a file use the following procedure Type in the command to cause the main frame to list the file but do not press the lt ENTER gt ID your receive file by pressing lt CLEAR gt lt 6 gt followed by lt CLEAR gt lt 9 gt Type in the filename in response to the prompt Type in lt CLEAR gt lt 6 gt followed by lt CLEAR gt lt gt to open the receive buffer If the file you wish to receive will be larger than your available memory buffer you should press lt CLEAR gt lt 7 gt followed by lt CLEAR gt lt gt at this time This will cause the file to be written to the disk as it is being received Press lt ENTER gt to start the file listing When the fisting is complete type in lt CLEAR gt lt 6 gt followed by lt CLEAR gt lt gt and if you have not already done so lt CLEAR gt lt 7 gt followed by lt CLEAR gt lt gt to write the file to disk When the write is complete type lt CLEAR gt lt 6 gt followed by lt CLEAR gt lt 0 gt to turn off FR and DTD and close the receive file Most main frame computers and some bulletin board systems support XON XOFF handshaking This mode is used for transmitting files to the host as a series of single tines Each line is transmitted to the host while your machine pauses until the host acknowledges receipt by transmitting an XON to you thus resuming your transmission with the next li
278. may also be used Keys may be assigned special commands functions or characters with the KeyStroke Multiply KSM feature These associated functions are then available when the lt CLEAR gt and desired unshifted key are pressed together Due to this it is necessary to press the lt SHIFT gt lt CLEAR gt to clear the screen when the KI DVR program is used alternatively you may use the CLS command The DOS version 5 MiniDOS filter program will give you immediate access to certain DOS functions such as a disk directory or amount of free space a line printer top of form command es the last DOS command and a disk file delete command e The lt SHIFT gt lt BREAK gt key combination will re select a 5 25 disk drive that has timed out and hung up the system This may happen if you attempt to access a drive with the drive door open or if there was no diskette in the drive etc It should prevent having to reset the entire system Ready the drive for access and then press the lt SHIFT gt lt BREAK gt keys to complete the operation Do not press the lt SHIFT gt lt BREAK gt keys if the system is currently active e The disk drives in DOS can be 3 5 5 25 8 or hard disk DOS will support a total of eight disk drives The drives may be double single sides and density and up to 96 tracks on floppy disks Hard disk support will be determined by the manufacturer 15 L S DOS User Manual or distributor of the hardware No
279. mended that the KI DVR program with the TYPE option be active in your runtime system It requires very little memory space and will make using DOS even more pleasant Use of the KI DVR program will enable you to easily type in either upper or lower case It also establishes the lt SHIFT gt lt O0 gt key as a CAPS lock key 14 Peo bee ee Pos ens introduction to DOS If you are installing KI DVR under DOS version 5 on a Model 4 computer the lt CAPS gt key will be used for CAPS lock the lt CTRL gt key will be used for CTRL and the function keys will be active Once the KI DVR program has been set shifting between the CAPS lock mode and the normal upper lower case mode can be accomplished by pressing the lt SHIFT gt lt 0 gt or CAPS keys In the normal upper lower case mode unshifted alphabetic keys are entered as lower case and shifted keys as upper case the same as on a standard typewriter In the CAPS lock mode any alphabetic character will be displayed as upper case whether the lt SHIFT gt key is held down or not On the Model IH and under DOS version 6 you will initially find that all keyboard entries will be in lower case The Model I will initialize in the CAPS lock mode This may be changed on either machine as described in the reference material for the SYSTEM cominand When using the KI DVR or resident DOS version 6 keyboard driver program the KSM and MiniDOS where applicable functions
280. mirror image The syntax is DISKCOPY s d V6 QFB s d parm parm V5 S d Is the Source and Destination drives The colon is optional for DOS version 5 DOS 5 parameter used to specify whether all cylinders of the source disk will be read and copied to the destination disk or only allocated cylinders will be used The switch ON or OFF may be specified with the default being OFF Query sw Query for parameters not specified Switch ON or OFF may be used The default is OFF Vl sw Parameter used to specify whether or not a verify of the destination disk is to be performed on the Ist pass The switch ON or OFF may be used with the default being ON Parameter used to specify whether or nota verify of the destination disk is to be performed on the 2nd pass The switch ON or OFF may be used with the default being OFF Both DISKCOPY and QFB perform a single pass format and copy of a 3 5 or 5 25 double density floppy disk They will duplicate both single and double sided disks QFB will also duplicate single density and other media formats and sizes permitted by DOS version 5 Attempting to copy unsupported disk types will abort the program with an appropriate error message The s and d are the source and destination drive numbers respectively and cannot be the same drive After starting DISKCOPY or QFB you will be prompted to insert the source and destination disks 128 DISKCOPY Utility Command Consider t
281. mmand This command will change the name of the disk in drive 1 to DATA It will also change the master password to SECRET Note that the current master password was specified as BOSSMAN with the MPW parameter ATTRIB LOCK This command will first prompt you for the disk s master password if other than PASSWORD It will then change the passwords of all the user s visible non system non password protected files to the disk s current master password This command will be carried out on drive 0 as no drivespec was used ATTRIB 1 NAME This command will first prompt you for the drive 1 disk s master password unless it is PASSWORD It will then prompt you for the new name to be given to the disk 47 AUTO Library Command AUTO The AUTO command lets you modify the power up BOOT sequence by specifying a command to be invoked immediately after power up reset or re boot The syntax is AUTO 1 d dos command d invokes the AUTO command on d displays the AUTO command currently on d the designated drive otherwise drive 0 is used is optional and if used will disable the ability of lt ENTER gt to suspend the execution of the AUTO dos command and also disable the lt BREAK gt key dos Ccommand can be any executable DOS command with or without parameters the maximum length is 31 V5 74 V6 characters in length If the AUTO dos command has disabled the lt BREAK gt key it
282. mmand QFB 0 1 and you will be prompted to insert the source disk the DOSXTRA in drive 0 Do so and with another blank disk in drive 1 press lt ENTER gt The duplication will now begin When prompted to insert a system disk place the DOS system disk back in drive 0 and press lt ENTER gt After the Backups are completed After the initial backups of your DOS disk are completed remove the DOS master diskette from drive 0 and put it in a safe place Be sure to leave it in its original jacket to protect it from dust and other contamination Label the backup copies of the diskettes as original backups of the DOS master diskette You should use these diskettes to make any other backups you require Do not use the master diskettes except to create a backup aS just described It is extremely important that you now completely read the next section of the DOS user s manual This section contains an overall view of the operating system as well as explanations of certain terms and conventions Entering DOS commands Looking through this manual you should notice a very distinct structure regarding the command syntax of the DOS system Each command will begin with a very brief description of the function involved Immediately following will be a syntax block This block will be laid out to show the command syntax allowable parameters with permissible abbreviations in CAPS if any A typical block might show the following 10
283. more than four of any one drive type 3 5 5 25 or 8 inch floppy or hard drive may be accessed Of course you must have the appropriate hardware and drivers for this If you have purchased a supported hard disk system driver programs and documentation for hard disk will be provided separately e The video display will allow display of upper and lower case characters assuming your hardware is capable of lower case display If you have a Model I with the switch type of modification be sure to have the switch in the lower case position when booting Keyboard entries will normally be displayed in all upper case unless the KI DVR program has been set If KI DVR is used keyboard entries will be displayed as determined by the mode normal or caps lock set with the lt SHIFT gt lt O gt function e All system hardware devices are totally independent of the normal routing structure Your system devices such as the video display and printer can be routed or linked almost any way you could desire to each other to a disk file to another device etc You can even create your Own logical devices e The cassette on the Model HI can be used in either the 500 or 1500 baud mode Use of the high speed 1500 baud mode requires the use of the HITAPE CMD program Both the BASIC and CMDFILE utilities allow high speed tape operation e Once you have powered up your system you can control the boot sequence to some extent Note that if the lt BREAK gt
284. mstances should you ever copy these files from one disk to another or attempt to delete them Doing so can render the disks involved totally useless DOS automatically will take care of updating any information in these two files mm i ee errr ec ry jm a A a A A peg at nn renee an mn ra aaa L S DOS User Manual DOS and Devices Devices are generally thought of as a physical piece of your computer hardware the video display keyboard printer etc The routines that control the I O for these devices can be the ones provided in the ROM if applicable or can be ones provided by DOS In either case there is a small section of memory set aside as a control block for each device With DOS you will have a certain amount of device independence Device independence will allow you to treat each of your devices individually As with files DOS uses a definite specification when accessing devices called a device specification or devspec A devspec is very easy to understand It consists of an asterisk followed by two alphabetic characters For example your keyboard devspec is KI Keyboard Input the video is DO Display Output and the printer is PR PRinter There are programs provided that will modify the I O routines for certain devices The DRIVER and FILTER section of this manual explains the functioning of these routines You can read that section and determine if you need the extra features provided by those
285. must specify the command VERIFY or VERIFY ON The command VERIFY OFF will disable the read after write verification The VERIFY command works by having the disk controller re read the sector just written and note that the read was successful The disk controller will normally compare the Cylical Redundancy Checksum CRC determined from the read with the CRC recorded when the sector was written It does not do a byte for byte verify on the information in the disk sector Anytime that an error is Gees the appropriate error message will be displayed Although having the VERIFY function turned on will provide the greatest reliability during disk I O it will also increase the overall processing time whenever a disk file is written to The user must determine if the increase in reliability warrants the increase in processing time All disk writes will automatically be verified during any BACKUP utitity function whether the VERIFY command has been issued or not Also certain critical writes to system tables and any write to the directory will always be verified 248 ee eee Mee ae CLICK Filter Program DOS Drivers and Filters CLICK FLT This DOS version 6 filter can be used to produce a tone from the sound generator inside your computer whenever a keyboard key is pressed It is installed with the syntax SET devspec CLICK FLT Char nn FILTER Kidevspec _ devspec Is the device name you assign to the filter
286. n a JCL file The following example uses three files to show how the lines in nested INCLUDE files are processed File 1 NESTO JCL nested procedure example ANCLUDE nestl l this is the end of the primary JCL EXIT File 2 NESTI JCL this Is the first nest ANCLUDE nesi2 this is the end of the first nest File 3 NEST2 JCL this is he second nest 316 TN NR EEE 0 RR tlt aaa Batch Processing Job Contro Language The above will result in a nest level of two two pending INCLUDEs If these three JCL files are saved as NESTO JCL NESTI JCL and NEST2 JCL and the NESTO JCL is compiled and executed it will result in the following dialogue NESTO JCL NESTI JCL ee NEST2 JCL nested procedure example this is the first nest this is the second nest this is the end of the first nest this is the end of the primary JCL The three compilation comments will be shown immediately as the JCL file is compiled When the compilation phase is complete the compiled SYSTEM JCL file will be executed In this example the execution phase will merely display a series of execution cominents As you can see from the ordcr of the displayed comments the files are executed similarly to nested FOR NEXT loops in BASIC After all INCLUDEs are detected the innermost last encountered INCLUDE file completes execution first with execution proceeding back towards the original INCLUDE
287. n a destination diskette will always be destroyed Also the Mod Flags of files on the source diskette will not be cleared 130 s on L DO Library Command DO The DO command invokes a user created JCL Job Control Language file The syntax is DO char filespec JCL LABEL parm parm char is an optional DO control character Seer bt 99 T Oe filespec is a valid filespec default extension JCL LABEL is an optional LABEL indicating a start point in the JCL file parm optional parameter s to be passed to the filespec JCL program during execution optional semi colon uscd to allow a DO command line greater than the maximum line length Note Please refer to the Batch Processing Job Control Language section of the manual for the creation of a JCL file pat mA The DO command will compile and or invoke a series of commands that have been created by the user and stored in an ASCII disk file The default file extension of the filespec is JCL No line in a JCL file may exceed one less than the maximum command line length of the DOS 63 characters in Icngth for Modcl I II 79 characters in length for Model 4 The DO command will also pass optional parameters and variables to the program being done The DO function is normally a two step operation the compile phase and the invoke phase During the compile a line is read from the specified file and then written to a fi
288. n drive 0 This command requires swapping diskettes several times in order to utilize the DOS system modules to perform the transfer The number of disk swaps can be kept to a minimuin by having system modules 2 3 and 8 for Model I II users resident in memory see the SYSTEM SYSRES library command You will be prompted for the correct diskette and when to insert it into the drive doing the copying The prompts are as follows Insert DESTINATION disk in drive d and press lt ENTER gt This references the diskette to receive the file You must have enough space left on that diskette to contain the entire file to be copied Under certain conditions this prompt may appear twice in a row Insert SOURCE disk in drive d and press lt ENTER gt 96 ese a ee Loo ens COPY Library Command This references the disk that contains the file to be copied Insert SYSTEM disk lt ENTER gt This is any DOS SYSTEM diskette If the diskette which is currently in drive 0 contains the complete system just press lt ENTER gt If the proper system modules 1 2 3 and 8 for Model I II users and 10 are resident in memory you may press lt ENTER gt without actually inserting a ays disk The disk swap prompts will be repeated as many times as nee until the copy is complete You cannot COPY X logical devices only disk files The disk files can be any type file made with any DOS compatible operating system Note that the
289. nce the main query prompt If you want to read in a disk file respond with a D If the file is to be input from tape respond with a T You may quit and return to DOS by entering an E A response of C will cancel the input and return you to the main query thus reinitializing the memory buffer If you have read in file s and want to begin a writing operation respond with lt ENTER gt The lt Q gt response permits display of a diskette directory Its syntax is Qd Where d is the drive spec If you omit the drivespec the drive 0 will be assumed If you enter an erroneous drive spec your entry will be ignored If you enter a drive which is not in your system the command will time out after about 10 seconds and you will receive another prompt 68 Lo L Lo be s i E ees CMDFILE Utility Command If you responded with D in order to read in a disk file you will be prompted for the filespec via the query Enter input file filespec gt Enter the filespec to begin the read operation If you leave the file extension blank a default extension of CMD will be assumed If any disk J O error results or any disk problem that results in the file not being read to completion no fragment of the file will be added to the memory buffer A disk file that is re read will properly append any file previously read In order to read in a cassette file you will be prompted to ready the tape with
290. nd P2 The first conditional block is easy to understand If the KI token was entered on the DO command line KI DVR MINIDOS FLT and forms filter would all be applied If not all lines up to the first end would be ignored Regardless the command line BASIC would be written to the SYSTEM JCL file for execution As the compilation continued the if Pl and then the if P2 would be tested Again if either token was specified the RUN PROGRAM line would be written out In any case the last line written out would be the stop execution macro Instead of the two separate if macros to determine which if any BASIC program would be run we could have used an else macro in the following manner 298 ae Beas ee oe Batch Processing Job Contro Language fit Pl RUN PROGRAM 1 BAS else RUN PROGRAM2 BAS ffend Although this lets the operator select either program with a single token it also means that one program or the other will always be selected _ To test a JCL procedure the compile only DO filespec command can be uscd Once the compiling is complete the results can be examined by using the LIST command to list the SYSTEM JCL file to the video or printer Refer to the following examples using the previous MENU JCL example DO MENU KI P2 The resultant SYSTEM JCL file would be MENU JCL selection start up SET KI KI DVR TYPE JKL DOS 5 FILTER KI MINIDOS FLT DOS 5 F
291. nd filters This ensures that there is space available in low memory for Memdisk to reside If you omit the DRIVE parameter in the system command when installing MemDISK DOS displays Logical drive number required error message l You cannot specify drive 0 when installing MemDISK You must install MemDISK as another drive then use the SYSTEM SYSTEM 0 command to change drive 0 to MemDISK after first backing up the system files to it After MemDISK becomes the system drive you can PURGE SYSO SYS from the MemDISK MemDISK must be installed with the SET command If you attempt to invoke MemDISK as a command DOS displays the error message Must inslall via SYSILM DRIVER If you attempt to re imstall MemDISK in a different area of memory than the area that it was originally installed in you will get the error message MemDISK already Active MemDISK must always be re installed as it was initially installed If you specify the wrong drive number in the SYSTEM DRIVE drive DRIVER MEMDISK command and you attempt to disable tlie Memdisk then you receive the error message Target Drive not a MemDISK If you attempt to disable a MemDISK and there is no MemDISK in the system to disable then you receive the error message MemDISK not present 269 PN EE OE a i EO a l e eee e D AAA A MiniDOS Filter Program MiniDOS Model Mill only The MiniDOS filter program provides a means to ac
292. nd or request processed through the DOS command line interpreter will then be logged in the JL file along with the time of the request You may also enter comments or data directly into the Job Log by using a DOS comment line any line beginning with a period or by opening a Job Log file from BASIC and writing to it The Job Log may be turned off by using the RESET library command to reset JL which will also close the associated disk file 29 L S DOS User Manual Si The Standard Input SO The Standard Output The SI and SO devices are system generated devices provided by DOS although they are not presently used by the system Both devices will initially be shown pointed NIL These devices are available to the user CL The Comm Line This device has been designated CL strictly for the purpose of standardizing examples throughout this manual although any other available devspec could have been used such as DK CJ RS TM etc The CL device stands for the Communication Line It is not an actual physical piece of hardware but an area of memory used to talk to the RS 232 hardware This device will allow characters to be sent and received using the RS 232 interface The CL will not be shown in the device table unless CL is set to a serial driver program but is always available to you To enable CL simply use the SET command to set it to an appropriate driver program There is a SERIAL DVR program supplied on
293. nd will Print a block of memory from address aaaa to bbbb inclusively The output will contain both HEX and ASCII formats in the following manner agog bb bb bb ceccceccececccccc aaaa represents the current line address bb bb represents a line of 16 locations in HEX notation and cece represents the ASCII equivalents o the locations 11 mb DEBUG Library Command Command Q Query port The command syntax is QH lt ENTER gt or Q00 dd lt ENTER gt The Qii command syntax will display the byte at the input port ii The qoo dd command syntax will send the data byte dd to output port OO Command R Register Modify The command syntax is Rip dddd lt ENTER gt This command will modify the contents of a specified register pair rp represents the register pair to be modified dddd represents the new register contents The contents of the registers can be seen while in the register display mode The PC register may not be altered with this command Command S Full Screen Display Mode The command syntax is This command changes the display format from the register display mode to the Full Screen mode The full screen mode will display a page of memory 256 bytes with the current display address being contained in the display see the D command The register pairs will not be shown Command T Type ASCII The command syntax is taaaa lt SPACE gt This command will allow you to type ASCII chara
294. ne To accomplish this your file must have each line terminated with some line terminating character usually an ENTER As hosts generally have a maximum fine fength that they accept you should be sure that your file does not have any lines exceeding the host s limit The upload can follow this series of steps Designate the file that you want to send by entering lt CLEAR gt lt 5 gt followed by lt CLEAR gt lt 9 gt and entering its filespec in response to the ID query Tum on the handshake mode by entering lt CLEAR gt lt SH gt lt gt followed by lt ENTER gt assuming that the line terminating character in your file is lt ENTER gt Open the file at the host end 85 COMM Communications Utility Command and ready it for receiving by whatever command process your host requires Then tum on your file send by lt CLEAR gt lt 5 gt followed by lt CLEAR gt lt gt You will note that one line of your file will be transmitted and then your machine will pause Once the host sends you the XON the next line of the file will be automatically transmitted If you are operating in half duplex you may see the entire file displayed without any pauses as the file is read from your disk and is buffered awaiting transmission e When the transmission is complete turn off the handshake mode _ by lt CLEAR gt lt SH gt lt gt followed by lt CLEAR gt lt gt Then close _ up the file at the host end by whatever command process t
295. ne printer PR as fast as the printer can accept the characters Even if current program printing functions exist other functions will be carried out and the line printer will continue to receive data from the spooled buffers as fast as it can accept the data The other 216 kass Be Les lie be beee ies SPOOL Library Command program function processing will be carried on with little noticeable interruption If the 5K memory buffer is filled the data will then be written to the disk file TEXTFILE SPL on drive 0 SPOOL PR MEM 10 DISK This command will create a 10K memory buffer for any data that is to be sent to the line printer PR If a printer command is received the data will be immediately sent to the 10K memory buffer and then spooled to the line printer whenever the printer can accept it i e whenever the printer is not printing or otherwise in a BUSY or FAULT state Since the data is sent to the printer as a background interrupt task normal program execution will continue to take place Note that none of the spooled data will be sent to a disk file as the parameter DISK was specified without any size If the memory buffer is filled processing of the current program functions will halt until the line printer has printed enough data to bring the outstanding character count below 10k the size of the memory buffer If you are running an applications program that involves output to the line printer it is possible
296. ned totally by the PR FLT program not the FILTER command DOS version 5 users may use the following equivalent format FILTER PR USING PR FLT FORMS C 80 6 An equivalent format usable for DOS version 6 would be the following SET FF USING FORMS FLT FILTER PR FF FORMS C 80 1 6 Another filter routine provided on your DOS diskette is called KSM FLT It provides the KeyStroke Multiply feature of DOS FILTER KI USING KSM FLT USING MYKEYS KSM FILTER KI KSM MYKEYS The above DOS version 5 examples would produce identical results and are illustrations of how to establish a KSM filter program The DOS version 6 equivalent would be SET KS KSM MYKEYS FILTER Ki KS The KSM feature will now be enabled and would use the file MYKEYS KSM to provide the KSM phrases From the example you should see that the filtered device would be KI the keyboard and the filter program used would be called KSM FLT 150 AN ra L tas FILTER Library Command FILTER CL REMLF This command would filter the CL device s I O using the filter routine found in a user developed filter program called REMLF FLT For example if CL had been set with a SERIAL driver this command would filter I O to and from the RS 232 interface From the name of the program it may be assumed that the filter program may do something such as removing a linefeed after a carriage retum 151 em FE a te a rr aaa a e e rm r
297. nly commands For example let s assume that you have a program that requires the use of the printer filter program PR FLT Model IIHI or FORMS FLT DOS 6 to set the printer fine length margin and page length You could put the following command lines in a JCL file SET FF FORMS i DOS 6 FILTER PR PR FLT DOS 5 FORMS CHARS 80 MARGIN 10 LINES 60 If this JCL file were called START JCL using the command DO START at the DOS Ready prompt would execute the lines and apply the printer filter returning to the DOS Ready prompt Let us further assume that you now wish to go into BASIC and run a program The JCL fite could be expanded as follows SET FF FORMS DOS 6 FILTER PR PR FLT DOS 5 FORMS CHARS 80 MARGIN 10 LINES 60 BASIC RUN PROGRAM BAS Now using the command DO START will establish the printer filter enter BASIC and pass the command RUN PROGRAM BAS to BASIC The program would be loaded in from disk and executed However like the first example you will return to the DOS Ready prompt as soon as the first keyboard input is requested by the program To solve this problem we must add one of the special JCL execution commands called a MACRO to the end of the file JCL Execution Macros and Comments JCL execution macros perform many different functions They are always entered in the JCL file as two slashes followed by the name of the macro An execution comment is any line that starts with a period
298. not appear on the screen when the operation is complete However the system is still positioned as if the prompt were on the screen and is ready to take another input 270 aan MiniDOS Filter Program The full descriptions and parameters for each command will be listed here lt C gt The lt C gt command will toggle the clock display on or off This is identical to issuing a CLOCK ON or CLOCK OFF command lt D gt The lt D gt command will enter the system DEBUGger or extended DEBUGger providing it has been previously activated with the DEBUG or DEBUG EXT command lt F gt The lt F gt command will allow you see the free space available on a drive along with the disk s name and date of creation After selecting this command you will see the letter F enclosed within braces At this point enter the drive number of the target drive and press lt ENTER gt The display will be in the following format NNNNNNNNDDDDDDDD FFFF K Free N the disk name D the disk date of creation F the free K 1024 bytes in Hex notation lt K gt The lt K gt command will allow you to kill a specified file You will see the letter K appear with in braces At this point type in the filespec you wish to kill If no drivespec is included all drives will be searched and the first matching filespec will be killed lt P gt The lt P gt command will allow you to send a character to a line printer The
299. note that the parameters are character strings and must be enclosed in quotes These formats are DATE M1 D1 Y1 M2 D2 Y2 copies only those files whose mod dates fall between the two dates specified inclusive e DATE M1 D1 Y1 copies all files with mod dates equal to the specified date e DATE M1 D1 Y1 copies all files with mod dates less than or equal to the specified date e DATE M1 D1 Y1 copies all files with mod dates greater or equal to the specified date Note The ftles BOOT SYS and DIR SYS are not able to be purged and will never appear during execution of any PURGE command Following are some examples and explanations of the PURGE command PURGE 0 MPW SECRET This command will purge all visible files on drive 0 assuming that the master password of the disk is SECRET The purge will show each file and wait until a Y Yes purge it or a N No don t purge it is entered To abort the purge press the lt BREAK gt key at this prompt If the master password does not match the password of the disk the purge will abort with an error message PURGE 1 Q N 5 This is a very powerful command It will purge all files including system files from drive 1 If the disk s master password is other than PASSWORD you will be prompted for it Once the purge starts it will remove all files from the disk except BOOT SYS and DIR SYS You will not be asked before each file is purged it will be automatic
300. ns for available devices This ability is provided since the standard device driver programs may not meet your particular needs DOS provides different filter programs for different devices A filter program can provide many useful functions during I O processing Lines and or characters could be counted with certain actions taking place when pre set limits are reached Character conversions could be performed such as simply changing each line feed to a null or a complete conversion from ASCII normal TRS 80 character set to EBCDIC IBM character set Keyboard entries may be intercepted and acted upon as is done in the KSM and MiniDOS filters This Model I II example shows the use of the FILTER command with the DOS forms filter program PR FLT the Printer filter 149 FILTER Library Command FILTER PR USING PR FLT CHARS 80 INDENT 6 FILTER PR PR C 80 1 6 These two filter commands will produce identical results Note that the use of the word USING is optional Also the default extension for the filespec is FLT This example will filter I O directed to the line printer through the PR FLT program described in the DEVICE DRIVERS and FILTERS section of the manual As a result of this filter routine printed output will be limited to 80 characters per physical line Also any single line which is greater than 80 characters in length will wrap around and be indented 6 spaces on the next line Note These parameters are determi
301. nstalled into memory by using the FORMS command If you wish to re install the filter program it will occupy the same high memory initially allocated If you have entered a command that uses the printer you will not experience lock up if the printer is not connected to the system Realize that if the printer is merely in a deselected or alert state the system will wait until printer capabilities have been re established However the printer driver portion of this filter also supports a ten second time out enabled or disabled with the SYSTEM PRTIME command which can be used to return control to your program even if an on line printer goes off line due to some mechanical difficulty or paper out condition This filter program also adds two features to operation under BASIC The command LPRINT CHR 6 will reset the system line counter to top of page This may be used when manually positioning to top of form Also the command LPRINT with no arguments will now cause a blank line to be generated The filter will allow you to determine the format of the data sent to your line printer There are scveral configurable parameters used to set the format of the DOS version 5 PR FLT output They are ADDLF If this parameter is specified a linefeed will be issued after every carriage retum CHARS This parameter sets the number of characters that will be printed on each line It may be any integer between 1 and 255 FFHARD If this
302. nted if the line length exceeds CHARS characters The default value for this parameter is zero 0 LINES sets the number of lines that will be printed on each page It may not exceed the PAGE parameter and if not specified it will default to the PAGE parameter of 66 The MARGIN parameter sets the width of the left margin It is especially useful for printers with fixed position tractors such that you want printing to actually begin some distance from the printers physical left margin PAGE sets the physical page size in lines It should be set to the particular form size you are printing on 66 for normal printer paper 6 for mailing labels etc The default value is 66 lines per page If the TAB parameter is specified any X 09 character will be expanded to a standard 8 column tab The XLATE parameter will translate a specified character to another character The format is X aabb where aa is the character to be translated and bb is desired character result Both aa and bb must be hexadecimal values This parameter may be useful to translate printer control characters when using more than one type of printer on the same system FORMS C 80 1 6 P 51 L 45 F This command will change the resident FORMS filter s operating parameters to the following CHARS 80 will allow a maximum of 80 characters per printed line If a line contains more than 80 characters the excess will be printed on the next line s 158 i ry
303. nual File group utilities CMD Used to duplicate data from one disk to another A DOS version 5 disk tape tape disk utility for machine language programs A communications terminal program for use with the RS 232 hardware Used to move files from Model IH TRSDOS to DOS A utility to update DOS disks earlier than x 3 A DOS version 6 command used to duplicate floppy diskettes A file of HELP information for DOS Used to put track sector and directory information on a disk A utility used to access the 7 HLP files Used for 1500 baud cassette operation on the Model III Used to log in a double sided diskette in drive 0 Also updates the drive code table information the same as the DEVICE library command Used to make minor changes to existing disk files Used to correct certain information on non DOS formatted diskettes A Model I utility to install a DDEN boot driver under DOS version 5 kes ee eran TED DOS FILE GROUPS A full screen ASCII text editor File group device drivers DVR COM FDUBL JL Kl RS232L RS232M RS232R RS232T Used to access the RS 232 hardware Model 4 Used with double density modifications on the Model I under DOS version 5 The DOS JobLog driver program The DOS version 5 Keyboard driver providing Type Ahead Screen Print and special lt CLEAR gt key functions Used to access the RS 232 hardware Model I LX 80 Used to access
304. o DOS Ready use the lt CLEAR SHIFT gt command If the text buffer is empty TED will immediately terminate However if there is any text in the buffer you are provided an opportunity to retract your request TED will display the prompt message Press ENTER lo exit Text recovery if you exit the TED application inadvertently without saving the edited text TED permits you to re enter with the asterisk parameter which provides a chance to recover your text Instead of automatically clearing the text buffer as TED does TED will display whatever is in the text buffer memory area Thus if you have not altered any of the information in that memory area you can always go back and recapture it Since all of the text pointers normally established by TED will not be initialized when invoking TED via the parameter it will be necessary to scroll through the text until reaching its last character prior to doing any other operation This may also be performed using NEXT PAGE 244 oe ieee Pe thee lo Lo L TIME Library Command TIME This command is used to set the time for the real time clock TIME hh mm ss CLOCK ON 1 OFF hh mm ss Sets time to hh hours 00 23 mm minutes 00 59 and SS seconds 00 59 ss defaults to 00 if omitted CLOCK Enables or disables the video clock display TIME is used to adjust the time kept by the system s real time clock You can also be prompted on power up
305. odel I software on the Model HI 217 278 FORMS amp PR Filter Programs La oe Kea Hoe Pisa aan a Batch Processing Job Control Language Job Control Language The DOS Job Control Language JCL is one of the most powerful features of the DOS operating system It allows the user to construct a sequence of commands and statements to control the actions of the Operating system or applications programs There are many different features to JCL providing for user prompts and alerts allowing the input of specified variables at runtime providing for logical branching of program control based on user inputs and allowing for variable substitution How JCL works To use JCL it is first necessary to understand how it works In the most basic scnse this is the procedure e The user creates an ASCH text file consisting of commands and statements he wishes to invoke e The user starts the JCL processing with the DO command e The JCL processor takes over control of the keyboard e A line ts read in from the file and passed to the system exactly as if it came from the keyboard e When the end of the file is reached keyboard control returns to the user and the JCL processing stops From this description the purpose of JCL could be summarized as a method to execute a series of commands to control the computer with no input from the computer operator other than to start up the procedure While the ab
306. of any utility driver or filter program is totally dependent upon the user s individual needs Most of the DOS features can be saved in a configuration file with the SYSGEN command so the driver and filter programs won t be needed on run time application disks DOS Passwords The passwords for DOS files are as follows Group Ext Password System files ISYS SYSTEM DOS version 5 l SYSTEM6 DOS version 6 Filter files FLT FILTER Driver files DVR DRIVER DCT DRIVER Utility files CMD UTILITY BASIC 3 BASIC BASIC overlays OV BASIC CONFIG SYS __ CCC L S DOS User Manual DOS system devices The DOS operating system is a truly Device Independent system Each device the system uses has its own control area of memory called a DCB Device Control Block This is true for hardware devices as well as any phantom devices created by the user Each device has its own driver routine whether located in the ROM or in RAM An DOS device is used or created by specifying an asterisk followed by two alphabetic characters Your original DOS master diskette is configured with six devices in the device control table To view these devices along with the currently enabled disk drives use the DEVICE command DOS version 6 requires the B parameter You will see the devices as listed This is the Keyboard Input your keyboard This is the Display Output your video screen This is the PRinter output your paral
307. ol and also require that the full ASCII character set be available Forcing CAPS lock or unlock An application program can force the keyboard input to be in either the CAPS lock mode or the normal upper lower case mode without having the operator press the lt SHIFT gt lt O gt Assembly language programs can set bit 5 of KFLAG Mod 1 X 4423 Mod 3 X 429F to force CAPS lock or reset that bit for normal upper lower case entry From a BASIC program the POKE statement can be use For the Model I the statement POKE amp H4423 PEEK amp H4423 OR 32 will force CAPS lock and the statement POKE amp H4423 PEEK amp H4423 AND 223 will force normal upper lower case entry For a Model III the address to use would be amp H429F The logical AND and OR assure that only the CAPS lock bit of the memory location will be changed Using DOS version 6 you will have to access the K flag using a DOS service call 258 ASCII Characte I 7 DEC HEX TAG ENTERED BY DEC HEX TAG ENTERED BY 0 00 NUL CTL lt gt 32 20 SPA lt SPACE gt 1 01 SOH CTL lt A gt 33 21 SH lt I gt ee 2 02 STX CTL lt B gt 34 22 SH lt 2 gt 3 03 ETX CTL lt C gt 35 23 SH lt 3 gt 4 04 EOT CTL lt D gt 36 24 SH lt 4 gt a 5 05 ENQ CTL lt E gt iis 37 25 SH lt 5 gt i 6 06 ACK CTL lt F gt ast 38 26 amp SH lt 6 gt 7 07 BEL CTL lt G gt 3927 SH lt 7 gt 8 08 BS CTL lt H gt 1 40 28
308. om the DOS Ready prompt DOS displays the error message Must install via SYSTEM DRIVER 273 FORMS amp PR Filter Programs FORMS and PR The FILTER programs FORMS FLT or PR FLT are provided to format the data sent to the line printer The syntax is SET FF FORMS FLT FILTER PR FF V6 FILTER PR FORMS FLT parm parm Addif Will add a linefeed after a carriage return Chars The number of characters per printed line Fihard Will issue an X 0C for a form feed rather than a series of linefeeds indent Number of characters to indent from left margin on lines longer than CHARS parm Lines The number of lines printed on each page Margin Sets the left margin Page Sets the physical page length in lines PORT Sends output to a specified port Model I only Tab Causes expansion of X 09 tab characters SLine Adjusts the printer line counter to Model I or Model III conventions Xlate X aabb specifies a one character translation aa the character to be translated bb what aa will be translated to This filter program adds certain enhancements to the normal printer driver routine Oncethe filter has been applied PR may be returned to its power up driver with the RESET PR command The forms filter s operating 274 Meee Vee theese SS Lese Wee ears FORMS amp PR Filter Programs parameters may be changed after the filter has been i
309. ompilation phase may be skipped Example 2 This example will show you a JCL file that may be used to perform diskette duplication A minimum of three drives will be required Drive 0 will contain a system diskette with the JCL file Drive 1 will be the source diskette of the backup Assume that the diskette name is MYDISK and it is a single sided 40 track double density diskette with a master password of PASSWORD Drive 2 will be used as the destination of the backup It may contain either a new unformatted diskette or a diskette which has 322 SS a ee ee Be emer de ee ete Se Meats et LG La ge Oe ae Loa anne oe Batch Processing Job Control Language been previously formatted and contains information The following JCL may be used to perform such a duplication DUPDISK JCL Disk duplication JCL pause Source in 1 Destination in 2 lt ENTER gt when ready format 2 name mydisk dden cyl 40 q n abs pause format ok lt ENTER gt if yes lt BREAK gt if no backup 1 2 do The second line of the JCL will cause the computer to pause until the lt ENTER gt key is pressed This will allow you to insert the proper diskettes into drives 1 and 2 Once this has been done you may press lt ENTER gt and the third line of the JCL wili be executed The format line passes the parameters NAME DDEN and CYL to the format utility Note that the number of cylinders diskette name and diskette pass
310. on of the MENU JCL example KEYIN Select program 1 3 Hf BASIC RUN MAIL BAS STOP 2 BASIC RUN LEDGER BAS STOP 3 BASIC RUN PAYABLES BAS STOP HTT There are two new macros used tn this example They are NUMBER TI The NUMBER is used to start a block of lines that correspond to a value selected with the KEYIN macro This block will extend until the next NUMBER or to the 7 The triple slash is used to mark the end of all NUMBER blocks Regardless if a NUMBER has been found to match the KEYIN entry the JCL processor will stop looking for a match as soon as it encounters a Execution will begin with the following line In the above example pressing 1 2 or 3 would select the corresponding block of lines entering BASIC and running the appropriate program If a key other than 1 2 or 3 were pressed all three NUMBER blocks would be ignored and execution would begin with the line after the That line is totally dependent on what options you want to allow If it is mandatory that one of the three programs be mun then an 289 pa EE LL ARE NI I a I I I I I Oe g 7 i re re a NN ammeessa ee a a A RN ae e Batch Processing Job Contro Language ABORT macro could be used to abort the JCL If other options were available they could be placed here in the JCL file One of these options may be to let the user type in
311. on your watch and press lt ENTER gt This will give you the correct time on the clock There are several ways for application programs to retrieve the current time setting of the clock At an assembly language level a call to the TIME service function will return the time When using BASIC the time can be returned through the TIMES variable The time may be constantly displayed on the video screen by issuing a CLOCK command or with the lt C gt key function of the version 5 MiniDOS keyboard filter program Either of these commands will enable or disable the clock display in the upper right hand corner of the screen On the Model II the BASIC commands CMD R and CMD T will also turn on and off the clock display The clock on the Model IH may not be accurate when running with 50 Hertz AC power The clock paramater is used to turn on or off the screen display of the real time clock When you enter this command it will activate a background task and display the clock time in the upper right corner of the screen This will take precedence over whatever DOS or BASIC may attempt to print at the screen locations occupied by the display The clock will only run in the 24 hour mode The date can automatically be updated when the clock passes midnight on the Model I by using the SYSTEM UPDATE command The Model III time and date routines are in ROM and cannot be made to update the date automatically The initial date value is normally prompted
312. or extension as the PURGE command can deal with these files as a group The PURGE command also ignores all file passwords as long as you know the master password of the disk REMOVE ALPHA DAT 0 This command will delete the file named ALPHA DAT that is present on drive 0 After execution of this cominand the file and the data in it will no longer be accessible to the system so delete carefully REMOVE DELTA DAT 193 ee ee en ee eS Se a ee cape eer es pa aiiai S eae REMOVE amp KILL Library Commands This command will REMOVE the file DELTA DAT on the first drive that it is on Be carefull Without a drivespec you could delete a file that yon did not intend to REMOVE MIDWEST DAT SECRET 0 This command will delete the password protected file MIDWEST DAT SECRET on drive 0 If the file s attributes include a protection level of NAME or higher SECRET must be the password to delete the file If the proper password is not supplied an error message will be displayed and the file will not be deleted Deleting devices DOS does not permit you to delete certain devices referred to as system devices These devices are JL KI DO and PR Attempting to delete these devices will produce an error message and the delete will abort However any other device may be deleted as long as it is pointed NIL The status of a device may be seen by issuing a DEVICE B library command If a device is not pointed NIL it must first be rese
313. or this example we will create a device named DU To do this use the ROUTE command in the following manner E ROUTE DU TO PRINT TXT 0 This will create a device named DU and ROUTE it to a disk file named PRINT TXT on drive 0 If the file does not exist it will be created and dynamically expanded as needed If the file already exists any data sent to the file will be appended onto the end of the file since the REWIND parameter was not specified 17T LINK Library Command Next the printer can now be linked to the file with the following command LINK PR DU The printer is now linked to the device DU which in turn is routed to the disk file PRINT TXT All output sent to the line printer will also be sent to the device DU in effect written to the disk file PRINT TXT Please note that the file PRINT TXT will remain open until a RESET DU is done If you wish to break the link between the printer and the file without closing the file then use the command RESET PR For further information please refer to the ROUTE and RESET commands lessa oa LIST LIST Library Command The LIST command will send a listing of a file to the video a ad or line printer The syntax is LIST filespec TXT parm parm Ascii8 OFF Hex LINE d Lri d Ns ON NUM Tab n Will allow full 8 bit output Turn off compressed display mode for hexadecimal listing output V5 Sets hexadecima
314. ory The present state of VERIFY either ON or OFF All Device Control Blocks This will include the current lines per page and line counter stored in the printer DCB The state of the CAPS lock for the keyboard existing data to be overwritten 220 is en ae N SYSTEM Library Command SYSTEM This command is used to select DOS features and configure the user definable areas of your DOS system The syntax is SYSTEM parm parm SYSTEM parameters vary with DOS version They are ALIVE BASIC2 BUNK BREAK BSTEP DATE DRIVE FAST GRAPHIC HERTZx RESTORE SLOW SMOOTH SVC SWAP SYSGEN SYSRES SYSTEM TIME TRACE TYPE UPDATE The existing configuration of your DOS system can be seen by doing the DEVICE and MEMORY commands The SYSTEM command can set or change the disk drive configuration as well as tum on or off different keyboard video and hardware drivers Each valid SYSTEM sub command will be discussed in this section Once your DOS system has been configured you may store the configuration on the disk in the drive you BOOT with using the SYSGEN command V6 or SYSTEM SYSGEN parameter V5 Please read this section thoroughly to determine the different SYSTEM sub command uses and to discover exactly how other DOS commands will affect the SYSGEN parameter Certain of the SYSTEM commands must toad driver routines into low V6 or high memory to accomplish their functions When they do this they determine t
315. ot be possible The system will also attempt to set HIGHS to the top of the available memory If certain system functions that use the task processor are active such as the SPOOL command or the blinking cursor on the Model J the reset cannot restore HIGH to the top of memory If this is the case the following message will appear Can t reset memory background task s exist To reset HIGH you must turn off the particular function or reset the individual device before doing the global reset 201 ROUTE Library Command ROUTE The ROUTE library command re routes input output for a specified logical device or creates a device The syntax is ROUTE devspecl TO filespec devspec2 Kpaims ROUTE devspec NIL NIL Specifies that devspecl is routed to a bit bucket output sent to the device will be discarded and ignored Rewind Resets the file pointer of filespec so existing data can be reread or overwritten ROUTE will re route all I O for a specified logical device to another logical device to a disk file or NIL NIL means that the device is routed to nothing Any output sent to a device routed NIL will simply be ignored A device routed NIL also has no input Note No more than four devices may be routed at any one time on the Model III Anytime a device is routed to a filespec a File Control Block FCB and a blocking buffer will be dynamically allocated in high memory The system will determine the current
316. otstrap step rate will have no effect on any drive except drive 0 you must use the SYSTEM command as previously explained to adjust your other drive step rates DELAY refers to the amount of time between the drive motor startup and the first attempted access It is valid for 3 5 and 5 25 floppy drives only as most 8 floppies and hard drive motors are always running Some delay is necessary to allow a 3 5 or 5 25 drive motor to come up to its normal speed The default will be 1 second for the Model I and 0 5 seconds for 33 L S DOS User Manual the Models III and 4 these values may be changed with the SYSTEM DRIVE DELAY command The drive manufacturer should provide information on the minimum delay time you can use Special Floppy disk drive types The standard DOS floppy disk types are 40 track double density single side Models III and 4 e 35 track single density single side Model I DOS will also support any track count up to 96 double density and double sided drives provided you have the correct hardware For the Model III or 4 all that is needed to add double sided support is a double headed drive and the proper drive cable No special driver programs are required For the Model I double density requires a double density controller board and use of the FDUBL driver program The resident driver provides support for double headed single density drives Also any time double headed drives are used an
317. ound in the text buffer it will be displayed The display window will be redrawn starting with the line which contains that string The cursor will be repositioned to the first character of the matching string If you press lt ENTER gt only in response to the String query then the search will proceed with the last entered search string providing one was available Using this procedure you can advance the cursor to each occurrence of the search string in question Another way to find each occurrence of a search string is with the GO command lt CTRL G gt Each depression of lt CTRL G gt is identical to the sequence lt CTRL S gt followed by lt ENTER gt Text search and replace TED also provides the capability of replacing a text string matching the search string with a different string the replacement string When the REPLACE command is invoked via lt CTRL R gt the query message String will be displayed The query same as for SEARCH is asking you for the replacement string You can enter up to 23 characters to be used for the replacement Terminate your string with an lt ENTER gt which is not included as one of the 23 characters TED will then look for the currently pending SEARCH string starting with the first character immediately under the cursor If the SEARCH string cannot be found the message Can t will be displayed At this point the cursor location remains unchanged If a matching string of text is found in the t
318. ous filter route link or set of that device will be destroyed Once a device has been set it will remain set until it is either routed or reset The driver program will remain in high memory even if the device is reset Some driver programs may not be able to re use their high memory modules when re installed after they are reset If such a device is reset and then set again the driver routine will load in below the current HIGHS As a result the setting resetting and then setting again of devices will cause the available memory to continue shrinking Once a driver program is loaded it will not be removed from memory or overwritten even if the same device is reset and then set to the same driver A global reset if allowable will remove this driver program and free up the memory by resetting HIGH SET CL TO RS232T DVR BAUD 300 WORD 7 SET CL RS232T BAUD 300 WORD 7 207 SET Library Command These two commands produce identical results The TO is optional and may be replaced by a single space Specifying the filespec RS232T DVR produces the same results as specifying the filespec RS232T as the default extension is DVR The RS232T program is for the Model IH computer The Model I version could be used instead with identical results For Model 4 operation the driver name is COM DVR no parameters are permitted with it These commands set the communications line CL to a driver routine called RS232T DVR This is an
319. ove description is correct it is by no means a complete description of JCL s capabilities The following sections of the JCL documentation will describe how to use many different features The layout of the sections will start with the basics of creating a JCL file and then show how to incorporate the more advanced features It is recommended that you read these sections in order as later sections will refer to material presented in the earlier ones 279 Batch Processing Job Controi Language Creating a JCL file As noted in the above description a JCL file is an ASCII file For the purposes of JCL this means a file containing those characters normally available from the keyboard There are many different ways to create a JCL file The BUILD command will let you create or extend a JCL file but does not provide a means to edit an existing file You can use the TED text editor for that purpose Any word processor or text editor can also be used to create or edit a JCL file as long as it can save a file in ASCU format without line numbers You could also create a JCL file with a BASIC program creating the lines as strings and writing them to a sequential file Note No single line in a JCL file may be more than maximum command line length less one 63 characters for DOS version 5 79 for DOS version 6 Depending on the JCL method used Execute only or Compiled JCL will either ignore all characters after the limit or
320. p rate 156 BOOT SYS 5 19 57 191 267 BREAK 223 BREAK key disabling or enabling 223 BSTEP 224 buffer 29 202 325 BUILD 62 223 262 280 Bulletin Board 74 byte 325 C C 123 CAPS 256 CAPS lock 15 220 230 carriage retum 63 81 157 175 252 263 cassette 16 234 320 cassette 1500 baud 167 CAT 66 Changing file names 7 changing the protection of a file 44 character translation 158 274 clear screen JCL 317 CLICK 249 CLOCK 29 Mb Ys clock clock display video 245 L CLONE parameter 92 CLP 189 CLS 66 82 CMD 17 CMDFILE 22 67 167 colon separator 186 COM 23 251 COM DVR 208 COMM 22 228 328 command libraries 169 command line length maximum 131 command line patch 189 comment JCL 281 communicating with a main frame 84 communications 27 communications line 26 30 75 208 compilation comment 305 CompuServe 74 computer lock up 288 concatenate 82 325 concatenating character strings 305 conditional logic 300 CONFIG SYS 219 configuration 24 31 37 54 60 161 212 325 configuration file creating 219 configuration inhibiting 60 CONV 22 39 89 197 280 CONVERT 200 converting disks 89 98 104 COPY 13 91 280 COPY23B 24 98 Copyright ii CREATE 99 202 create flag 92 99 creating a JCL file 280 CTRL 75 cursor 111 139 325 cursor character 222 CYL 225 cylinder
321. pool file arca The more disk space used the larger the required memory block will become Using parameters that would causc the memory uscd to go below X 8000 will not be allowed Note that X 8000 is an approximate value and may vary 256 bytes When the spooler is active output to the specified device is treated in the following manner Any output data which cannot immediately be accepted by the device is sent to the memory buffer When the memory buffer is full the data is sent to the disk buffer if one has been specified The stored information is sent to the device in a FIFO manner Output of the stored data to the device is carried on as a background task even when the system is performing other functions Parameter devpec The devpec is the name of the device whose output is to be spooled The printer is the most usual device to be spooled thus devspec will be assumed to be PR no device specification is provided Parameter filespec The filespec is the name of the file the SPOOL command will write to ally time its memory buffer is full The default extension for this file is SPL The default filename will be the two letters of the devspec which is being 214 Leeds L ke da fae Eanes SPOOL Library Command spooled For the filespec parameter to be valid the DISK parameter must not have set the disk file allocation to zero Refer to the following examples SPOOL PR TEXTFILE
322. programs Using the DOS files Now that you know what file groups are on an DOS disk let s discuss some of the more important DOS commands and how to use them The following descriptions will be general in nature more to give you an idea of which commands and utilities do what than to explain them in detail You should refer to the proper section of the manual for in depth explanations Viewing filespecs and files To see the files in a disk directory you should use the DIR Library command This will show you any DOS files on a disk as well as any program or data files you have created The LIST command will allow you to inspect the contents of any individual file sending the display to either the video screen or the printer Moving files Files may be moved individually from one disk to another with the COPY command The BACKUP command lets you automatically move any or all 6 een Bee eee ee fees jee Hoe Ha o Le Introduction to DOS files from one disk to another Of course the disk to receive the files must have been previously formatted Removing unwanted files Any file may be removed from a disk with the DOS version 5 KILL or DOS version 6 REMOVE command Either will remove the information from the directory and free up the data storage space previously assigned to that file Changing file names The RENAME command will let you change the filename or extension of any file in the directory The A
323. prompt will appear after you have answered the step rate question Load DESTINATION disk and hit lt ENTER gt 153 Sn eee a sss a ae eee FORMAT Utility Command The first prompt will ask for the drive number to use If you are going to format a disk in drive 0 do not remove the system disk and insert the disk to be formatted until prompted to do so The next prompts after the disk number will be for the disk name and master password These two pieces of information are used by several of the DOS library commands and utilities They will be referred to as the Pack ID throughout the manual You will be allowed up to eight characters for either entry Characters used for the password must be either alphabetic or numeric Using any other characters will cause an error and the format will abort Pressing only lt ENTER gt will use the default values The density prompt will always appear on the Model HI and DOS version 6 It will not appear when using a Model I unless you are using a double density controller board and the FDUBL driver program Pressing lt ENTER gt in response to this prompt will use the default density vatue The side prompt must be answered lt 1 gt or lt 2 gt for single or double sided If you are using double sided you must have the proper hardware setup Pressing lt ENTER gt will default to 1 side Typically if your hardware does not support 2 sided drives all tracks will be locked out during verifica
324. ptions status portion of the data The default is ON A typical device display might look like this 0 5 Floppy 1 Cyls 40 Dden Sides 1 Step 6 ms Dly 5 s Floppy 2 Cyls 35 Sden Sides 1 Step 6 ms Dly 5 s 2 5 Floppy 4 Cyls 80 Dden Sides 2 Step 6 ms Dly 5 s 3 S Rigid 0 Cyls 153 KI lt X FC11 DO lt gt X 4DC2 PR lt gt X 41ES JIL Nil SI Nil SO Nil UD lt gt TEXTFILE TXT 1 Options Type KI JKL System modules resident 2 3 For reference purposes the display will be considered as having three parts The first is the DRIVE section showing the current configuration of the disk drives Second is the BYTE J O section showing the devices in this example KI through UD Last is the STATUS section displaying DEVICE Library Command the status of the user selected options The information on the type and configuration of each drive in the system is found at the top of the device display There are several fields in each line which explain what the system sees for disk storage Here is a typical line of information pertaining to one drive and the explanation of the fields it contains cc dd ee gg hh 116 This is the logical drive number the line deals with This is the diskette write protect status with WP Write Protected See the SYSTEM DRIVE WP command This is the disk pack name originally applied when the disk was formatted o
325. r providing the data file was ASCII to start with Examples of COPYing devspec to devspec When copying from devspec to devspec it is very important that all devices specified be assigned and active in the system Any routing or setting that has been done to the devices may affect the copy Some caution is necessary when copying between devices as non ending loops can be generated and lock up the system In other words please do not involve devspecs in your copies unless you thoroughly understand the procedures and constraints involved Destruction of files and or locking up the system could easily result from lack of user understanding when using this complex structure of the copy command Following are a few examples of possible devspec to devspec copies The results produced by these copies may possibly be duplicated through the use of other DOS commands such as ROUTE and or LINK COPY KITO PR This command will copy the keyboard to the printer As keys are pressed they will be sent to the line printer Depending on the printer the characters may be printed immediately or may require that a linefeed carriage return be sent before printing The keystrokes will not be visible on the video because the ECHO parameter was not uals Hitting lt BREAK gt will terminate the copy COPY CL TO PR E This command wilt COPY CL the RS 232 Comm Line to PR the line _ printer Each character that is received by the RS 232 will be pro
326. r case As stated previously the case of a line has no effect on any JCL macro token or label This is also true when the line is an DOS command as are the lower case lines in this example You may find that for editing purposes the readability of a JCL file can be improved by using upper case for macros and lower case for executable lines or vice versa In the case of large JCL files this generally makes itself readily apparent HASSIGN The ASSIGN inacro has two purposes Like the SET macro it will set a token s logical value true It can also assign a character string value to a token The syntax for the ASSIGN macro ts HASSIGN TOKEN CHARACTER STRING The character string value assigned to the token will be useful as described in the next section of the JCL documentation SUBSTITUTION FIELDS The character string can consist of up to 32 upper or lower case alphabetic characters the numbers 0 9 and the special characters slash period n and colon Parameter strings of any ASCII character are accept able by enclosing them within double quotes The important point to re member is that the ASSIGN does set the token s logical value to true the same as the SET macro Note that any time ASSIGN is used there must be at least one character assigned as a value The statement ASSIGN ALL would be an invalid statement and would abort the compiling You must have an equal sign and some character
327. r subsequently changed with the ATTRIB command This is the size of the floppy or hard disk 5 25 or 8 will appear in this field 3 5 is shown as 5 25 This is the type of drive floppy or rigid hard shown For floppy drives this is the physical binary location of the drive on its cable 1 2 4 or 8 will appear here For hard drives this may be the starting head number This is the number of cylinders on the disk that was in the drive when it was last accessed This shows the density of the fast disk accessed in the drive and will show either DDEN or SDEN double single density ie eae a Te kk DEVICE Library Command This shows the number of sides on the last disk accessed by the drive and wn bea lora2 This shows the step rate in ms milliseconds for the drive This shows the delay time that will be imposed when accessing a 5 25 minifloppy drive It refers to the time the systein will wait after starting the drive motor before it attempts to access the disk It does not refer to the time the drive will stay on after an access The following briefly describes what each of the xx devspecs refer to Each device will be shown as an asterisk followed by the 2 letter device name its I O symbol and an address The DEVICE command will use special symbols to show the I O input output paths for each device PR JL SI SO will indicate an input device will indicate an output device
328. r totally hands off operation can be done as follows e Run through the program normally making note of every prompt to be answered e Create a JCL file to enter BASIC and run the program as explained above in the BAS JCL example leaving off the STOP macro e Now add the responses to the prompts as lines in the JCL file Using this method will provide automatic program execution All that is required ts for you to have the proper responses for any program prompts as lines in the JCL file Terminating the JCL file will depend on what needs to be done when the application program has completed If you desire to run more programs you could add the proper RUN PROGRAM line to the JCL file followed by any needed responses to program prompts If you desired to return to the DOS Ready mode you could end the file with the EXIT macro Ending the file with a STOP would leave you at the BASIC Ready prompt when the program completes Interfacing with assembler All programs that utilize the line input handler KEYIN service call will be able to accept keyboard input from the JCL file just as though you typed it in when the program was run This gives the capability of pre arranging the responses to a program s requests for input inserting the responses into the JCL file initiating the procedure then walking away froin the machine while it goes about its business of running the entire job Keyboard input normally handled by t
329. ransfer copy program P 0 D copy program2 P 0 D copy program3 P 0 D copy program4 P 0 D EXIT This JCL would be done with a command such as DO MOVE D 2 P SECRET Now as long as the password for the files were SECRET the JCL would move the files from drive 0 to drive 2 If the wrong password was used the appropriate DOS error would be displayed and the JCL would abort Substitution fields can also be added together or concatenated to create new fields The next example shows how this is done ADD JCL copy F E 0 1 copy FI E 0 1 EXIT This example uses two substitution fields one for the filename and one for the extension The results of a DO command such as DO ADD F SORT E CMD FI SORTI would produce the following SYSTEM JCL file after compiling ADD JCL copy SORT CMD 0 1 308 ESN a la ie ea ee e eae hes Batch Processing Job Control Language copy SORTI CMD 0 1 EXIT As in previous examples the IF and ASSIGN macros could be used to allow a single token to select the F F1 and E tokens Combination of files Most of the JCL examples in the previous sections have been very short In a practical operating environment this is often the case However each of these small files is taking up the minimum disk allocation of one gran and using one directory entry Also you may sometimes wish to duplicate a JCL file inside of
330. ransmission standard X ON character o x12 DC2 FR ON e X 13 DC3 Pause transmission standard X OFF character e X14 DC4 FR OFF The DC2 and DC4 characters function identically to the FR ON and FR OFF programmed function keys DC3 causes transmission through the CL device to be halted until a DC1 is received Reception is not affected You can override a DC3 with the CL ON keyboard command Also the actual character codes used for XON and XOFF may be altered when COMM is invoked HANDSHAKE may also be tumed on with the sequence lt CLEAR gt lt SH gt lt gt followed by any non PF key rather than the ON key If this ts the case any time COMM sends the specified character it will pause transmission until a DCI is received or a CL ON is issued directly from the keyboard Typically the lt ENTER gt key would be specified so that line at a time transmission could occur with automatic stopping at the end of each line lt CLEAR gt lt SH gt lt gt EXIT This PF key is used to return to the DOS command level It does not require any ON or OFF It is a stand alone key sequence Prior to exiting COMM the FR device is checked to see if an open file exists In the 83 a NN n aM alu altl ll aM aMi TT TS SOTERA SNR AR ERA 8 Lp RR LS RAL MURA yA RAR AR AER A SR AA aa COMM Communications Utility Command event that one does it will be closed before the exit to DOS is made This little feature
331. rched and no occurrences of the search string will be missed lt C gt ccc Finds ASCII string ccecce Issuing the lt C gt command will cause a search to be performed for the string cccccc The search will start at the relative byte pointed to by the cursors The search is identical to the lt F gt ind Hex string command except that the search criteria is an ASCII string of 1 to 30 characters depending on the display mode being used Also the number of characters to be searched for may be an even or an odd number See the lt F gt command for further information lt F gt nnn Finds hex string nn nn nn The lt F gt command will perforin a search for the hex string nn nn nn starting at the relative byte pointed to by the cursors If in the 256 byte display mode the length of the hex string may be from 2 to 6 characters long and must be represented as an even nuinber of characters If in the 128 byte display mode the length of the hex string may be from 2 to 30 characters long and must be represented as an even number of characters The search will begin from the byte over which the cursor is positioned and will scan all records past the current record until the first occurrence of the string is encountered If a match is found the record containing the match will be displayed and the cursors will be positioned over the first character of the record which matches the search string To terminate any search you may pr
332. rement Command A Alpha Mode or ASCII Modify vi Command Command L S DOS User Manual B Move Block of Memory C Call Address Command D Display Address Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command E Enter Data F Fill Memory G Go to an Address and Invoke H Hex Mode or Hexadecimal Modify I Single Step Execution J Jump Byte L Locate Byte M Memory Modify N Next Load Block O Return to DOS P Print Memory Q Query port R Register Modify S Full Screen Display Mode T Type ASCID U Update Screen Display V Compare Memory Blocks W Word Search X Cancel Disk Read Write Utility SHSSSHSSEHSSSFSHHSSSCSESSHHHESCHESCERSEHEFSFCHSFSSSCE SFC LSSCAD SRST HESS AH Set E ROS REEECCEETES SHSSSSHSHSSHSESTASSSSFOHHSTESSHESESSESHTEHEHHSHSESFSTSHTESHOHESCHS SHE TAHT HEHSSHSCCEBRHeTSEtTEHEORGAESE Directory parameters Using filespecs and partspecs Using filespecs and partspecs DISKCOPY amp QFB STESSESSSSESE SSS HESSEHSHFS SESS SES FSS FSS PHESHTESSCSSE HES ERSTE SSTSESSHESCHC EC REEFTESSCS HC SFT EVE aEFEEEsEETS Character Character Character 4699 46999 SOCSFSSSHISSHEE SES SESCSSTSSFESSHOSHESSASSSSESSHESSESSSHSSSHAEGAHSSS PES eS KCeFssassetseausate
333. resolve a memory conflict you need only to know the load address and length of the unrelocatable code We will consider two cases when the code loads at the very top of memory and when it loads at some other point When the conflicting code loads at the very top of memory it is very easy to resolve the problem Since you know the load address of the code usc the MEMORY Library command to change the HIGH value to one byte below that address For example if a module of code loads from address X F900 and goes to the top of memory you would issue a MEMORY HIGH X F8FF command DOS will now put any of its own high memory code below X F900 protecting the module that will toad there When the conflicting code does not load at the top of memory you can use the same method just described to protect it However this will waste any memory between the end of the program and the top of memory Let s consider the case where a module loads at X F200 and extends to X F3FF 36 few Wee Lo Lo L L eee ee L DOS SYST M DEVICES AND DISK DRIVES There is 3K of space between the end of the module and the top of memory To avoid wasting this space use the following procedure e Load a DOS module into high memory i e SET KI DVR install a filter etc e Type in the command MEMORY with no parameters to see the current HIGHS value e If the HIGH value is above X F3FF repeat the two prior steps If the value ha
334. rface with your printer Use the SET command as follows SET PR TO SERIALDRIVERNAME Serial parameters may be altered with the SETCOM command these should be determined by the internal settings of your particular printer It should be noted that the BUSY or CTS line of your printer will usually have to be connected to the CTS line of your RS 232 cable to provide proper handshaking between the printer and the RS 232 hardware You may also use the SPOOL library command to create disk and or memory buffers to store information being sent to PR and spool it out as PR becomes available i e not in a busy state such as printing a line If PR is routed to a disk file or another device it will not be necessary to have a line printer physically hooked to the system All T O to the printer will be sent to the appropriate device or file and no lockup will occur Using the PR FLT program will also prevent the system from locking up if a print command is given with no line printer available JL The Job Log The JL device is the system s Job Log This unique feature will keep a log of all commands entered or received and most system error messages along with the time they occurred The time is determined by the setting of the real time clock and may be set or changed with the TIME library command To enable JL use the SET command to set JL to its driver program called JL DVR see the section on DRIVERS and FILTERS Every comma
335. rite it to a file file2 on disk If specified you do not have to specify filel DOS simply reads the first text file it sees on the tape Specifies that you want to read a diskfile file and write it to a tape as file2 You can use TAPE100 to read files from cassette tape as well as from Model 4 disks The TAPE100 command allows you to e Read a cassette tape file and write it to a disk file the cassette tape must have been made with the Model 100 computer e Read a disk file and write it to a cassette tape A Model 100 filename is 1 6 alphanumeric characters long and it must begin with a letter For example ACCT61 LETTER and ABFILE can be Model 100 filenames If you do not specify file or file2 you will be prompted to enter the source and destination filespecs if the operation is a WRITE or just the destination filespec if the operation is a READ If you specify neither READ or WRITE you will be prompted for the operation If the disk or tape file cannot fit in available memory the error message File too large lo fit in available memory will appear 234 tt ELE LD Te e evV E E E eR A A AR eea aaea ncn tt Rs aa m a a ama a oe TAPE100 Utility Command TAPE100 PRNTER TO PRINT DAT 0 READ lt ENTER gt In this example TAPE100 will read the Model 100 file PRNTER and write it to the disk in drive 0 as PRINT DAT TAPE100 ACCTING TXT 1 READ lt ENTER gt Here TAPE100 reads the firs
336. rs are specified and a backup reconstruct is initiated by the computer all visible files will be moved from the source to the destination You may include invisible or system files with the INV or SYS parameters 55 BACKUP Utility Command The MOD and DATE parameters will allow you to choose only those files that have been modified since their last backup or fall within a specified range of dates This will be very useful on drives with large capacities as it will not be necessary to backup the whole disk to obtain new copies of files that have changed The DATE parameter accepts four formats to provide for selecting specific ranges of dates note that the parameters are Character strings and must be enclosed in quotes These formats are e DATE M1 D1 Y1 M2 D2 Y2 copies only those files whose mod dates fall between the two dates specified inclusive e DATE M1 D1 Y1 copies all files with mod dates equal to the specified date e DATE M1 D1 Y1 copies all files with mod dates less than or equal to the specified date e DATE M1 D1 Y1 copies all files with mod dates greater or equal to the specified date The OLD and NEW parameters provide an easy method to update disks without placing unwanted information on the destination disk For example using the OLD parameter will allow you to update your working disks if changes are made to the system copying over only those files which are already on your working disks The QUERY
337. s a DOS version 5 command used to delete one or more specified files or devices from the system The syntax is KILL filespec devspec filespec devspec V5 REMOVE filespec devspec filespec I devspec V6 filespec The name of the file to be deleted devspec The name of the device to be deleted See REMOVE Library Command for further information 168 TA A OO a Is se ee LIB Library Command LIB This command will display the DOS command libraries The syntax is LIB After invocation of this command the DOS command libraries would be displayed as shown below with the exact set of commands shown varying according to the DOS version i Library lt A gt Append Device Kill Load Reset Tof Attrib CLOCK Dump Cat Dir Lib Memory Route Spool Auto Create Free Cis DO Link Remove Run Boot Date Purge Filter List Rename Set Verify Library lt C gt i Forms Sysgen Setcom Setki System Spool Library lt A gt is the primary DOS command library and is located in the SYS6 SYS system module Library lt B gt is the secondary command library and is located in the SYS7 SYS system module You may delete either system module containing the libraries if the commands included in it will not be used The Version 6 DOS provides the machine specific Library lt C gt commands in a third library located in SYS8 SYS 169 LINK Library Command LINK This comman
338. s a label and quit This is normal as the compiler will start with the first line and continue to the first label or the end of the file Since the compile is complete the SYSTEM JCL file would be executed In other words whatever lines had been compiled to the SYSTEM JCL file from a previous DO command would now be executed Needless to say this is not what normally is desired Advanced JCL compiling The previous section on JCL compiling showed the basic uses of tokens and compilation macros If you do not understand the SIMPLE JCL COMPILING section please re read it If you actually type in and try the examples you should have an understanding of how to structure a compiled JCL file This section will describe additional features and show different ways to accomplish logical decision branching _ Using the logical operators There are three logical operators available for use with the IF macro These operators will specify the type of logical testing of the tokens They are AND OR and NOT represented as follows is represented by the ampersand amp is represented by the plus is represented by the minus All previous examples of IF have tested the logical truth or falseness of a token such as IF token By using the logical operators more complex and more efficient testing can be done Consider the following series of examples using the tokens A and B IFA if A
339. s as described for the SYSTEM DRIVE STEP command 8 floppy steprate 5 1 4 floppy step rate 3 ms 6 ms 6 ms 12 ms 10 ms 20 ms 15 20 ms 30 40 ms This value will be stored in the system information sector on the current drive 0 if the DRIVE parameter is not specified If you switch drive 0 disks or change drive 0 s with the SYSTEM SYSTEM command be aware that this default value will be taken off the new drive 0 disk SYSTEM DATE switch This command is used to enable or disable the initiat prompting for the date on power up The diskette may not be write protected when using this command The switch may be ON or OFF as follows ON Enables the date prompt if it has been disable with the OFF parameter If the switch is not specified on is assumed OFF Disables the date prompt on power up Or reset Since the date is used extensively throughout the DOS system it is recommended that you never disable the initial date prompt with this command The date will remain set even if you press the computer s reset button so you will not have to re enter it SYSTEM DRIVE d parm parm This command sets certain parameters for the disk drives in your system Refer to the following for explanation of the allowable parameters This command uses no extra memory 224 in LL A I nn GS La eae L bans SEN foe DRIVE d CYL nn DELAY DISABLE ENABLE STEP n
340. s command you can use either single or double density disks in any of your 5 25 disk drives DOS will automatically recognize whether you have a single or double density diskette in a drive and react accordingly Once you have installed the FDUBL driver you will see the prompt Single or Double densily lt S D gt appear after you enter the disk name and master password during the disk FORMAT utility Answer this prompt by pressing the lt D gt key to create a double density diskette or lt S gt to create a single density diskette Pressing lt ENTER gt for this prompt will default to double density The FDUBL driver is loaded into high memory and protects itself by lowering the value stored in the HIGHS memory pointer Logical drives 0 7 are set up to use this driver in place of the normal DOS single density driver You can use the SYSTEM SYSGEN command to save the driver in your configuration file to be loaded automatically every time you boot Be sure that any application programs you are using respect the HIGHS pointer 254 i RA A Job Log Driver Program JOBLOG This driver program will establish the DOS Joblog device The syntax is _ ROUTE JL TO filespec devspec V6 SET JLTO JL DVR USING filespec devspec V5 filespec The file or device to be sent the Joblog information devspec 3 The JL DVR program DOS version 5 or resident job log driver DOS version 6 will establish the DOS Joblog devi
341. s consist of three characters the first of which is an asterisk followed by two upper case alphabetic characters DIRECTORY A cylinder on a diskette used to store information about a diskette s free and used space and file names DRIVER A machine language program used to control interactions between the operating system and a device DO A DOS system device the Video Display EOF End Of File a marker use to denote the end of a program or data file 326 Les eee Ten o L GLOSSARY ext The extension of a filespec The use of ext is sometimes optional An extension if used must contain as its first character a slash and may be followed by one to three alphanumeric characters FCB Filc Control Block a small piece of memory used to control the status and the inputting and outputting of data between the operating system and disk files filespec Thc name by which a disk file is referenced A filespec consists of four liclds aud two switches of which the first field is always mandatory A filespec is designated by the following format filename ext password d P preceding filename is an optional switch If this switch is sct filespec is taken to be absolute This allows the accessing of a filcspec that would otherwise be inaccessible i e a filespec that is the same as an DOS library command filename The mandatory nane of the file ext The optional file extension pa
342. s dl through d2 inclusive d displays the directory information for drives d1 through the E maximum assigned drive d2 displays the directory information for drives 0 through d2 inclusive The directory display will normally show files sorted alphabetically in one column The normal display will show a disk s directory in allocation format The command DIR 0 1 5 which varies slightly according to machine implementation may produce a typical display as follows j Drive t diskname diskdate cyldh Free fffff f sssss 3 Fi mmm nnn jFilespec _ Attrib RL Recs EOF DR File Size MOD Date Time filename ext S1P pp irl rrrrr eof de s sssss s dd mon yy hh mm PBACKUP CMD IP EX 256 23247 1S 6 2 26 Jul 91 17 47 BASIC CMD IP EX 256 22 6l 1 3 5 0 26 Jul 91 17 48 Boor sYs SIP EX 256 5 255 1 5 1 2 CMDFILE CMD IP BX 256 12114 1 S 3 8 26 Jul 91 17 48 DIR SY S SIP RE 256 18 255 1 S 2 5 _ 12 EX 286 19236 1 S 5 0 26 Jul 91 17 47 IP BX 256 8 94 1S 1 2 10 Dec 91 16 02 xx files ouyt of yyy selected Space zzz 00K As you can see from this display every directory command shows more than just the filenames The first line gives the drive number the disk name and date the disk configuration the amount of free and total space on the disk followed by the quantity of free and total files on the disk Specifically these fields are 122 REM Fats lee Wee ee bes The o diskname disk
343. s gone below X F3FF you will need to start over stopping before you toad the module that caused the HIGHS value to go below X F3FF e Now issue a MEMORY HIGH X FIFF command This will protect the block of memory that will be needed by the unrclocatable module e Continue to load any other DOS modules as desired DOS has a command that will let you save your current memory configuration to a disk fite and have it load automatically every time you power up or reset the computer This will let you store the memory allocation you have created so you can permanently resolve any inemory conflicts Refer to the next section System Configuration System configuration Certain DOS features can be configured by the user and stored in a disk file They will automatically be loaded each time the system is powered up or rebooted The SYSTEM command gives a description of the configuration procedure in its SYSGEN parameter section or SYSGEN command for DOS version 6 Using the DEVICE command will show the current system configuration including active disk drives and drive parameters device I O paths and some user selected options currently active Any high memory driver or filter programs will be saved in the configuration file Be aware that all memory from the physical top to the current value stored in the HIGHS pointer will be written to the disk Be sure there is enough room on the disk to store the configuration file or a
344. s on the RS 232 board If a parameter is specified when setting the driver it will override the switch setting The defaults for Model III and 4 configuration parameters are BAUD 300 WORD 7 STOP 1 PARITY ON EVEN The receiving side of the driver is interrupt driven and contains an internal 128 character buffer to prevent loss of characters during disk F O and other lengthy operations The serial driver provides for the selection of a received logical BREAK character rather than arbitrarily using a code of 01D or 80H For DOS version 5 BREAK normally defaults to OFF thus no received character will be interpreted as a system BREAK For DOS version 6 BREAK defaults to lt CTRL gt lt C gt In all cases the logical BREAK if any will be converted to the system BREAK for the partitcular DOS 01D for version 5 80H for version 6 The driver parameters may be altered after the driver is installed by using the SETCOM command documented earlicr The Line Condition parameters have been provided so that you may set up the conventions required by most communicating devices As specified by standard RS232 conventions a TRUE condition means a logic 0 or positive voltage A FALSE condition means a logic 1 or negative voltage DTR and RTS may be set to a constant TRUE by specifying the ON switch If DSR CD CTS or RI are specified ON the driver will observe the lead and wait for a TRUE condition before sending each character If spec
345. s this mean to you the user First of all every DOS has a given set of commands different than the ones available from the BASIC level Commands may be entered when the DOS Ready prompt is on the screen The commands are not programs that you would use to perform application type functions such as accounting or word processing Rather they are the means to load and invoke applications programs and then maintain those programs and the data created by those programs DOS commands also let you modify the way certain devices work by providing things such as type ahead for the keyboard a user definable ete Utes hee ie Introduction to DOS blinking cursor and an output format program for a line printer As you can see from the table of contents there are many program files provided on your DOS disk Before explaining their function you should know how information including the DOS programs is stored on a disk Disk organization Your disk drives store data in the form of magnetic pulses on the diskette media In order for a disk operating system to access this data the diskette obviously must be organized in some manner The DOS FORMAT utility program will write all necessary information to a diskette to organize it into cylinders tracks and sectors so it may be accessed in a structured manner Only after a diskette is formatted may it be written to or read from by DOS The structure of a diskette surface may b
346. s to be compatible from one application to another It may also be needed when converting a source file from one language to another to allow the file to be read by another application language With CLONE the copy will not only duplicate the contents of the file but will also duplicate the directory entry The owner password will be copied as well as the assigned protection level the visibility the create flag and the modified status of the file Files that are copied with the CLONE parameter will not have their date altered The same last written to date that appeared in the original will be moved to the CLONE copied file If the CLONE parameter is turned off the date that was set as the system date will be written to the directory as the last written to date for the copied file If CLONE is not used and an existing destination file was being copied over the attributes of the destination file except for the date will be unchanged If the COPY command creates a new file any password included will become the owner password of the destination file and the file will be visible even if the file it was copied froin was invisible Sec the ATTRIB library command for more on file attributes ECHO can only be specified when the source for the copy is a device If specified all characters will be echoed to the screen as they are sent to the destination file or device The X parameter provides a means of copying between two non system diskett
347. s to be passed to the filespec program The RUN command will load in a load module format program that resides above X S1FF for version 5 or X 2FFF for version 6 and then invoke the program The default extension for the filespec is CMD If the prograin resides on a non system diskette the X parameter may be specified to load the program from that diskette and begin execution only after a system disk has been reinserted in drive 0 If the X parameter is used the program must load above X 52FF for version 5 or X 2FFF for version 6 The RUN command is identical to the LOAD command except for the fact that control ts transferred to the program module transfer address rather than returning to the system Load module format programs may also be directly loaded and invoked from the DOS Ready prompt by simply typing in the name of the program Following are some examples of the RUN command RUN SCRIPSIT LC SCRIPSIT LC Both of these commands will produce the same results The program SCRIPSIT LC will be loaded into memory and invoked 205 I Rc pe a RUN Library Command RUN BASIC BASIC Both of these commands will produce the same results They will load a program named BASIC CMD and invoke it Note that the file extension defaulted to CMD when not specified by the RUN command RUN X INVADERS CMD This command is for the single drive user It will load the program INVADERS CMD from any disk whether or no
348. se 00 00 00 if the date has not been set Because the date is so important in the DOS system you will be prompted for it on power up Because DOS will generate the day of the week and day of the year memory restrictions to hold this data limit the date to the range 01 01 80 12 31 20 11 Entering a date outside of this range will not be permitted In the lower center of the screen at power up the system will prompt for the date to be entered You should answer this prompt with a valid date string The prompt and the date you entered will then be erased and replaced by a display showing the day of the week in the standard three character abbreviation the name of the month also abbreviated the day of the month and the year expanded as xxxx If desired the date prompt 102 me eae eee tt DATE Library Command can be removed from the boot sequence with the SYSTEM DATE NO command If you do disable the date prompt the date will not be initialized although it may later be set It should be noted that DOS will store two other numbers calculated from the current date These are day of the year and day of the week These values will be placed in memory and will remain constant unless the date is reset The date will stay set as long as the computer has power applied to it providing the date storage area is not overwritten by user applications Therefore when re BOOTing after the date has been set the system wil
349. sents the offset from the first byte of the current logical record bb will be in hexadecimal notation will be the hexadecimal representation of the byte listed will be the ASCII representation of the byte A period will be used for all non displayable bytes For example the command LIST BASIC CMD BASIC H would produce a display as shown here i 0000 00 0S 06 4c 42 41 53 49 43 1F 32 43 GF 70 79 72 69 bL BAS tc 2copyri ee 10 67 68 74 20 28 43 29 20 31 39 38 31 20 62 79 20 g ht tc 19 86 1 b y This is a listing of the file BASIC CMD BASIC in hex format The logical record length was not specified in the command and was found from the directory to be 256 Parameter REC REC is used for listing hex files starting from other than record 0 It is entered as a decimal value and starts the LIST with the specified logical record number of the file The first record in a file is record 0 REC 1 would list the second record of the file The command LIST MONITOR CMD H R 5 would start the listing with the sixth record Parameter LRL This parameter tells the LIST command to format the output using the specified LRL for each record If the LRL parameter is not specified the LIST command will use the record length in the file s directory entry The LRL parameter is valid only when used with the HEX parameter 176 ka es b Ls ea lia LIST Library Command Parameter P T
350. setting or deleting the spooled device It must be turned off to close the file Once the spooler is turned off it may be turned on again Doing so will re use the same memory locations allocated when it was originally turned on The original parameters will be re used 218 SYSGEN Library Command SYSGEN This command creates or deletes a configuration file It s syntax is SYSGEN ON I OFF DRIVE d V6 SYSTEM SYSGEN ON OFF DRIVE d V5 DRIVE d_ Specifies the drive for the SYSGEN default is 0 Removes the configuration file from drive d Creates a configuration file on drive d On would be assumed if neither ON or OFF is entered This command creates or deletes a configuration file on the disk drive specificd In the version 5 DOS SYSGEN is a sub command of the SYSTEM command thus SYSTEM SYSGEN swiich Drive d is the required cntry If switch is not specified ON is assumed That is SYSGEN is the same as SYSGEN ON and SYSTEM SYSGEN is the same as SYSTEM SYSGEN ON After a SYSGEN OFF command has been given the current configuration of the system will not change until the system is booted again When SYSGEN is invoked all current device and driver configurations will be stored on the disk in drive 0 or that drive specified by the DRIVE parameter Job Control Language if active will be temporarily suspended during the configuration generation SYSGEN will not abort i
351. sh to use has an extension of TXT you do not have to enter the extension If the extension is omitted from your entry XT will be automatically provided The FILE command will save the entire text buffer excluding the terminating NULL but including any block markers into the disk file identified by your input If any disk write error is encountered while saving the text buffer into the disk file the message I O errar will be displayed In any case the text buffer is left undisturbed Text search TED provides the SEARCH command to scan the text buffer for a specified string of characters You specify the search by invoking the command with lt CTRL S gt TED then prompts you for the search string with the query message String You can enter up to 23 characters to be used for the search string Terminate your search string with an lt ENTER gt which is not included as one of the 23 characters TED will then look for the string starting with the first character following the cursor The matching is case sensitive which means that characters entered in upper case must be found in upper case and characters entered in lower case must be found in lower case If the search string cannot be found the message Can t will be displayed At this 242 Tr rm errr rar at oe ees ea L bea L baen eee oo akp roo yig tommand point the cursor location remains unchanged If a matching string of text is f
352. sk or tape you will prompted for another tape or file after the transfer address the program start address is displayed as Transfer address entry point is XXXX Once you have ended input and one or more files were input from disk or tape the following prompt will be issued Program loads from base address XXXX to XXXX Enter new base address or lt ENTER gt gt If you do not need to offset the output file just depress the lt ENTER gt key In general if you are transferring a SYSTEM tape file to disk and the tape file would ordinarily overlay the operating system s resident program X 4200 X 5 1 FF you cannot load the disk file into memory from disk unless it is offset from the resident system Once in memory a block move routine can restore it to its original load point CMDFILE will not offset any part of a load module that loads below 4200H This is to permit programs that purposely affect system variables or display messages to the memory mapped video 3COOH 3FFFH to toad properly If you have input a program file that loads below 4200H and you are requesting to OFFSET the program the following message will be displayed Program loads below 4200H Enter Address to restrict offset or lt ENTER gt gt This gives you the option of restricting the offsetting operation below a specified address For instance if the program loaded a message directly to the screen it would have a load block within the ran
353. source and destination disks must have different pack IDs disk name and or master password or date After the COPY X the destination file s attribute will be visible whether the source file initially was or not If a password is entered on the command line the destination file will automatically have this password set as its owner password If no password is specified for the source or destination file then the destination will have no password protection set The correct attributes for the destination file may be re applied with the ATTRIB command 97 COPY23B BAS Utility Command COPY23B BAS This DOS version 5 utility is provided to copy files from Model I TRSDOS 2 3B to a DOS disk The syntax is BASIC RUN COPY23B Since this is a BASIC program BASIC CMD be on a disk in the system Also Model HI users will have to use the REPAIR utility on the 2 3B disk before using COPY23B When the program starts you will be prompted to enter the source and destination file names The source name is the name of the file on the 2 3B disk The destination file is the name you wish to give the file on the DOS disk These two names can be identical except for the drive number and usually will be If the file is password protected on the 2 3B disk you must use the proper password in the source file name After both names are entered the information will be read from the 2 3B disk and written to a new file on the DOS disk Wh
354. ss than an X 20 as a two digit hexadecimal number surrounded by braces This will be useful if you suspect that unwanted control characters are being received lt CLEAR gt lt SH gt lt gt CLS The CLS Clear Local Screen function will erase the contents of the screen without transmitting any character to the communications line The cursor will be positioned at the upper left hand comer of the screen lt CLEAR gt lt SH gt lt gt 8 BIT The 8 BIT switch is used to indicate that all 8 bits of each character received from the communications line are valid If it is not tumed on bit 7 is stripped from each character received Do not specify this switch unless the serial driver word length was set to 8 lt CLEAR gt lt SHIFT gt lt 0 gt DOS Library command COMM makes use of the new CMNDR command and retum vector of DOS to provide you the ability to access DOS library commands while ee ieee Tes ON Cr a COMM Communications Utility Command running COMM After the keystroke sequence lt CLEAR gt lt SHIFT gt lt 0 gt COMM prompts for the command with Enter command When the command completes COMM will regain control This function may be used for instance to access SETCOM to change serial parameters lt CLEAR gt lt SH gt lt gt Handshake If the handshake switch is turned on COMM will respond to the following four control codes received from the communications line e X ll DC1 Resume t
355. ssary if you will be attempting a mirror itnage from a non DOS to an DOS disk The location of the directory cylinder is stored on cylinder 0 Certain operating systems store this byte in a non standard manner The REPAIR command will correct this so the disk may be read by DOS The DOS system information sectors on cylinder 0 contain considerable information The REPAIR command will place these sectors on a non DOS diskette After the repair is complete you should be able to copy any files off of the repaired disk Once a disk is repaired by DOS it may not be readable by the operating system that created it This is due to the directory DAM change It is recommended that the REPAIR be used on a backup copy of the disk if at all possible 198 ches Ee RESET Library Command RESET This command will restore logical devices to their original start up condition alter the logical record length of a file allow a file s directory date to be altered close the DOS version 6 directory open state for a file which has been left open and provide a way to restore DOS version 5 HIGH highest unused memory location to the top of memory RESET filespec Lrl nj1l Date ON OFF RESET devspec Date sw sets the specified file s mod date to the current system date for DATE ON or to an un dated pre X 3 version format sets the logical record length of the specified file to the new value entered There are many uses for
356. ssword The optional file password d The optional drive specification up s following d is an optional switch If this switch is set the end of file marker for file filespec will be updated after every write to the file filename The mandatory name used to reference a disk file A filename consists of one to eight alphanumeric characters the first of which must be alphabetic FILTER A program which monitors and or alters I O that passes through it FILTER is also the library command which establishes a FILTER routine FIX The desired file extension for a PATCH file 327 L S DOS User Manual FOREGROUND TASK Jobs the computer does that are apparent to the user such as running an applications program or a utility and interacting directly with the user GRAN An abbreviation used for the term granule A gran is the minimum amount of storage used for a disk file As files are extended file allocation is increased in increments of granules The size of a gran varies with the size and density of a diskette HIGHS High Dollars a pointer used to mark the highest unused memory address available for use Any machine language programs loaded above HIGH will never be overwritten by DOS I O The abbreviation for Input Output INTERRUPT an interruption of the system generated by a hardware clock The interrupt periods are used by DOS with such functions as type ahead and the prin
357. st starts the printer device is off If you want to direct the communications transactions to your printer do a lt CLEAR gt lt 3 gt followed by a lt CLEAR gt lt gt Output being routed to the printer is fully buffered through dynamic memory buffers Therefore it is not necessary for your printer to be capable of operating at the communications line transmission rate Even after transactions cease you may discover the printer still typing away COMM starts with CL in an ON state You may wish to temporarily block output from being sent to the CL so as to be able to review a file prior to transinission Depending on your PF switch setup if you go to a half duplex mode DUPLEX ON after turning off the CL you could perform a File Send FS which would display the file to your screen without actually sending it to the communications line OF course if the 77 COMM Communications Utility Command distant end attempted to send to you while you had the CL off you would not receive their transmission With the File Send device you can cause a file to automatically be transmitted to the distant end This PF key works in concert with a number of other keys Other PF keys exist to open a designated file rewind a designated file position to the end of a designated file and close a designated file As with the other devices discussed the functions available to this File Send device are activated by the two step process of
358. stems to set up the floppy disk drives DOS version 5 Creating a minimum configuration disk All files except certain SYS files may be removed from your run time drive 0 disk Additionally if the needed SYS files are placed in memory with the SYSTEM SYSRES command it will be possible to run with a minimum configuration diskette in drive 0 after booting the system 24 DOS FILE GROUPS For operation SYSTEM files 1 2 3 4 and 10 and 8 for DOS version 5 should remain on drive 0 or be resident in memory SYSTEM 2 and 8 for DOS version 5 must be on the boot disk if a configuration file is to be loaded SYSTEM 12 can be removed if the two mini directory routines are not needed SYSTEM 11 must be present only if any JCL files will be used Libraries SYSTEM 6 and SYSTEM 7 and SYSTEM 8 for DOS version 6 may be removed if no library commands will be used SYSTEM 5 and SYSTEM 9 may be removed if the system debugger is not needed SYSTEM 0 may be removed from any disk not used for booting Note that SYSTEM 11 the JCL processor and SYSTEM 6 containing the DO library command require that both files be on the disk if the DO command ts to be used if yeu delete SYSTEM 6 you may as well delete SYSTEM 11 When using DOS version 5 BASIC the OV3 overlay must also be present OVE and OV2 may be removed if no renumbering or cross referencing will be done When using DOS version 6 BASIC you must retain OV1 The presence
359. t be turned off by entering a lt CLEAR gt lt 7 gt followed by a lt CLEAR gt lt gt This will buffer the file in memory as it is being received If the sending end supports XON XOFF 86 kensa ae Loan COMM Communications Utility Command handshaking is it another COMM user then you should engage handshake by entering lt CLEAR gt lt SH gt lt gt followed by lt CLEAR gt lt gt When both ends are ready the receiving end should do a lt CLEAR gt lt 6 gt followed by lt CLEAR gt lt gt and the sending end should then do a lt CLEAR gt lt 5 gt followed by lt CLEAR gt lt gt If your free buffer space decreases to less than 2K during receipt of the file a warning message will be issued and an X OFF will automatically be sent to the sending end Transmission from the sender should cease Once it does dump the receive buffer to disk by tuming on DTD with lt CLEAR gt lt 7 gt followed by lt CLEAR gt lt gt You can observe the increase in available free buffer space by displaying a menu as the buffer is written to disk Once ample free space is available tum off the DTD with lt CLEAR gt lt 7 gt followed by lt CLEAR gt lt gt You then can manually restart the sender s file by transmitting an X ON from your keyboard with lt CONTROL gt lt gt After the file is totally received the receiving end should do a lt CLEAR gt lt 6 gt followed by a lt CLEAR gt lt gt The last receive
360. t character will be printed It will be marked by the presence of a cursor character CYLINDER All tracks of the same number on a disk drive On single sided drives cylinders will synonomous with tracks On a double sided 325 ee 1 S DOS User Manual drive there will be two tracks per cylinder one on the front and another on the back of the diskette d This indicates that a drive spec number may be inserted where this is used A drive spec must always be preceded immediately by a as shown If a drive spec is not to be given then the must not be used DAM Data Address Mark An identifying data byte put on a diskette to mark the difference between data and directory cylinders DCB Device Control Block a small piece of memory used to control the Status and the input and output of data between the system and the devices DCT Drive Code Table a piece of memory containing information about the disk drives and or diskettes in them DENSITY Refers to the density of the data written to a diskette Double density provides approximately 80 more capacity than single density DEVICE A physical device located outside of the CPU Central Processing Unit whose purpose is to transmit receive data to from the operating system The operating system is in total control of any activity directed to from a device devspec The name associated with a device by which it is referenced A devspec will alway
361. t execution of the JCL file and return keyboard control to an application requesting keyboard input Thus our JCL example could be expanded as follows Program start up JCL last modified 01 01 92 SET FF FORMS DOS 6 FILTER PR PR FLT DOS 5 FORMS CHARS 80 MARGIN 10 LINES 60 BASIC RUN PROGRAM BAS STOP The JCL file is now complete and as soon as the program requested a keyboard input the keyboard would become alive The response to the prompt could then be input from the keyboard However perhaps the program is one that requires no keyboard input during its execution In this case you might want to return to the DOS Ready prompt when the program is completed Using the STOP macro in this case would not be correct When the program completed the STOP would be executed and the BASIC Ready prompt would appear You would not return to the DOS Ready level As noted before a return to DOS Ready will happen automatically if you do not use the STOP macro at the end of the JCL file Another way to force an end to the JCL execution and return to DOS Ready is to use either the ABORT or EXIT macros to end the JCL file HABORT The ABORT macro is used to exit a JCL procedure and return to the program that initiated the DO command It is quite similar to the EXIT macro A return to calling program will take effect after displaying the inessage Job aborted 283 Batch Processing Job Control Langua
362. t it is an DOS system disk After the command has been entered you will be prompted with the message Insert SOURCE disk lt ENTER gt At this point you should insert the diskette containing the program in drive 0 and press lt ENTER gt After the program is loaded you will be prompted Insert SYSTEM disk lt ENTER gt You should now insert your DOS system disk back into drive 0 and press lt ENTER gt Program invocation will begin at this point 206 Ee oe fe arts SET Library Command SET This command sets a logical device to a driver routine The syntax is SET devspec TO filespec dvr parm parm devspec Any currently enabled logical device filespec Any valid driver type program parms Optional parameters required by the driver program specified with filespec The SET command will set a logical device to a driver program It does this by loading the specified driver program which will relocate itself into high memory just below HIGHS lowering HIGHS to protect itself Once a device is set any I O to or from the device will be controlled by the new driver routine DOS will allow the passing of parameters to the driver program These parameters are totally independent of the SET command and are determined only by the needs of the driver program The filespec parameter is the filespec of the driver program The default extension for this file is DVR When a device is set any previ
363. t mark the block s beginning and ending positions You must then position the cursor to the interior of the marked block and invoke the command with the sequence lt CTRL B gt followed by lt D gt As a safety check TED will prompt you before deleting the block It is necessary to depress lt ENTER gt to affirm your intentions Any other character entry including a lt Y gt will cause TED to ignore the block delete request 241 a a lr RN eea m a m M a ____ PPR OCU MityCemmand _ _ The same errors as for copy and move can occur however the messages may not be for the same reasons When a block delete is requested TED will first look for an ending block marker starting from the cursor position If none is found the error displayed will be Marker This doesn t mean necessarily that a properly marked block is missing On the other hand if an ending marker is found past the cursor position TED next scans forward for a beginning block marker A Marker error will also be posted if none is found If a marker is found but is also past the cursor position a Cursar error will be posted The PRINT block operation will cause the first marked block to be printed Filing away your text to a disk file The lt CTRL F gt command is used to FILE the contents of the text buffer area into a disk file When you depress lt CTRL F gt you will be prompted for the name of the file with Filespec If the file specification you wi
364. t text file it finds on a Model 100 tape and writes it to the disk in drive 1 as ACCTING TXT TAPE100 WEST DAT 0 TO WESTRN WRITE lt ENTER gt In this example TAPE100 reads the drive 0 disk file WEST DAT and writes it to a file on a Model 100 tape named WESTRN 235 litelo KA TED ASCII Text Editor The Text EDitor TED is a full screen quick text editor with typical word processing type features four directional cursor movement bi directional scrolling text directional delete large text buffer etc however TED was not designed to be a full featured word processor TED was designed for you to be able to rapidly enter a full screen text editing environment while accomplishing many of your text file editing tasks Summary of editing commands The following are the command keys and their functions as supplied by TED Once you become familiar with the operation of TED this section may be all you need to refer to from time to time to jog your memory Action Move the cursor one position left i Move the cursor one position right i Move the cursor one position down Move the cursor one position up Move the cursor to the beginning of the line Move the cursor to the end of the line I Move the cursor to the end of the text Move the cursor to the beginning of the text Toggle overstrike insert modes Specify a BLOCK Specify DELETE FILE the text buffer to disk GO find the next search string match LOAD
365. t with the RESET command before it can be deleted The command REMOVE devspec will completely remove the devspec from system device space REMOVE CL This command will in effect make CL the Comm Line disappear from the system device control table assuming the CL was reset or pointed NIL before the delete was done REMOVE SI SO This command will remove SI and SO from the device table These two devices will appear pointed NIL in the device table upon power up They are currently unused by DOS and may be deleted 1f desired TT RENAME Library Command RENAME This command will rename a file The syntax is RENAME filespec 1 TO partspec lfilespec2 RENAME devspec TO devspec2 filespec The current name of the file or device to be devspec renamed filespec2 The new name to be assigned to the file or device devspec2 The RENAME command allows you to change the filename and extension of a given file The RENAME command will use dynamic defaults for the filcnamc extension and drivcspcc of filcspec2 This means that any part of filespec2 that is not specificd will default to that of filespecl The drivcspce of filcspcc2 if specificd must be thc same as that of filespecl or the rename will abort and an error message will be generated The version 6 DOS will also allow you to change the name of a device This does not change the device s routing linking filtering or setting Dcvspecl must be an existin
366. te port the system may appear to hang The following example shows several uses of ALERT example of tone generation atert 1 0 7 0 another example alert 0 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 Still another alert 0 0 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 exit JCL KEYBOARD ENTRY Macros The KEYIN and INPUT macros provide a means to take keyboard inputs during JCL execution Two other macros are uscd along with KEYIN to establish execution time conditional blocks KEYIN optional comment string This macro is used to prompt for a single character entry with the entire KKEYIN line being displayed including any comment message The resultant entry must be a single numeric character in the range 0 9 and will be used to select one of up to ten different execution phase blocks of JCL KEYIN can not be used to enter data at execution time but can only provide for the selection of a predefined block of JCL lines If it is necessary to provide run time keyboard interfacing then the INPUT macro should be used instead of KEYIN MENU JCL Program 1 is MAIL Program 2 is LEDGER Program 3 is PAYABLES KEYIN Select program 3 288 Goa bass ees _ Batch Processing Job Control Language This example shows how you could build a menu using execution comments to display different program choices By pressing a single key you could execute the desired program Refer to the following expansi
367. ter spooler JCL The desired file extension for a DO file JCL is an abbreviation for Job Control Language JL A DOS system device the Joblog KI A DOS system device the Keyboard KSM The desired file extension for a KSM file KSM is an abbreviation for Key Stroke Multiply COMM A communications program capable of interacting with disk printer video keyboard and the serial interface COMM will dynamically buffer all the system devices LIBRARY A set of commands used to perform most operating system functions l load module format A file format that loads directly to a specified RAM address 328 i eine mr erro eee a Paces ke Let GLOSSARY LSB The Least Significant Byte in a hexadecimal word sometimes referred to as the low order byte MACRO Statements or verbs used in JCL MSB The Most Significant Byte in a hexadecimal word sometimes referred to as the high order byte MOD DATE The date a file was last written to MOD FLAG A sign place after a filename to indicate that the file was written to since its last backup NIL A setting of a device indicating an inactive state All I O to from this device will be ignored NRN An acronym for Next Record Number which indicates the number of the next 256 byte record to be accessed from a file PACK I D A diskette s name and master password assigned during formatting PARSE
368. ter the lt CTRL D gt Well you don t have to worry about that because those two subcommands properly backup one position before continuing the deletion Block operations The BLOCK command lt CTRL B gt has six subcommands Begin End Copy Delete Move and Print These subcommands are specified by entering the first letter of the subcommand word lt B gt lt E gt lt C gt lt D gt lt M gt or lt P gt The entry may be in either upper or lower case Note that these subcommands are not control key combinations but normal alpha betic single key entries When you invoke the BLOCK command the word Block will be displayed in the status line Anytime you need to deal with a block say to copy it move it or delete it you have to first mark it The beginning and ending positions of a block are marked by first positioning the cursor over the first character of the block and then entering the two command sequence lt CTRL B gt followed by lt B gt This is followed up be positioning the cursor over the character immediately following the last character of the block and then entering the two command sequence lt CTRL B gt followed by lt E gt The beginning position will be indicated on the display by a begin marker which is inserted by TED into the text The marker is displayed as a graphic left bracket The ending position will be indicated on the display by an end marker which is also inserted by TED into the te
369. th ECHO LF ON anytime a carriage return is received from the communications line a line feed character will be sent back and a line feed will be added to any carriage retum transmitted lt CLEAR gt lt SH gt lt gt ACCEPT LINEFEED COMM normally ignores the first line feed received after a carriage return If this function is tumed on all line feeds will be accepted This may be desirable if the distant end is another TRS 80 81 Nm RR RR BR RR I PA IS COMM Communications Utility Command lt CLEAR gt lt SH gt lt gt REWIND The REWIND function works only with the FR and FS devices FILES It is used to rewind either file back to its beginning For instance say during the transmission of a file the transmission is aborted prior to its completion In order to resend it it should be rewound to its beginning so the NRN pointer is pointing to the first record REWIND performs that function lt CLEAR gt lt SH gt lt amp gt PEOF This function is used to position a file to its end A common use would be to append to an existing receive file If you open a file for receiving by means of the FR ID and then do a FR PEOF the existing receive file would not be overwritten with the new data but rather the new data received will be concatenated to the old data lt CLEAR gt lt SH gt lt gt DCC The DCC Display Control Characters function will force a display of any character received that has a value le
370. the logical and the physical drive numbers Refer to the following information 31 A A y I I Lh TS TC TT OY OO i eie SRR A aiia a raa ee NN ee L S DOS User Manual e LOGICAL DRIVES any number between 0 and 7 Any time the DOS manual refers to a drivespec it will be referring to the logical drive number The logical drive number will be shown in examples preceded by a colon 0 means drive zero the first drive drive 1 means drive 1 the second drive e PHYSICAL DRIVE shown as 1 2 4 or 8 The physical drive number refers to a drive s position on the drive cable For floppy drives the numbers 1 2 4 and 8 will be shown by the DEVICE command corresponding to the first second third and fourth positions on a cable When using special hardware such as a hard disk an appropriate disk driver program will be supplied so you can set the logical and physical drive locations to match your actual needs Since there are only four physical locations available no more than four of any single drive type may be used The DEVICE command display also shows other drive information the number of cylinders the density number of sides step rate and delay 5 floppies only This information will be divided into two groups for ease of explanation Group one contains information about the diskette in the drive namely the cylinders density and side information Group two contains information about t
371. the Model IHI By plugging the AUX lead of the cassette cable into a small amplifier this macro could prove quite uscful On the Model 4 ALERT uses the computer s sound port You could use it to signify the end of a large JCL procedure It could also be used during the execution of a procedure to bring attention to a specific process The proper syntax is ALERT tone silence The actual tone selected is controlled by a tone number The number range is 0 7 with 7 producing the lowest tone and 0 producing the highest tone Any value entered will be used in its modulo 8 form That is if you enter the number 8 a zero value will be assumed The value 65 will produce the tone assigned to a 1 The tone is followed by a period of silence by entering a second number Tone and silence must be entered as number pairs e g 1 0 In fact this can be repeated for as many number combinations as can fit on one line 287 i minama a ry tl Batch Processing Job Control Language The tone silence sequence can be made to repeat by enclosing the entire string in parentheses If parentheses are used the sequence will keep repeating until the lt ENTER gt key is pressed at which time execution will continue Pressing lt BREAK gt would abort the JCL No display is made during the tone generation Therefore if your JCL has a repeating tone and you do not have an amplifier connected to the casset
372. the RS 232 hardware of the MAX 80 Used to access the RS 232 hardware Model I Used to access the RS 232 hardware Model HI File group filter programs FLT FORMS KSM MINIDOS PR Allows the user to format printed output DOS version 6 Establishes the KeyStroke Multiply feature which allows assigning user determined phrases to alphabetic keys Establishes certain immediate functions to shifted alphabetic keys Model I III only Allows the user to format printed output DOS version 5 23 L S DOS User Manual File group BASIC and BASIC overlays BASIC CMD BASIC HLP BASIC OVI BASIC OV2 BASIC OV3 BASIC OV4 Miscellaneous files COPY 23B BAS FLOPPY DCT MODx DCT Disk Basic program A file of HELP information for DOS version 5 BASIC This file contains the library command overlay segment of the DOS version 6 BASIC interpreter It contains the CMD N renumber feature overlay used with DOS version 5 BASIC This file contains the routines for the DOS version 6 BASIC line copy move find and search functions For DOS version 5 it contains BASIC s cross reference CMD X feature Error display and Sort routines for DOS version 5 BASIC A DOS version 5 BASIC overlay to dump a list of active variables Used to move files from Model I TRSDOS 2 3B or later Used by hard drive systems to set up the floppy disk drives DOS version 6 Used by hard drive sy
373. the block itself You will be informed of this prohibition by a display of the error message Cursor The successful block copy operation only copies the marked text the markers are not copied as well In fact the marked text remains in its Original position relative to the text which surrounds it The cursor position relative to the text will be unchanged after the block is copied however the screen may be refreshed and the physical location of the cursor on the screen may be different A block of text may be MOVED froin one position to another by a command sequence similar to the block copy In this case simply mark the beginning and end of the block as discussed above move the cursor to the position in the text where you want the marked block moved to then invoke the block MOVE command via the sequence lt CTRL B gt followed by lt M gt Again note that the block which will be moved is the first marked block found in the text buffer This operation is essentially one of copying and automatie deleting without the double check prompt As in the case of the BLOCK COPY the same errors are possible with similar diagnostic messages when things are not as they should be With the BLOCK MOVE command the new cursor position will be the new position of the moved block The screen may be refreshed and the physical cursor position altered to accommodate this request The block operation deletion is similar to the above functions you first mus
374. the directory space to store its own operating system 120 seta Rt on 8 errr m DIR Library Command files There are 16 file spaces in the directory of a SYSTEM disk that are reserved for system SYS files used by DOS only two file spaces are reserved on DATA disks The maximum storage on a disk is determined by two things the amount of free space and the number of directory records Reaching the maximum on either will prevent any more information from being written to the disk It will be necessary to remove existing files before anything more can be written to that disk Both the number of remaining files and the free space on a disk can be seen with the FREE library command Files can be removed with either the REMOVE or KILL or PURGE commands There will be three main classifications of files used when discussing a disk s directory they are SYStem files IN Visible files and VISible files System files contain the instructions used by DOS to perform most of its basic operations They are identified by the extension SYS These files will not normally be seen when issuing a DIR command Invisible files can be any files that you do not wish to normally see with a DIR command that s so your display is not cluttered Most DOS utility files are set to invisible on your master disk The ATTRIB command allows changing the visibility of a file Visible files are those seen when doing a simple DIR command These are usua
375. the disk is write protected you will see the message Can t rernove MOD flags Source disk is write protected This docs not indicate an error The normal use of the modification flag is to indicate that a file has been updated without a backup Thus one function of the BACKUP utility is to reset a file s mod flag after it completes the backup this cannot be performed if the source disk is write protected After the backup has completed the destination disk will have the same Pack ID as the source disk The destination disk date shown with the DIR or FREE command will be changed to the current system date 53 BACKUP Utility Command Backup by class and Backup reconstruct These two backup types function identically doing a file for file copy from the source to the destination disk Unlike a mirror image backup files that exist on the destination disk but are not on the source disk will remain untouched by the backup When the backup is complete the destination disk will contain all files moved from the source disk plus any other files that existed on the destination disk before the backup began The destination disk Pack ID and date will not be changed by the backup These types of backups may not be done on a Single drive There are some things done when the file SYSO SYS is included in this type of backup that are not readily apparent Certain information about the default drive types and the state of the SYSTEM SYSGEN
376. the keyboard repeat function DELAY sets the initial delay between the time a key is first pressed and the first repeat of that key It can be any value 10 or greater The default is 30 and provides a delay of about 3 4 of a second The RATE parameter sets the rate of key repeat and can be any value 1 or greater The default is 3 and provides a repeat rate of about 10 per second Using DOS version 6 you can change these parameters with the SETKI command Keyboard equivalents When KI DVR is set the TRS 80 keyboard will be able to produce the entire ASCII character set from X 00 to X 7F 0 to 127 Keys not normally accessible can be entered as described in the tables on pages 259 260 207 a i te A RE A RR AE I t Keyboard Driver Program Extended Cursor Mode ECM For DOS version 5 many applications programs use the four arrow keys to control cursor motion However this precludes entering an X 5B character as this is the value returned by the lt f gt To allow the full ASCH character set to be used by an application the ECM will change the values returned by the four arrow keys When in the ECM it will be necessary to use control keys to perform the original arrow functions lt CTRL gt lt H gt will perform a backspace lt CTRL gt lt I gt a tab et cetera Pressing an arrow key will display the corresponding graphics character The ECM will primarily be useful for applications programs that do their own cursor contr
377. ting Query each file before moving The switch ON or OFF may be specified Designate that system files are to be included in addition to visible files allows backups with no system disk in drive 0 BACKUP will move all or part of the data from a specified source disk to a specified destination disk The parameters of the BACKUP command may be used to determine which data will be moved All of the parameters are optional with only the source and destination drivespecs being 50 feet Hees tele boas ee bee Eae eee Lo O BACKUP Utility Command prompted for if not entered If the source disk contains a password other than PASSWORD it will be prompted for if not passed with the MPW parameter The BACKUP utility requires that destination disks must be formatted before the backup begius Having the destination disk formatted will allow the BACKUP utility to determine if a Mirror Image exact cylinder for cylinder copy backup is possible or if it will be necessary for the backup utility to do a file by file duplication When doing a backup by class from a disk of DOS version prior to x 3 to an x 3 or later disk the access user password if any will be removed and the x 3 style directory date and time information will be established It will not be permissible to backup SYSTEM files from an earlier disk to an x 3 disk during a backup by class BACKUP will construct a SYSTEM disk from a formatted DATA disk
378. tion Most TRS 80 floppy drive cables do not support 2 sided floppy drives The cylinder prompt will not appear for 8 drives as they always have 77 cylinders For 3 5 or 5 25 drives any number up to 96 may be entered Pressing lt ENTER gt will use the default cylinder value The bootstrap step rate is important only if you will be using the disk in drive 0 to boot up the system Be aware that too fast lower value a step rate may keep the disk from booting Before the actual formatting begins the target disk will be checked to see if has been previously formatted If it has the following message will appear Disk contains data Nome diskname Date mm dd yy Are you sure you want to format it If the disk contains an incomplete or non standard format one of the following messages may appear in place of the NAME diskname 154 ee FORMAT Utility Command Unreadable directory Non standard format Non initialized directory You will see the disk s name and date and can abort the format at this point Press lt N gt to abort the format or lt Y gt to continue If you have specified the ABS parameter you will see this message but will not be prompted to abort the format FORMAT parameter default values The NAME and MPW parameters may be specified in the command line followed by the desired string enclosed in parentheses If either parameter is specified without being followed by a string you will be prompte
379. tion Commands lt A gt Enters the ASCII Modify Mode In this mode modifications can be made in ASCIL Anything you can type in from the keyboard with the exceptions of the lt BREAK gt key and the arrow keys can be sent to the 142 ee eee ieee Teo Po Hoe Cea Leer ees ee ee A lie FED Utility Command edit buffer Modifications can be made by positioning the cursor over the bytes to be changed After the A command is issued the command buffer will display an A From this point on any characters entered will be taken as modifications to the bytes in the record The arrow keys may be used to position the cursor for additional edits To exit the ASCII modify mode the lt BREAK gt key must be pressed To modify a byte e Position the cursor to the desired byte to change e Type inthe ASCII character to replace the original After making a modification the relative byte cursors will move to the next byte of the record Note no changes are made to disk only to the edit buffer To make changes to disk see the Save command lt H gt Enter the Hex Modify Mode In this mode the user can modify bytes in the currently displayed record Modifications can be made by positioning the cursor over the bytes to be changed After the H command is issued the command buffer will display an H From this point on any characters entered will be taken as modifications to the bytes in the record The arrow keys may
380. to reside these overlays 119 a O a a aio ih A Aa A a a AAAA t _ Laas conma od DIR This is the command which allows the examination of a disk directory DIR Library Command Several parameters are allowed to set the type of data that will be displayed The syntax is DIR partspec filespec d1 I d2 parm parm parispec dl d2 A Exclude files which match Partial filespec with possible wild card characters Optional drive specification Optional Model 4 drive designation to request a directory display of drives d1 d2 inclusive View in full Allocation format or in brief format Used to specify files within a range of dates Selection format is M1 DI1 Y 1 M2 D2 Y 2 MI DI Y1 M1 D1 Y 1 and M1 D1 Y 1 Include view of the Invisible files View modified files ony Non stop display mode will not pause after each 15 lines Assumed if P is selected Direct output to the Printer Specify sorted or unsorted view YES is the default Include view of the System files DOS reserves a certain portion of every disk to keep information about the files and free space available on a disk This space is called the disk s directory The maximum number of files a directory can hold as well as the available free space will be determined by the number of sides the density and the number of cylinders on the disk DOS will always reserve certain portions of
381. to be able to turn them on or off indicating whether the device should be acceptable for I O Other PF keys control the selection of parameters associated with filespecs Still others control additional functions which aid in the interface between two communicating users You may find the need for characters not normally visible on your keyboard DOS provides all ASCII characters in the range 00 127 Accessing these characters is described completely in the KI DVR section COMM will generate a modem break extended null if you press the lt BREAK gt key To produce a normal TRS 80 break code for DOS version 5 X 01 press lt CTIRL gt lt A gt for DOS version 6 X 80 press lt CTRL gt lt C gt A local clear screen function is also available and can be requested by pressing the lt CLEAR gt lt SH gt lt gt keys COMM uses all of available memory below HIGH for dynamic buffering of certain device I O The amount of buffer space devoted to each device dynamically expands and shrinks according to how fast characters are sent to the device and how fast the device can accept them Fach buffer is essentially a variable length First In First Out FIFO storage compartment The amount of free space available for the buffers is noted in the bottom line of the menu display When this free space shrinks to less than 2K lt 2048 characters a warning message is displayed and an X OFF is automatically sent to the Communications Line
382. tter hard drive may have as many as eight tracks per cylinder when using DOS Again the number of sides and cylinders are established by the hardware capabilities and by answering questions when formatting the diskette Drive parameter information Two of the drive parameters shown in the device display may be adjusted with the SYSTEM library command They are the drive step rate and the access delay for 3 5 and 5 25 floppy drives STEP RATE refers to the speed of the disk head movement when moving from one cylinder to another To assure compatibility with all drive types the DOS version 5 master disk comes with the step rate set to the slowest rate the DOS version 6 master disk is set for the fastest step rate Most Model II users will be able to utilize the fastest step rate and should do so The step rates for all drives can be seen with the DEVICE Library command If desired they may be changed with the SYSTEM DRIVE STEP command The manufacturer of your disk drives should provide the maximum step rate the drive can handle If you specify too fast a step rate you will not be able to access the disk You will also be asked to set a bootstrap step rate when formatting a diskette This is the step rate that will be used for booting tf the disk will be used as a system disk in drive 0 Again too fast a step rate will keep the system from booting so be sure to check out the fastest rate your drives can handle The bo
383. uage DOS version 5 users may fully utilize the features of JCL from within a BASIC program DOS 6 users can invoke a DO command from BASIC but control will not return to BASIC once the command stream completes To use a JCL file to initiate an automatic start up of an BASIC program it will be necessary to use the AUTO library command to execute a JCL file Assuming the JCL file is named BAS JCL issuing the command AUTO DO BAS JCL will automatically invoke the desired BASIC program every time the computer is booted with the AUTOed system disk The actual JCL file should be sequenced as this next example shows Establish necessary drivers filters or other DOS options BASIC any needed parameters RUN PROGRAM BAS STOP This example shows the normal way to execute a BASIC program from a JCL file Any necessary system options are established BASIC is entered with any necessary parameters such as memory size and number of files and the BASIC program is loaded and executed Notice the termination macro STOP used in the JCL file As explained in the JCL EXECUTION section if this macro was not used or if the EXIT macro was used instead the JCL file would return to the DOS Ready prompt as soon as the first keyboard entry was requested The STOP macro will terminate the JCL execution and leave keyboard control with BASIC It is not necessary to use the AUTO library command when using a JCL file to execute a BASIC program
384. uffer Position to Record nnnn Save current record sector in edit buffer Toggle between 256 and 128 display mode eXit FED and return to LDOS Ready Zip through File Load Blocks Cancel current FED command Display FED instruction set Menu Advance one record in the file Backup one record in the file Display binary representation of byte 128 byte mode only FED Cursor Movement Move cursor left Move cursor right Move cursor up Move cursor down Position cursor to relative byte X 00 of the current record a oo es ee ee ee oa b e o o FED Utility Command MENU DISPLAY OF FED INSTRUCTION SET Forward ONE Record lt BREAK gt Cancels command Backward ONE Record lt N gt lt ENTER gt New File Beginning Record of File lt S gt lt ENTER gt Save Record Ending Record of File lt X gt lt ENTER gt Exit FED Position to Record lt H gt Hexadecimal Modify Go to next Load Block lt A gt ASCII Modify Calculate Load Address lt T gt Toggle Display modes Find ASCII String lt F gt Find Hex string Locate Hex Load Address Go next occurrence Dump File to Printer Output top of form Send Buffer to Printer lt gt Display Binary Value Press lt ENTER gt to Return to Display Mode FED Manipulation Commands lt gt Advances one record sequentially in the file For example if FED was currently displaying record X OO0C and lt gt was pressed the contents of record X 000D wo
385. uffer and the cursor position will remain unaffected Realize that if changes have been made to the record in the edit buffer these changes should be saved to the disk prior to issuing the lt D gt command If the printer goes off line during printing FED will continue printing after the printer has been re enabled Please note that the DOS spooler will work in conjunction with the printing operations of FED Also note that all records will be printed in 20 lines with a spacing of 2 lines between records This will allow 3 records to be printed on 66 line page paper lt Q gt This command will output a top of form character X 0C to the printer lt P gt The lt P gt command will print the contents of the edit buffer in ASCII and Hex After the lt P gt command has been issued the record display on the screen will be sent to the printer To terminate printing at any time depress the lt BREAK gt key See the sample output produced by the lt P gt command on page 148 FED Miscellaneous Commands lt ENTER gt Displays FED instruction menu lt X gt lt ENTER gt Exits FED and returns to DOS Ready lt N gt lt ENTER gt Opens a New file for editing A prompt for the filespec will be displayed If you input an invalid or improper filespec an error message will appear and you will be allowed to re enter the filespec Note that FED will never close files as files need not be closed with this type of editor 146 fie
386. uld be displayed provided that a record X 000D existed in the file An will be displayed directly below the record number when pointing to the last record in the file Issuing the lt gt command will not change the position of the relative byte cursors A will be shown in the command buffer to show positive motion in the file lt gt Backs up one record in the file If FED was currently displaying record X 0087 and lt gt was pressed the contents of record X 0086 would be displayed Issuing the lt gt command does not change the position of the relative byte cursors The lt gt command will be ignored if it is issued when record Q is being displayed A will be shown in the command buffer to show negative motion in the file lt B gt Positions to the beginning of the file record X 0000 and points cursors to relative byte X 00 141 ee aaa RE I NR A A A te tA ERR ec eR RA I A FED Utility Command lt E gt Positions to the ending record of the file An will appear directly below the record number indicating that the record being displayed is the last record in the file The relative byte cursors will be positioned on the last byte in the file not necessarily relative byte X FF Since DOS uses sector I O the whole sector will be displayed and any byte in the sector may be modified Realize that any modifications made to bytes beyond the last byte will not cause the EOF
387. ut may be filtered with the FORMS FLT or PR FLT program supplied with DOS This filter program allows you to set parameters such as the number of characters per line the indent on line wrap around the lines per page the page length etc If you don t have a printer siinply use the ROUTE library command to route the printer to a disk file and all printing will be saved enabling you to print it later on a system with a printer You could also route the printer to the display and the characters will appear on the video instead of gotng to the printer Throughout this manual you will see reference to the terms device or devspec and logical device These terms represent the six system devices plus any devices the user has created To create a device please refer to the commands LINK ROUTE and SET It is possible to use certain commands involving data I O such as APPEND COPY and REMOVE KILL with device specifications devspecs as well as file specifications fitespecs It is not possible to imagine or describe all situations involving the possible uses and creation of devices What this section will do is to explain the six DOS system devices Any other device interaction or creation will be determined by the individual needs sophistication and imagination of the user KI The Keyboard The Kl device is the keyboard Using the KI DVR program or system resident DOS version 6 keyboard driver will give you f
388. video display will display what you send only if the distant end echoes back to you what it receives from you Although it may be convenient to operate half duplex DUPLEX ON when communicating with another computer it may be more useful for one of the computers to play HOST and operate in half duplex with echo to the distant end white the distant end is full duplex DUPLEX OFF This will become more evident under the discussion of file transmission COMM initializes in the full duplex or DUPLEX OFF state The PF key is also one that operates in concert with the ON and OFF keys If you want to go to half duplex after COMM initializes you must depress the lt CLEAR gt lt SH gt lt gt keys followed by the lt CLEAR gt lt gt keys lt CLEAR gt lt SH gt lt gt ECHO This will provide the function normally undertaken by a host system If ECHO ON is specified everything received from the communications line will be re transmitted This mode is desirable if the distant end must operate full dupiex and has no local copy A caution to be observed is that if both ends are set for ECHO ON then the first character sent will be echoed back and forth indefinitely at least until one end turns ECHO OFF lt CLEAR gt lt SH gt lt gt ECHO LINEFEED The echoing of a line feed is the desired mode if the distant end is a dumb hard copy terminal that has its own local copy but expects the line feed to be sent by the host computer Wi
389. when discussing these parameters filespec partspec and wee WildCard Character Filespec refers to a file s name and extension For example the filespec BACKUP CMD has the filename BACKUP and the extension ICMD A partspec would be any part or parts of a filespec Wee means a special symbol the dollar sign used in place of characters in a filespec or partspec For example a command using a partspec is DIR CMD 0 This would show only visible files with the extension CMD on drive 0 You can always include any of the A I N P S DATE or SORT parameters whenever using any filespec partspec or wcc You may use a filename a file extension or both together in any DIR command It is not necessary to use the complete name or extension The wee mask character can be used to mask out certain groups of characters when using a filespec or partspec Using a partial filename or extension provides the opposite function of using a wcc Refer to the following Using a partial filename will display all files whose name starts with those characters regardless of how many other characters follow The commands DIR BA 0 DIR BACK 0 126 Nn a ee OR g a ae ee ORE Te ee ee aN Te a a i a rr rN A ANAL REN EY A LA OE ap EN LL A AL oun lees See aes Wek i DIR Library Command DIR BA C DIR BACK CMD would all display the file BACKUP CMD although any other files matching the partspe
390. will be false and the second FILTER command will not be written to the SYSTEM JCL file Using the second DO command example would reverse the results In the case where either one or the other FILTER command is always desired there is an easicr way to accomplish the same results and requires only the use of the PR1 token as shown in the following example START JCL for program start up SET FF FORMS DOS 6 FILTER PR FF DOS 6 FILTER PR PR FLT DOS 5 1F PRI FORMS CHARS 80 ELSE FORMS CHARS 132 END By using the ELSE macro an alternative course of action is provided in case the IF test is false Thus the command DO START PR1 would use the 80 character FILTER line and ignore everything between the 297 Batch Processing Job Contro Language HELSE and the END The command DO START would cause the IF PRI to test false and therefore use the 132 character FILTER line Although the previous examples have shown a single line in each conditional block any amount of lines may be included Refer to the following MENU ICL example MENU JCL selection start up fif Ki SET KI KI DVR TYPE JKL DOS 5 FILTER K MINIDOS FLT DOS 5 FILTER PR PR FLT DOS 5 _ SET FF FORMS DOS 6 FILTER PR FF DOS 6 FORMS FFHARD CHARS 80 end BASIC it PI RUN PROGRAM1 BAS end if P2 RUN PROGRAM2 BAS end stop This example references three tokens KI Pl a
391. will indicate a device capable of input and output This device is the Keyboard Input which is controlled with the keyboard driver This device is the Display Output video This device is the line printer normally accessed with your computer s parallel printer port This is the JOBLOG control device which is shown NIL on power up and must be set to its driver IL DVR to be used This is the Standard Input device which will normally be pointed NIL This is the Standard Output and will normally be pointed NIL 117 DEVICE Library Command UD This may be any user created device It must be an asterisk followed by any two alpha characters Setting up phantom or real devices is a very important part of the device independence of DOS see the FILTER LINK ROUTE and SET commands These device relationships and specifications will change from time to time depending on the use of the FILTER ROUTE SET LINK SYSTEM and RESET library commands Note that the UD device gt shown in the display is a phantom device that has been routed to a disk file A phantom device refers to a device specification that is not an actual piece of hardware it is merely a way to link to another file or device The filename of the file is shown after the device that is providing the input to that file After you have routed or set a device and or driver you may use the DEVICE library command to see how the different devi
392. will log i in the directory cylinder and number of sides on a diskette The syntax is Is any currently enabled drive The LOG utility will provide a way to log in diskette information and update the drive s Drive Code Table DCT It will perform the same log in function as the DEVICE command except for a single drive rather than all drives It will also provide a way to swap the drive 0 diskette Aor a double sided diskette LOG 0 will prompt you and allow you to switch the drive 0 diskette The LOG 0 command must be used when switching between double and single sided diskettes in drive 0 Otherwise it is not needed Note Double sided single density disks cannot be used to boot the Model I system 179 MEMORY MEMORY Library Command The MEMORY command allows you to reserve a portion of memory see the current HIGHS highest byte of unused memory modify a memory address or jump to a specified memory location The Version 6 display output includes the status of switchable memory banks known to the DOS It also displays a map of modules resident in I O driver system memory V6 and high memory The syntax is MEMORY CLEAR MEMORY High a Add a Word dd Byte d GO a a dd d Add a Any address in hex or decimal notation Any hex word other than X 0000 Any byte in hex notation other than X FF Displays the word at the specified address Also specifies the address for WORD and BYTE For
393. will remain unchanged If the file is currently visible it will remain so and vice versa The levels of protection associated with the passwords are as follows PRIVILEGE No access without password entry execute only read execute read write without extend execute write read execute rename write read execute All access except re attrib V5 All access except re attrib V6 Allows total access Same as ALL The protection levels form a hierarchy with the highest protection level NONE allowing the least amount of access ATTRIB sets or changes the protection of a file which already exists on a disk There are several ways to use this feature Here are some examples of the ATTRIB command ATTRIB CUSTFILE DAT 0 OWN BOSSMAN PROT READ VIS ATTRIB CUSTFILE DAT 0 O BOSSMAN P RE V This will protect the file CUSTFILE DAT on drive 0 so that it can only be read by a file read routine No password will be required to open and read the file because the protection level has been set to READ It can t be changed or written to in any way unless the owner password BOSSMAN is used when specifying the file in which case full access would be given Notice that the file will be visible in the directory ATTRIB ISAM BAS 0 OWN SECRET PROT EXEC INV ATTRIB ISAM BAS 0 O SECRET P EX After invoking this command no one will be able to list this program when it is brought into BASIC because the protection level
394. word of the destination diskette must be an exact match of the source disk If they do not exactly match the backup command that follows will issue some type of unwanted prompt which would cause the JCL to abort Also note that the parameters Q N and ABS were specified Both are necessary The Q N parameter causes the computer to use the default of PASSWORD for the master password and hence the Master Password prompt will be bypassed The ABS parameter ensures that no prompt will appear if the destination diskette contains data The pause after the format statement allows you to check whether or not the format was successful If the destination diskette was formatted prop erly you may press lt ENTER gt to continue the JCL If tracks were locked out during the format you may press lt BREAK gt Realize that doing so will cause the JCL to abort and it will be necessary to restart the JCL activity After lt ENTER gt has been pressed in response to the second pause the backup will take place If any error occurs during the backup the JCL will be aborted Once the backup has been completed successfully the comment line will appear and the DO command will be executed This command will cause the SYSTEM JCL file to be executed Realize that if this is to be a duplicating JCL the compilation phase cannot be skipped 323 Batch Processing Job Control Language 324 en A A TR r GLOSSARY ALPHANUMERIC consisting o
395. xecution macros e jJCL conditional macros e JCL labels It is allowable to compile any JCL file even if it contains only executable lines Any of the examples in the previous execution JCL section could be compiled The compile phase would examine each line determine that it is an execution line and write it to the SYSTEM JCL file After the coinpilation is completed the SYSTEM JCL file would be executed producing exactly the same results as if the file were executed without compiling There are several new terms that will be used when discussing the JCL compilation phase Briefly described they are TOKEN The term token is the most important term to understand when using the compile phase of JCL It is fortunately very easy to understand A token is merely a string of up to eight characters and may contain upper and lower case alphabetic characters A Z and a z and the numbers 0 9 293 re a NT I A RB I I I a RA A A PR fH A oe pm we dM NN i A NR ee Batch Processing Job Control Language Tokens have two uses as a true or false switch for logical decisions and as a character string value for use in substitution fields LOGICAL OPERATOR e Logical AND represented by the ampersand symbol amp e Logical OR represented by the plus symbol gt Logical NOT represented by the minus symbol Although mentioned here these logical operators will be discussed only in the
396. xt The marker is displayed as a graphic right bracket These markers occupy ordinary text positions thus they may be deleted or overstriked Any remaining in the text buffer at the time a FILE command is performed will be written to the disk file just as if they were ordinary text characters Although you can mark as many blocks as your heart desires TED provides no way to differentiate between marked blocks in other than the BLOCK DELETE function For copying and moving blocks the first block marked in the text is the one chosen for copying or moving On the other hand a BLOCK DELETE request requires that the cursor be positioned within the interior of the marked block which is to be deleted 240 aa Eee lie les he las ee ABPE190 UpilityCommand To COPY the first marked block in the text to some other position simply mark the beginning and end of the block as discussed above move the cursor to the position in the text where you want the marked block copied into then invoke the block copy command via the sequence lt CTRL B gt followed by lt C gt Note that the block which will be copied is the first marked block found in the text buffer A few things could go wrong with your request IF TED can find no properly marked block it will display the error message Marker and terminate the block mode Another error which could occur is when the position you wish the block copied into happens to be in the interior of
397. y The edit buffer will contain one 256 byte record at any given time There will be two cursors flashing within the record one cursor will be in the ASCII portion of the screen the other cursor will be in the Hex display portion Upon initially accessing a file these cursors will be positioned over relative byte X 00 of record X 0000 Throughout this documentation the term relative byte will be used and will indicate the byte number 0 255 relative to the sector in question Also hexadecimal notation X nn will be used to represent the current record number and relative byte number There will also be an input cursor located on the bottom right portion of the screen following the message Command This will be referred to as the command buffer and will be the place on the screen where commands are entered The current command in use will always be displayed When in the 128 character mode the command buffer will appear on the lower Icft portion of the screen Also shown on the screen will be additional information such as current record number filespec relative byte within the sector etc The previous screen illustrations show where this information will be displayed For certain commands inputs of several characters will be required Depending on the mode you are in 256 or 128 character mode these inputs will be taken in a different manner When in the 256 character mode these types of inputs wil
398. y Command Place a system diskette in drive 0 and press lt ENTER gt to return to the DOS level If it is desired to use QFB again with different parameters press lt R gt in response to the prompt Doing so will cause the drives to be prompted for and prompts will appear for all parameters If QFB is to be restarted or the command QFB Q Y is entered the following prompts for the parameters will occur Duplicate unallocated tracks Y N Verify on some pass Y N Verify on second puss Y N The first prompt relates to the ALL parameter If it is answered with lt Y gt all cylinders will be read from the source diskette and written to the destination diskette regardless of whether or not the cylinder contains information If this prompt is answered lt N gt only cylinders containing information will be read and written The next prompt relates to the V1 parameter If it is answered with lt Y gt all cylinders on the destination diskette will be verified immediately after all writes If answered lt N gt no immediate verify will be done The final prompt corresponds to the V2 parameter If it is answered with lt Y gt all cylinders on the destination diskette will be verified upon completion of all writing to the diskette If answered lt N gt there will be no second pass verification These utilities perform no check on the destination diskette with respect to the existence of data Any existing information o

LDOS & LS-DOS Reference Manual M-40-060 (1992 - tim

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

LDOS &amp; LS-DOS Reference Manual M-40-060 (1992 - tim

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

LDOS & LS-DOS Reference Manual M-40-060 (1992 - tim